Form 485BPOS FS VARIABLE SEPARATE
File Nos. 333-178843
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
Form N-4
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
| |
Pre-Effective Amendment No. |
[ ] |
| |
Post-Effective Amendment No. 25 |
[X]
|
and/or
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
UNDER
THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
| |
Amendment No. 25 |
[X]
|
(Check Appropriate Box or Boxes)
FS Variable Separate Account
(Exact Name of Registrant)
THE UNITED STATES LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK
(Name of Depositor)
28 Liberty Street, Floor 45th
New York, NY 10005-1400
New York, NY 10005-1400
(Address of Depositor’s Principal Offices) (Zip Code)
Depositor’s Telephone Number, including Area Code: (800) 996-9786
Trina Sandoval, Esq.
The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York
21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750
Woodland Hills, California 91367
The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York
21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750
Woodland Hills, California 91367
(Name and Address of Agent for Service for Depositor and Registrant)
Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: Continuous
It is proposed that this filing will become effective:
☐ immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
☒ on April 28, 2025 pursuant to
paragraph (b) of Rule 485
☐ 60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485
☐ on (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485.
If appropriate, check the following box:
☐ This post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a
previously filed post-effective amendment.
Title of Securities Being Registered: Units of interest in flexible premium
deferred variable annuity contracts.
Polaris Platinum O-Series
Prospectus
April 28, 2025
Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity Contract
issued by Depositor
The United States Life Insurance Company
in the City of New York
in the state of New York
in connection with
FS VARIABLE SEPARATE ACCOUNT
This variable annuity has several investment choices - Variable Portfolios (which are subaccounts of the separate account) and available Fixed Account options. Each Variable Portfolio invests exclusively in shares of one of the Underlying Funds listed in Appendix A to this prospectus.
This contract is no longer available for purchase by new contract
Owners.
Please read this prospectus carefully
and keep it for future reference. It contains important information about the variable annuity, including a description of all material features of the contract.
These securities have not been approved or disapproved by the SEC, nor any state securities
commission, nor has the SEC passed upon the accuracy or adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal
offense.
Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available at www.Investor.gov.
Inquiries: If you have questions about your contract, call your financial representative or contact us at Annuity Service Center, P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570. Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862 and website
(www.corebridgefinancial.com/annuities).
Please see ALLOCATION OF PURCHASE PAYMENTS in this prospectus for the address to which you must send Purchase Payments.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
| Glossary |
3 |
| 4 | |
| 6 | |
| 6 | |
| 6 | |
| 7 | |
| 8 | |
| 8 | |
| 8 | |
| 8 | |
| 10 | |
| 10 | |
| 10 | |
| 10 | |
| 12 | |
| 14 | |
| 15 | |
| 16 | |
| 17 | |
| 18 | |
| 18 | |
| 18 | |
| 18 | |
| 19 | |
| 20 | |
| 20 | |
| 21 | |
| 21 | |
| 21 | |
| 22 | |
| 23 | |
| 23 | |
| 25 | |
| 25 | |
| 25 | |
| 26 | |
| 27 | |
| 28 | |
| 28 | |
| 28 | |
| 29 | |
| 30 | |
| 32 | |
| 36 | |
| 40 | |
| 41 | |
| 42 | |
| 42 | |
| 43 | |
| 43 | |
| 43 | |
| 44 | |
| 44 | |
| 45 | |
| 46 | |
| 46 | |
| 46 | |
| 46 | |
| 47 | |
| 47 | |
| 47 | |
| 47 | |
| 47 |
| 49 | |
| 49 | |
| 49 | |
| 50 | |
| 50 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 | |
| 51 | |
| 52 | |
| 54 | |
| 57 | |
| 57 | |
| 57 | |
| 57 | |
| 58 | |
| 58 | |
| 59 | |
| 59 | |
| 59 | |
| 59 | |
| 60 | |
| 60 | |
| 60 | |
| 60 | |
| 60 | |
| 61 | |
| A-1 | |
| B-1 | |
| C-1 | |
| D-1 | |
| E-1 | |
| F-1 | |
| G-1 | |
| H-1 | |
| I-1 |
2
Glossary
We have capitalized some of the technical terms used in this prospectus. To help you understand these terms, we have defined them in this glossary.
Accumulation Phase - The period during which you invest money in your contract.
Accumulation Units - A measurement we use to calculate the value of the variable portion of your contract during the
Accumulation Phase.
Annuitant - The person on whose life we base annuity income payments after you begin the Income Phase.
Annuity Date - The date you select on which annuity income payments begin.
Annuity Units - A measurement we use to calculate the amount of annuity income payments you receive from the
variable portion of your contract during the Income Phase.
Beneficiary - The person you designate to receive any benefits under the contract if you or, in the case of a
non-natural Owner, the Annuitant dies. If your contract is jointly owned, you and the
joint Owner are each other’s primary Beneficiary.
Company - Refers to The United States Life
Insurance Company in the City of New York (“US Life”) for contracts issued
in New York only, the insurer that issues this contract. The term “we,” “us” and “our” are also used to identify the issuing Company.
Continuation Contribution - An amount by which the death benefit that would have been paid to the spousal Beneficiary upon the death of the original Owner exceeds the contract value as of the Good Order date. We will
contribute this amount, if any, to the contract value upon spousal continuation.
Continuing Spouse - Spouse of original contract Owner at the time of death who elects to continue the contract after the death of the original contract
Owner.
Fixed Account - An account, if available, in which you may invest money and earn a fixed rate of return. Fixed
Accounts are obligations of the General Account.
Fund-of-Funds - An Underlying Fund that pursues its investment goal by investing its assets in a combination of
other Underlying Funds.
General Account - The Company’s account, which includes any amounts you have allocated to available Fixed
Accounts and the Secure Value Account, including any interest credited thereon, and
amounts owed under your contract for death benefit and/or Living Benefit which are in excess of portions of contract value allocated to the Variable Portfolios.
Good Order - Fully and accurately completed forms and/or instructions, including any necessary documentation,
applicable to any given transaction or request received by us.
Income Phase - The period upon annuitization during
which we make annuity income payments to you.
Insurable Interest - Evidence that the Owner(s), Annuitant(s) or Beneficiary(ies) will suffer a financial loss at
the death of the life that triggers the death benefit. Generally, we consider an
interest insurable if a familial relationship and/or an economic interest exists. A familial relationship generally includes those persons related by blood or by law. An economic interest exists when the
Owner has a lawful and substantial economic interest in having the life, health or bodily
safety of the insured life preserved.
Latest Annuity Date - The first NYSE business day of the month following your 95th birthday.
Market Close - The close of the New York Stock Exchange on business days, excluding holidays, usually at 1:00
p.m. Pacific Time.
Non-Qualified (contract) - A contract purchased with after-tax dollars. In general, these contracts are not under any
pension plan, specially sponsored program or individual retirement account
(“IRA”).
NYSE - New York Stock Exchange.
Owner - The person or entity (if a non-natural Owner) with an interest or title to this contract. The term “you” or “your” are also used
to identify the Owner.
Premium Based
Charge - A charge that is deducted from your contract value on each Quarter Anniversary
following the date each Premium is made and is deducted for seven years.
Purchase Payments - The money you give us to buy
and invest in the contract.
Purchase Payments Limit - $2,000,000 for contracts issued on or after September 5, 2023, $1,000,000 for contracts issued on or after May 1, 2014. $1,500,000 for
contracts issued prior to May 1, 2014.
Qualified (contract) - A contract purchased with pretax dollars. These contracts are generally purchased under a pension plan, specially sponsored program or IRA.
Secure Value Account - A Fixed Account, available only with election of certain Living Benefits, to which we allocate a
percentage of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution.
Separate Account - A segregated asset account maintained by the Company separately from the Company’s General Account. The Separate Account consists of
Variable Portfolios or subaccounts, each investing in shares of the Underlying Funds.
Trusts - Collectively refers to the AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds), American Funds Insurance Series®, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust, Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc., MFS Variable
Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, Seasons Series Trust and SunAmerica
Series Trust.
Underlying Funds - The underlying investment portfolios of the Trusts in which the Variable Portfolios invest.
Variable Portfolio(s) - The variable investment options available under the contract. Each Variable Portfolio, which is a subaccount of the Separate
Account, invests in shares of one of the Underlying Funds. Each Underlying Fund has its own investment objective.
3
Important Information You Should Consider About the Contract
| |
FEES AND EXPENSES |
Location in
Prospectus | ||
| Charges for Early
Withdrawals |
You may be subject to charges for early withdrawals. Withdrawal
charges do not apply to certain withdrawals including
the withdrawal up to the annual penalty-free withdrawal
amount which equals 10% of your Purchase Payments not yet
withdrawn. If you withdraw money from your contract
within 7 years following each Purchase Payment, you may
be assessed a withdrawal charge of up to 6% as a percentage of each Purchase Payment withdrawn. The maximum withdrawal charge ranges from 6% to 2.25% depending
on the total Purchase Payments you invest.
For example, if you were to withdraw $100,000 during a withdrawal
charge period, you could be assessed a withdrawal charge
of up to $6,000 if your maximum withdrawal charge is 6%
or $2,250 if your maximum withdrawal charge is 2.25%. |
Expenses –
Withdrawal
Charges | ||
| Transaction
Charges |
In addition to withdrawal charges, you may be charged for other
transactions. You will be charged for each transfer
after 15 transfers in any contract year during the Accumulation Phase. There may also be taxes on Purchase Payments. |
Expenses | ||
| Ongoing Fees and
Expenses (annual
charges) |
The table below describes the current fees and expenses of the
contract that you may pay each
year, depending on the options you choose. Please refer to your contract specifications
page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year
based on the options you have elected.
|
Expenses | ||
| Annual Fee |
Minimum |
Maximum | ||
| Base Contract1 |
1.16
% |
1.16
% | ||
| Investment Options2
(Underlying Fund fees and expenses) |
0.46% |
1.58% | ||
| Optional Benefits Available for an
Additional Charge
(For a single optional benefit, if elected) |
0.25%3 |
2.70%
4 | ||
| 1 As a percentage of the value in the Separate Account (includes a percentage attributable to the contract maintenance fee and the Premium Based Charge). 2 As a percentage of Underlying Fund
net assets. 3 As a percentage of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios.
4 As a percentage of the Income Base used to
calculate the guaranteed benefit. This represents the
maximum rate for the most expensive optional benefit.
Because your contract is customizable, the choices you make affect how
much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of
owning your contract, the following table shows the
lowest and highest cost you could pay each year, based on current
charges. This estimate assumes that you do not take
withdrawals from the contract, which could add withdrawal
charges that substantially increase costs. |
||||
| Lowest Annual Cost: $1,548 |
Highest Annual Cost: $4,257 | |||
| Assumes:
•Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation
•Least expensive Underlying Fund fees and expenses •No optional benefits
•No withdrawal charges •No additional Purchase Payments,
transfers, or withdrawals |
Assumes:
•Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation
•Most expensive combination of optional benefits and Underlying Fund fees and expenses •No withdrawal charges
•No additional Purchase Payments, transfers, or withdrawals | |||
4
| |
RISKS |
Location in
Prospectus | ||
| Risk of Loss |
You can gain or lose money by investing in this contract, including
possible loss of your principal investment.
|
Principal Risks of
Investing in the
Contract | ||
| Not a Short-Term
Investment |
•This contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an
investor who needs ready access to cash.
•Charges may apply to withdrawals. Withdrawal charges could significantly reduce the
value of your investment or the amount that you receive upon taking a
withdrawal. Withdrawals may also reduce or terminate
contract guarantees. •The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and optional Living Benefit guarantees
mean that this contract is generally more beneficial to investors with
a long investment time horizon. | |||
| Risks Associated
with Investment
Options |
•An investment in this contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance and
can vary depending on the performance of the investment options
available under the contract.
•Each investment option (including each Fixed Account option) has its own unique risks.
•You should review the investment options before making an investment decision. | |||
| Insurance
Company Risks |
An investment in the contract is subject to the risks related to us,
The United States Life Insurance Company in the city of New York. Any obligations
(including under a Fixed Account option), guarantees,
and benefits of the contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. More information about us is available upon request by calling the Annuity Service
Center at (800) 445-7862 or visiting www.corebridgefinancial.com/annuities. |
|||
| |
RESTRICTIONS
|
| ||
| Investments |
•Certain investment options may not be available under your contract.
•You may transfer funds between the investment options, subject to certain restrictions.
•Your transfers between the Variable Portfolios are subject to policies designed to deter
frequent and short-term trading.
•The minimum transfer amount is $100. If less than $100 would remain in an investment
option after a transfer, the entire amount must be
transferred. •Your ability to transfer amounts to a Fixed Account option may be restricted.
•We reserve the right to remove or substitute Underlying Funds as investment options. |
Investment
Options | ||
| Optional Benefits |
•Additional restrictions and limitations apply under the contract’s optional benefits.
•If you elected an optional Living Benefit: ○Not all investment options may be available and you must
invest in accordance with the applicable investment
requirements. ○We reserve the right to modify the investment requirement in the future.
○You may be required to invest a certain percentage of your contract value in a certain
investment option, including the Secure Value Account which is only
available with certain optional Living Benefits.
Special transfer and withdrawal restrictions may apply.
•Withdrawals that exceed limits specified by the terms of an optional benefit may reduce
the value of the benefit by reducing the benefit by an amount greater
than the value withdrawn and could terminate the
benefit. |
Optional Living
Benefit Death Benefits | ||
| |
TAXES |
| ||
| Tax Implications |
•You should consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an
investment in and payments received under the contract.
•If you purchase the contract through a tax-qualified plan or individual retirement account
(IRA), there is no additional tax benefit under the
contract. •Earnings under your contract are taxed at ordinary income tax rates when withdrawn.
You may have to pay a tax penalty if you take a withdrawal before age
59½. |
Taxes | ||
5
| |
CONFLICTS OF INTEREST |
Location in
Prospectus | ||
| Investment
Professional
Compensation |
Your financial representative may receive compensation for selling
this contract to you in the form of commissions,
additional cash compensation, and/or non-cash compensation. We may share the revenue we earn on this contract with your financial representative’s firm.
Revenue sharing arrangements and commissions may provide selling firms
and/or their registered representatives with an
incentive to favor sales of our contracts over other
variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to
which a selling firm does not receive the same level of
additional compensation. You should ask your financial
representative about how they are compensated. |
Payments in Connection with Distribution of the Contract | ||
| Exchanges |
Some financial representatives may have a financial incentive to offer
you a new contract in place of the one you already own.
You should exchange a contract you already own only if
you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both
contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new
contract rather than continue to own your existing
contract. | |||
OVERVIEW OF THE CONTRACT
Purpose of the Contract
The contract is designed to help you invest on a tax-deferred basis, meet long-term financial goals,
and plan for your retirement. You can accumulate assets by investing in the
contract’s investment options and then later convert those accumulated assets into a stream of guaranteed income payments from us. The contract includes certain death benefit options that may help
financially protect your beneficiaries in the event of your death. An optional Living
Benefit may also be available under the contract, which is designed to help you achieve
your financial goals and protect against certain financial risks.
This contract may be appropriate for you if you have a
long investment time horizon and the contract’s terms and conditions are
consistent with your financial goals. It is not intended for people whose liquidity needs require early or frequent withdrawals or for people who intend to frequently trade in the contract’s Variable
Portfolios.
Phases of the Contract
Like all deferred annuities, the contract has two phases: (1) the Accumulation Phase (for savings) and (2) the Income Phase (for income).
Accumulation Phase. During the Accumulation Phase, you invest the money under your contract in one or more available investment options to help you build
assets on a tax-deferred basis. The available investment options may include:
•
Variable Portfolios. When you invest in a Variable Portfolio, you are indirectly investing in the Variable Portfolio’s Underlying Fund. The Underlying Funds have different investment objectives, strategies, and risks. You can gain or lose money if you invest in a Variable
Portfolio.
Additional information about each Underlying
Additional information about each Underlying
Fund is provided in an appendix to this prospectus. Please see
APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER
THE CONTRACT.
•
Fixed Accounts. When you invest in a Fixed Account option, your principal is guaranteed and earns interest based on a rate set and guaranteed by the Company.
The amount of money you accumulate under your contract depends
(in part) on the performance of the investment options you choose. You may transfer money between investment options during the Accumulation Phase, subject to certain restrictions and possible fees.
Your accumulated assets impact the value of your contract’s benefits during the
Accumulation Phase, including the death benefit and any optional Living Benefits, as well as the amount available for withdrawal.
Income Phase. When you are ready to receive guaranteed income under the contract, you can switch to the Income
Phase, at which time you will start to receive annuity income payments from us. This is
also referred to as “annuitizing” your contract. You generally decide when to
annuitize your contract, although there are restrictions on the earliest and latest
times that your contract may be annuitized. If you do not annuitize or surrender your
contract before the latest annuitization date, your contract will be automatically
annuitized.
You can choose from the available annuity income options, which may provide income for life, for an
available period of time, or a combination of both. You can also choose to receive
payments on a variable or fixed basis, or some combination of both. If the payments are fixed, the dollar amount of each payment will not change. If the payments are variable, the dollar amounts for the
payments will fluctuate.
There is no death benefit during the Income Phase. Annuity payments may be payable after death depending on the annuity income option that you selected. You
cannot take
6
withdrawals of
contract value or surrender the contract during the Income Phase. If you own an optional Living Benefit at the time that you annuitize the contract, you may choose to take annuity income payments
in accordance with that Living Benefit. Otherwise, your optional Living Benefit
terminates at the beginning of the Income Phase.
Contract Features
Accessing Your Money. You may withdraw money from your contract at any time during the Accumulation Phase. If you make a withdrawal, you may have to
pay a withdrawal charge and/or income taxes, including a tax penalty if you are younger
than age 59½. Withdrawals may negatively impact the value of your contract’s benefits, and may cause an optional Living Benefit to terminate.
Tax Treatment. You can transfer money between investment options without tax implications, and earnings (if any) on your investments are generally tax-deferred. Earnings are not taxed until they are
distributed, which may occur when making a withdrawal, upon receiving an annuity
payment, or upon payment of the death benefit.
Optional Living Benefits. You may have
elected one of the optional Living Benefits under the contract for an additional
fee at the time the contract was purchased. Each Living Benefit is designed to provide limited protection from unfavorable investment performance during the
Accumulation Phase, and can also provide a guaranteed income stream that may last as
long as you live.
Death Benefits. If you die during the Accumulation Phase, the Company pays a death benefit to your beneficiary or beneficiaries. The contract includes a
standard death benefit equal to the greater of the contract value or Net Purchase
Payments at no additional charge. If you elect the optional Maximum Anniversary Value
death benefit for an additional fee, a greater amount may be payable upon death.
Additional Features and Services. Additional features and services under the contract are summarized below. There are no additional charges associated with
these features and services unless otherwise noted. Not all features and services may
be available under your contract.
•
Secure Value Account. Under certain optional Living Benefits, which include an additional charge, a certain percentage of your investment must be allocated to the Secure Value Account. As a Fixed
Account option, amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account are guaranteed with
respect to principal and a guaranteed rate of interest.
•
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Fixed Accounts. If you invest in a DCA Fixed Account, interest is credited to amounts allocated to that DCA Fixed
Account and your money is systematically transferred from the DCA Fixed Account to one
or more investment options over a specified period of time. Automatic transfers do not
count towards the number of free transfers per contract year.
•
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Program. The DCA program allows you to systematically transfer a specified dollar amount or percentage of contract value from an investment option to one or more
eligible investment options. Automatic transfers do not count towards the number of
free transfers per contract year.
•
Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program. This program allows you to have your investments periodically rebalanced so that the resulting allocations are consistent with your current investment instructions. Automatic rebalances do
not count towards the number of free transfers per contract year.
•
Systematic Withdrawal Program. This program allows you to receive periodic withdrawals from your contract on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis.
•
Automatic Payment Plan. This program allows you to make automatic subsequent Purchase Payments, once you have contributed at least the minimum initial Purchase Payment.
7
Fee Table FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED BETWEEN MAY 24, 2021 AND DECEMBER 8, 2024
The following tables describe the fees and expenses that
you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from the contract. Please refer to your contract data page for information
about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.
The first table describes the fees and expenses that you pay at the time you surrender the contract, make withdrawals from the contract, or make transfers between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted.
Contract Owner Transaction
Expenses
| Maximum Withdrawal Charges1 (as a percentage of each Purchase Payment withdrawn) |
6% |
Your contract provides for a penalty-free withdrawal amount each year. Please see PENALTY-FREE WITHDRAWAL AMOUNT below.
| Transfer Fee2 (Per transfer after 15 transfers in any contract year) |
$25 |
The following tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay each year during the time that you own the contract, not
including Underlying Fund fees and expenses. If you chose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.
Contract Owner Annual Expenses
| Maximum Premium Based Charge3 (assessed quarterly as an annualized percentage of each Purchase Payment) |
0.71% |
| Contract Maintenance Fee
(assessed annually and may be waived if
contract value is $75,000 or more) |
$50 |
| Base Contract Expenses4
(deducted from the average daily ending net
asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios) |
0.95% |
Optional Death Benefit
(deducted from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios)
| Maximum Anniversary Value |
0.25% |
Optional Living Benefit5
(calculated as percentage of
the Income Base and deducted from the contract value)
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex
| |
Maximum Fee6 |
| One Covered Person |
2.50%
|
| Two Covered Persons |
2.50% |
Annual Underlying Fund Expenses
The following shows the minimum and maximum total operating expenses charged by the Underlying Funds
of the Trusts, before any waivers or reimbursements, that you may pay periodically
during the time that you own the contract. A complete list of Underlying Funds available under the contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in Appendix A.
| |
Minimum |
Maximum |
| Expenses deducted from
Underlying Fund assets,
including management fees,
distribution and/or service
(12b-1) fees, if applicable,
and other expenses. |
0.46%
|
1.58% |
8
Footnotes to the Fee Table:
1 Withdrawal Charge Schedule (as a percentage of each Premium
withdrawn) declines over 7 years as follows and applies to each Premium starting on the Premium receipt date:
| |
Years Since Premium Receipt | |||||||
| Accumulated Premium Breakpoint |
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8+ |
| Less than $50,000 |
6% |
5% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $50,000 but less than $100,000 |
5.5% |
5% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $100,000 but less than $250,000 |
4.5% |
4% |
4% |
3% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $250,000 but less than $500,000 |
3.5% |
3% |
3% |
2.25% |
2% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $500,000 but less than $1,000,000 |
3% |
2% |
2% |
1.5% |
1% |
1% |
1% |
0% |
| $1,000,000 or more |
2.25% |
1.5% |
1.5% |
1% |
1% |
0.75% |
0.5% |
0% |
The Withdrawal Charge for each Premium is determined based on the sum of all Premiums (including the subsequent Premium) and the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint achieved as of the Premium receipt date. Please see EXPENSES
section below.
2 In Pennsylvania and Texas, any transfer over the limit of 15
will incur a $10 transfer fee.
3 Each Premium is subject to the Premium Based Charge deducted over a period of 7 years and is deducted quarterly from your contract value. Please see EXPENSES section below.
Premium Based Charge
| Accumulated Premium Breakpoint |
Premium Based Charge as a Percentage of
Purchase Payments Invested |
Annualized Premium Based Charge
(over 7 Year Period) |
| Less than $50,000 |
5.00% |
0.71% |
| $50,000 but less than $100,000 |
4.50% |
0.64% |
| $100,000 but less than $250,000 |
3.50% |
0.50% |
| $250,000 but less than $500,000 |
2.50% |
0.36% |
| $500,000 but less than $1,000,000 |
2.00% |
0.29% |
| $1,000,000 or more |
1.25% |
0.18% |
The initial Premium Based Charge is determined by the sum of
Premiums received during the first contract quarter and the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint achieved by that amount. After the first contract Quarter Anniversary, the
Premium Based Charge for each subsequent Premium is determined based on the sum of all Premiums (including the subsequent Premium) and the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint
achieved by the sum of Premiums as of the Premium receipt date. Please
see EXPENSES below.
4 Base Contract Expenses: If you do not elect any optional features, your total Base Contract Expense would be 0.95% annually.
Beneficiary Expenses if Extended Legacy is
Elected
If your Beneficiary elects to take the death benefit amount
under the Extended Legacy Program, we will deduct an annual Base Contract Expense of
0.85%
which is deducted daily from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. Please see Extended Legacy Program under DEATH BENEFITS.
5 The fee is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base which determines the basis of the guaranteed benefit. The annual fee is deducted from your
contract value at the end of the first quarter following election and quarterly thereafter. For a complete description of how the Income Base is calculated, please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT below.
6 The initial annual fee rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table below. Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index (“VIX®”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the maximums identified in the Fee Table and the minimums described below. Please see APPENDIX C — FORMULA AND EXAMPLES OF CALCULATIONS
OF THE POLARIS INCOME BUILDER DAILY FLEX FEE. If you purchased
your contract prior to May 1, 2023, please see APPENDIX F - LIVING
BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 1, 2023 for the initial annual fee
rate applicable to your contract. If you purchased your contract on or after May 1, 2023, please see APPENDIX I - LIVING BENEFIT RATES FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED ON
OR AFTER MAY 1, 2023.
| Number of Covered Persons |
Minimum Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum Annualized
Fee Rate Decrease or
Increase Each Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40%/
4).
9
Fee Table FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 24, 2021
The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay when owning and surrendering or making withdrawals from the contract. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.
The first table describes the fees and
expenses that you pay at the time you surrender the contract, make withdrawals from the contract, or make transfers between investment options. State
premium taxes may also be deducted.
Contract Owner Transaction Expenses
| Maximum Withdrawal Charges1 (as a percentage of each Purchase Payment withdrawn) |
6% |
Your contract provides for a penalty-free withdrawal amount each year. Please see PENALTY-FREE WITHDRAWAL AMOUNT below.
| Transfer Fee2 (Per transfer after 15 transfers in any contract year) |
$25 |
The following tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay each year during the time that you own the contract, not
including Underlying Fund fees and expenses. If you chose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.
Contract Owner Annual Expenses
| Maximum Premium Based Charge3 (assessed quarterly as an annualized percentage of each Purchase Payment) |
0.71% |
| Contract Maintenance Fee
(assessed annually and may be waived if
contract value is $75,000 or more) |
$50 |
| Base Contract Expenses4
(deducted from the average daily ending net
asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios) |
0.95% |
Optional Death Benefit
(deducted from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios)
| Maximum Anniversary Value |
0.25% |
Optional Living Benefits5
(calculated as percentage of the Income Base and deducted from the contract value)
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex
(Contracts issued prior to May 24, 2021)
| |
Initial Fee6 |
Maximum Fee6 |
| One Covered Person |
1.35% |
2.50% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.35% |
2.50% |
Polaris Income Builder Daily
| |
Initial Fee6 |
Maximum Fee6 |
| One Covered Person |
1.30% |
2.50% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.45% |
2.50% |
Polaris Income Builder
SunAmerica Income Plus
SunAmerica Income Plus
| |
Initial Fee6 |
Maximum Fee6 |
| One Covered Person |
1.10% |
2.20% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.35% |
2.70% |
Annual Underlying Fund Expenses
The following
shows the minimum and maximum total operating expenses charged by the Underlying Funds of the Trusts, before any waivers or reimbursements, that you may pay periodically during the time that you
own the contract. A complete list of Underlying Funds available under the contract,
including their annual expenses, may be found in Appendix A.
| |
Minimum |
Maximum |
| Expenses deducted from
Underlying Fund assets,
including management fees,
distribution and/or service
(12b-1) fees, if applicable,
and other expenses. |
0.46%
|
1.58% |
10
Footnotes to the Fee Table:
1 Withdrawal Charge Schedule (as a percentage of each Premium withdrawn) declines over 7 years as follows and applies to each Premium starting on the Premium receipt date:
| |
Years Since Premium Receipt | |||||||
| Accumulated Premium Breakpoint |
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8+ |
| Less than $50,000 |
6% |
5% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $50,000 but less than $100,000 |
5.5% |
5% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $100,000 but less than $250,000 |
4.5% |
4% |
4% |
3% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $250,000 but less than $500,000 |
3.5% |
3% |
3% |
2.25% |
2% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $500,000 but less than $1,000,000 |
3% |
2% |
2% |
1.5% |
1% |
1% |
1% |
0% |
| $1,000,000 or more |
2.25% |
1.5% |
1.5% |
1% |
1% |
0.75% |
0.5% |
0% |
The Withdrawal Charge for each Premium is determined based on the sum of all Premiums (including the subsequent Premium) and the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint achieved as of the Premium receipt date. Please see EXPENSES
section below.
2 In Pennsylvania and Texas, any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer fee.
3 Each Premium is subject to the Premium Based Charge deducted over a period of 7 years and is deducted quarterly from your contract value. Please see EXPENSES section below.
Premium Based Charge
| Accumulated Premium Breakpoint |
Premium Based Charge as a Percentage of
Purchase Payments Invested |
Annualized Premium Based Charge
(over 7 Year Period) |
| Less than $50,000 |
5.00% |
0.71% |
| $50,000 but less than $100,000 |
4.50% |
0.64% |
| $100,000 but less than $250,000 |
3.50% |
0.50% |
| $250,000 but less than $500,000 |
2.50% |
0.36% |
| $500,000 but less than $1,000,000 |
2.00% |
0.29% |
| $1,000,000 or more |
1.25% |
0.18% |
The initial Premium Based Charge is determined by the sum of
Premiums received during the first contract quarter and the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint achieved by that amount. After the first contract Quarter Anniversary, the
Premium Based Charge for each subsequent Premium is determined based on the sum of all Premiums (including the subsequent Premium) and the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint
achieved by the sum of Premiums as of the Premium receipt date. Please
see EXPENSES below.
4 Base Contract Expenses: If you do not elect any optional features,
your total Base Contract Expense would be 0.95% annually.
Beneficiary Expenses if Extended Legacy is Elected
If your Beneficiary elects to take the death benefit amount
under the Extended Legacy Program, we will deduct an annual Base Contract Expense of
0.85%
which is deducted daily from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. Please see Extended Legacy Program under DEATH BENEFITS.
5 The fee is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base which determines the basis of the guaranteed benefit. The annual fee is deducted from your contract
value at the end of the first quarter following election and quarterly thereafter. For a complete description of how the Income Base is calculated, please see APPENDIX F — LIVING BENFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 1, 2023 for a description
of the Living Benefit you may have elected.
6
The initial annual fee rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the
parameters identified in the table below. Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index (“VIX®”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the maximums identified in the Fee Table and the minimums described below.
(Contracts issued on or after September 10, 2018)
| |
Minimum Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum Annualized
Fee Rate Decrease or
Increase Each Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40%/
4).
(Contracts issued prior to September 10, 2018)
| |
Minimum Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum Annualized
Fee Rate Decrease or
Increase Each Benefit Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
0.60% |
±0.25% |
| Two Covered Persons |
0.60% |
±0.25% |
*
The fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25%/
4).
11
Examples
These examples are intended to help you compare the cost
of investing in the contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include transaction expenses, annual contract
expenses, and annual Underlying Fund expenses.
The expense examples below assume
that you invest $100,000 in the contract for the time periods indicated; your investment has a 5% return each year; and you incur the maximum or
minimum fees and expenses of the Underlying Funds as indicated in the examples.
The Maximum Expense Examples reflect the most expensive possible combination of
charges (including additional
charges for optional benefits). Although your actual
costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs at the end of the stated period would be the amounts set forth in the tables
below.
Maximum Expense Examples
(assuming annual contract expenses of 1.20% including the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit
feature, the optional SunAmerica Income Plus feature (for the first year calculated at
the initial annual fee rate of 1.35% and the maximum annual fee rate of 2.70% for the
remaining years), and investment in an Underlying Fund with total expenses of 1.58%*)
(1)
If you surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $9,020 |
$20,426 |
$31,118 |
$55,050 |
(2)
If you do not surrender or if you annuitize your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $4,520 |
$16,426 |
$28,118 |
$55,050 |
Minimum Expense Examples
(assuming annual contract expenses of 0.95%, no election of optional features and investment in an Underlying Fund with total expenses of 0.46%**)
(1)
If you surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $6,402 |
$9,901 |
$13,090 |
$20,024 |
(2)
If you do not surrender or if you annuitize your contract at the end of the applicable time period:
| 1 year |
3 years |
5 years |
10 years |
| $1,902 |
$5,901 |
$10,090 |
$20,024 |
12
Additional Expense Example Information
1.
In addition to the stated assumptions, the Expense Examples also assume that no transfer fees were imposed. Although premium taxes may apply in certain states,
they are not reflected in the Expense Examples.
2.
In addition to the stated assumptions, a maximum Premium Based Charge of 3.5% and withdrawal charge of 4.50% is used in the Expense Examples because of the
$100,000 investment amount. Your expenses may be lower if you are subject to a lower
Premium Based Charge and Withdrawal Charge Schedule.
3.
If you elected other optional features, your expenses would be lower than those shown in the Maximum Expense Examples. The Maximum Expense Example assumes that the Income Base which is used to calculate the SunAmerica Income
Plus
fee equals contract value, that no withdrawals are taken during the stated period, there are two Covered Persons and that the annual maximum fee rate of 2.70% has
been reached after the first year.
4.
If you elected optional features, you do not pay fees for optional features once you begin the Income Phase (annuitize your contract); therefore, your expenses
will be lower than those shown here. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS
below.
*
The 1 year Maximum Expense Example reflects the SunAmerica Series Trust 0.12%
waiver.
**
The 1 year Minimum Expense Example reflects the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust 0.03% waiver.
These examples should not be considered a representation of past or future expenses. Actual expenses may be
greater or less than those shown.
13
Principal Risks Of Investing In The Contract
Risk of Loss. Variable annuities involve risks, including possible loss of principal. Your losses could be
significant. This contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed
by, any bank. This contract is not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board, or any other agency.
Short-Term Investment Risk. This contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash.
The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and Living Benefit protections mean that this contract is more beneficial to investors with a long investment time horizon.
Withdrawal Risk. You should carefully consider the risks associated with withdrawals under the contract. Withdrawals may be subject to significant withdrawal charges. If you make a withdrawal prior to age 59½, there may be adverse tax consequences, including a 10% IRS
penalty tax. A withdrawal may reduce the value of your standard and optional benefits.
For instance, a withdrawal will reduce the value of the death benefit. In addition, a withdrawal could reduce the value of the optional Living Benefit by an amount greater than the amount withdrawn and could result in termination of the benefit. A total withdrawal (surrender) will result in the termination of your
contract. We may defer payment of withdrawals from a Fixed Account option (including
the Secure Value Account) for up to six months when permitted by law.
Variable Portfolio Risk. Amounts that you invest
in the Variable Portfolios are subject to the risk of poor investment performance. You
assume the investment risk. You can gain or lose money if you invest in these Variable Portfolios. Each Variable Portfolio’s performance depends on the performance of its Underlying Fund. Each
Underlying Fund has its own investment risks, and you are exposed to the Underlying
Fund’s investment risks when you invest in a Variable Portfolio. You are responsible for allocating Purchase Payments to the Variable Portfolios that are appropriate for you based on your own
individual circumstances, investment goals, financial situation, and risk tolerance.
You bear the risk of any decline in contract value resulting from the performance of the Variable Portfolio you have selected. In making your investment selections, you should investigate all information
available to you including the Underlying Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information and annual and semi-annual reports. We do not provide investment advice, nor do we
recommend or endorse any particular Underlying Fund.
Selection Risk. The optional benefits under the
contract were designed for different financial goals and to protect against different
financial risks. There is a risk that you may not choose, or may not have chosen, the benefit or benefits (if any) that are best suited for you based on your present or future needs and
circumstances, and the benefits
that are more suited for you (if any) may no longer be available. In addition, if you elected an
optional benefit and do not use it, or if the contingencies upon which the benefit
depend never occur, you will have paid for a benefit that you may not use or benefit
from.
Investment Requirements Risk. If you elect the
optional Living Benefit, you will be subject to investment requirements that limit the
investment options that are available to you and limit your ability to take certain actions under the contract. These investment requirements are designed to reduce our risk that we will have
to make payments to you from our own assets. In turn, they may also limit the potential
growth of your contract value and the potential growth of your guaranteed benefits.
Managed Volatility Fund Risk. Certain Underlying Funds, including some Underlying Funds that are available under certain optional Living
Benefits’ investment requirements, utilize managed volatility strategies. These
risk management techniques help us manage our financial risks associated with the
contract’s guarantees, like living and death benefits, because they reduce the incidence of extreme outcomes including the probability of large gains or losses. However, these strategies can
also limit your participation in rising equity markets, which may limit the potential
growth of your contract value and the potential growth of your guaranteed benefits. Certain Underlying Funds advised by our affiliate employ such risk management strategies, which may help us manage our
financial risks.
Purchase Payment
Risk. Your ability to make subsequent Purchase Payments is subject to certain
restrictions. We reserve the right to refuse any Purchase Payment(s), limit the amount
of subsequent Purchase Payment(s) with advance notice based on age as shown below and election of optional benefit(s), and may require our prior approval before accepting Purchase Payments greater
than the Purchase Payments Limit as defined in the Glossary. There is no guarantee that
you will always be permitted to make Purchase Payments.
Minimum Contract Value Risk. Where permitted by
state law, we may terminate your contract if your contract value is less than $2,500 as a result of withdrawals and/or fees and charges. We will provide you with 60 days written notice that your contract is being terminated.
At the end of the notice period, we will distribute the contract’s remaining
value to you.
Financial Strength and Claims-Paying Ability Risk. All guarantees under the contract that are paid from our general account (including under any Fixed Account option) are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability.
Business Disruption. Our business is also vulnerable to disruptions from natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, such as but not limited to hurricanes, windstorms, flooding, earthquakes, wildfires,
solar storms, war or other military action, acts of terrorism, explosions
14
and fires,
pandemic (such as COVID-19) and other highly contagious diseases, mass torts, failure of telecommunications or other critical infrastructure and other catastrophes. A natural or man-made disaster or catastrophe may negatively affect the computer and
other systems on which we rely, and may also interfere with our ability to receive,
pickup and process mail, to calculate Accumulation Unit Values (“AUVs”), process other contract-related transactions, or otherwise provide our services, or have other possible negative impacts. While we
have developed and put in place what we believe to be appropriate business continuity and disaster recovery plans and procedures to mitigate operational risks and potential losses related to business disruptions resulting from
natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, there can be no assurance that we, our
agents, the Underlying Funds or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative impacts resulting from such disasters and catastrophes.
Cybersecurity Risk. We rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our variable product business activities. Because our variable product business is highly dependent upon the
effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners and
service providers, our business is vulnerable to physical disruptions and utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g.,
hardware and software malfunctions), cyber-attacks, user error or other disruptions to
the confidentiality, integrity, or availability of such systems and data. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption, disclosure and destruction of sensitive business data, including
personal information, maintained on our or our business partners’ or service
providers’ systems, interference with or denial of service attacks on websites
and other operational disruptions and/or unauthorized release of confidential customer information, including as a result of social engineering attacks or employee malfeasance. Such systems failures and cyber-attacks or incidents affecting us, any third-party administrator, the Underlying Funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service
providers, as well as our distribution partners, may adversely affect us and your
contract value. For instance, systems failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our
processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our
website, our distribution partners, or with the Underlying Funds, impact our ability to
calculate AUVs, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or
business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers,
distribution partners and other intermediaries to regulatory fines and enforcement action, litigation risks and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cyber security risks may
also impact the issuers of securities in which the Underlying Funds invest, which may
cause the affected Underlying Funds to lose value. There may be an increased risk of
cyber-attacks during periods of geo-political or military conflict. Despite our implementation
of policies
and procedures, which we believe to be reasonable, that address physical, administrative and technical safeguards and controls and other preventative actions to protect our systems and sensitive business and customer information and reduce the risk of cyber-incidents, there
can be no assurance that we or our distribution partners or the Underlying Funds or our service providers will avoid cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future that may affect your
contract and/or personal information.
Purchasing a Polaris Platinum O-Series
Variable Annuity
When you purchase a variable annuity, a contract exists between you and the Company. You are the
Owner of the contract.
Maximum Issue Age
We will not issue a contract to anyone age 86 or older on the contract issue date. The age
requirements may vary depending on your election of an optional death benefit or other
available optional feature:
| Without Optional
Benefits |
With Optional Living Benefit |
With Optional
Maximum
Anniversary Death
Benefit |
| 85 |
80*
|
80 |
*
If a second Covered Person is added or if one of the original Covered Persons is changed to a different Covered Person, the second Covered Person must meet the above age
requirements at the time of addition. Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT.
Note: In general, we will not issue a Qualified
contract to anyone who is age 72 or older, unless it is shown that the minimum distribution required by the IRS is being made. Please see TAXES.
Joint Ownership
A Non-Qualified contract may be jointly owned by a spouse or non-spouse. Joint owners possess an equal and undivided interest in the contract. The age of the
older Owner is used to determine the availability of most age driven benefits.
The addition of a joint Owner after the contract has been issued is contingent upon prior review and
approval by the Company.
We will not issue a Qualified contract with joint owners, in accordance with tax law.
Spouse
Your spouse (as determined for federal tax law purposes) may jointly own the contract. In certain
states, domestic or civil union partners (“Domestic Partners”) qualify for
treatment as, or are equal to, spouses under state law.
15
Non-Spouse
In certain states, we may issue the contract to non-spousal joint owners. Non-spousal joint Owners
and Domestic Partners should consult with their tax adviser and/or financial
representative as, they may not be able to fully benefit from certain benefits and
features of the contract such as the optional Living Benefit, if applicable, and Spousal Continuation of the death benefit.
Non-Natural Ownership
A trust, corporation or other non-natural entity may only own this contract if such entity has
sufficiently demonstrated an Insurable Interest in the Annuitant selected.
At its sole discretion, the Company reserves the right to decline to issue this contract to certain
entities. We apply various considerations including but not limited to:
•
Estate planning,
•
Tax consequences, and
•
The propriety of this contract as an investment consistent with a non-natural Owner’s organizational documentation.
For more information on non-natural ownership, please see TAXES. You should consult with your tax and/or legal advisor in connection with non-natural ownership of this contract.
Assignment of the Contract/Change of Ownership
You may assign this contract before beginning the Income Phase. We will not be bound by any assignment until we receive and process your written request at
our Annuity Service Center and you have received confirmation.
•
Your rights and those of any other person with rights under this contract will be subject to the
assignment.
•
We are not responsible for the validity, tax or other legal consequences of any assignment.
•
An assignment will not affect any payments we may make or actions we may take before we receive notice of the assignment.
We reserve the right not to recognize any assignment, as
determined in our sole discretion, if it changes the risk profile of the contract
owner, if no Insurable Interest exists, or if not permitted by the Internal Revenue Code.
Please see TAXES for details on the tax consequences of an assignment. You should consult a qualified tax adviser before assigning the contract.
Termination of the Contract for Misstatement and/or Fraud
The Company reserves the right to terminate the contract at any time if it discovers a misstatement or fraudulent representation of any information provided in
connection with the issuance or ongoing administration of the contract.
If we learn of a misstatement of age, we reserve the right to fully pursue our remedies including
revocation of any age-driven benefits and/or termination of the contract.
Allocation of Purchase Payments
In order to issue your contract, we must receive your initial Purchase Payment and all required
paperwork in Good Order, including Purchase Payment allocation instructions.
An initial Purchase Payment is the money you give us to purchase a contract. Any additional money
you give us to invest in the contract after purchase is a subsequent Purchase
Payment.
Minimum Initial and Subsequent Purchase Payments
| |
Minimum
Initial
Purchase
Payment |
Minimum
Subsequent
Purchase
Payment |
Minimum
Automatic
Subsequent
Purchase
Payment |
| Qualified(1) |
$10,000
|
$500
|
$100
|
| Non-Qualified(1) |
$10,000
|
$500
|
$100 |
(1)
These amounts depend upon whether a contract is Qualified or Non-Qualified for tax purposes. For further explanation, please see TAXES.
Purchase
Payment Restrictions
We will not allow anyone age 86 or older to add additional Purchase Payments after the contract
issue date. The attained age restrictions to add additional Purchase Payments may vary
depending on your election of an optional Living Benefit or optional death benefit as follows:
| Without Optional
Benefits |
With Optional Living Benefit |
With Optional
Maximum
Anniversary Death
Benefit |
| 86 |
81 |
81 |
We reserve the right to refuse any Purchase Payment(s), limit the amount of subsequent Purchase
Payment(s) with advance notice and restrict allowance of Purchase Payment(s) based on
age as shown above and election of optional benefit(s).
We reserve the right to require Company approval prior
to accepting Purchase Payments greater than the Purchase Payments Limit as defined in
the Glossary.
•
For contracts owned by a non-natural Owner, we reserve the right to require prior Company approval to accept any Purchase Payment.
•
Purchase Payments that would cause total Purchase Payments in all contracts issued by Corebridge
16
Financial Company to the same Owner and/or Annuitant to exceed the Purchase Payments Limit may also be subject to Company pre-approval.
Submission of Purchase Payments
Purchase Payments will be priced when received at the Annuity Service Center. Delivery of Purchase Payments to any other address may result in a delay in
crediting your contract until the Purchase Payment is received at the Annuity Service
Center.
Regular Mail:
Purchase Payments sent by regular mail must be sent to the Premium Processing Center at the following address:
| US Life:
Premium Processing Center
P.O. Box 100357
Pasadena, CA 91189-0357 |
Express Delivery:
Purchase Payments sent by overnight or express delivery must be sent to the Premium Processing
Center at the following address:
| For US Life: JPM Chase-USL 100357 Premium Processing Center
2710 Media Center Drive
Building #6, Suite 120
Los Angeles, CA 90065-1750 |
Receipt of Purchase Payments:
Purchase Payments will be picked up at the mailing address noted above and forwarded to our Annuity Service Center. Purchase Payments, however, are not
considered received by us until received at our Annuity Service Center in Good
Order.
We allocate your Purchase Payment to your contract as of the date such Purchase Payment is priced. Initial Purchase Payments received at the Annuity Service
Center in Good Order before Market Close will be priced within two NYSE business days
after it is received. Initial Purchase Payments received at the Annuity Service Center in Good Order after Market Close will be priced within two NYSE business days after the next NYSE business day.
If we do not have complete information necessary to issue your contract, we will contact you. If we
do not receive the necessary information within five NYSE business days, we will obtain
your permission to keep your money until we get the information necessary to issue the contract, or we will send your money back to whomever we received the funds.
Any subsequent Purchase Payment will be priced as of the day it is received by the Annuity Service Center in Good
Order before Market Close. If the subsequent Purchase Payment is received at the Annuity Service Center in Good Order after Market Close, it will be
priced as of the next NYSE business day.
We invest your subsequent Purchase Payments in the Variable Portfolios and available Fixed Accounts according to any allocation instructions that
accompany the subsequent Purchase Payment. If we receive a Purchase Payment without
allocation instructions, we will invest the Purchase Payment according to your allocation instructions on file.
Electronic Transmission:
We will accept initial and subsequent Purchase Payments by electronic transmission from certain broker-dealer firms.
Agent of Company:
We may have an agreement in place whereby your broker-dealer may be deemed our agent for receipt of
your Purchase Payments. If a broker-dealer is deemed to be our agent, Purchase Payments
will be priced as of the time they are received by the
broker-dealer.
You assume any risk in market fluctuations if you submit your Purchase Payment directly to a
broker-dealer that does not have such an agreement, should there be a delay in that
broker-dealer delivering your Purchase Payment to us. Please check with your financial
representative to determine if his/her broker-dealer has an agreement with the Company
that deems the broker-dealer an agent of the Company.
Automatic Payment Plan:
Once you have contributed at least the minimum initial Purchase Payment, you can establish an
Automatic Payment Plan that allows you to make subsequent Purchase Payments. We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the Automatic Payment Plan at any time should subsequent Purchase Payments no longer be
accepted and will notify you prior to exercising that right.
Accumulation Units
We credit your contract with Accumulation Units when you allocate a Purchase Payment to the Variable
Portfolios. We determine the value of each Accumulation Unit at the close of every NYSE
business day. The value of an Accumulation Unit goes up and down based on the performance of the Variable Portfolios and the fees and expenses under your contract.
The number of Accumulation Units you are credited is calculated the day we process your Purchase
Payment. Please see ALLOCATION OF PURCHASE
PAYMENTS.
The Accumulation Unit value is determined by multiplying the Accumulation Unit value for the
preceding NYSE business day by a factor for the current NYSE business day.
17
The factor is
determined by:
1.
dividing the net asset value per share of the Underlying Fund at the end of the current NYSE business day, plus any dividend or capital gains per
share declared on behalf of the Underlying Fund as of that day, by the net asset value
per share of the Underlying Fund for the previous NYSE business day; and
2.
multiplying it by one minus all applicable daily asset based charges.
We determine the number of Accumulation Units credited to your
contract by dividing the Purchase Payment by the Accumulation Unit value for the specific Variable Portfolio.
Example:
We receive a $25,000 Purchase Payment from you on Wednesday. You allocate the money to Variable
Portfolio A. We determine that the value of an Accumulation Unit for Variable Portfolio
A is $11.10 at Market Close on Wednesday. We then divide $25,000 by $11.10 and credit
your contract on Wednesday night with 2,252.2523 Accumulation Units for Variable
Portfolio A.
Performance of the Variable Portfolios and the insurance charges under your contract affect Accumulation Unit values. These factors cause the value of your
contract to go up and down.
Free Look
You may cancel your contract within ten days after receiving it. We call this a “free look.” Your state may require a longer free look
period. Please check your contract or with your financial representative.
To cancel, mail the contract along with your written free look request to:
| Annuity Service Center P.O. Box 15570 Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570. |
If you decide to cancel your contract during the free look period
we will refund the following:
•
The value of your contract on the day we receive your request in Good Order if received before Market Close.
•
The value of your contract on the next NYSE business day, if the free look request is received
after Market Close.
IRA and State Free Look Restrictions
New York requires us to return your Purchase Payments upon a free look request. Contracts issued as
an IRA require the full return of Purchase Payments upon a free
look.
If your contract was issued in New York or as an IRA, and you cancel your contract during the free look period, we return the greater of:
(1)
Purchase Payments; or
(2)
the value of your contract on the day we receive your request in Good Order.
With respect to
these contracts, we reserve the right to invest your money in a money market portfolio during the free look period. We will allocate your money according to your instructions at the end of the
applicable free look period.
Please see your contract for information about the free
look period in your state.
Exchange Offers
From time to time, we allow you to exchange an older variable annuity issued by the Company or one of its affiliates, for a newer product with different
features and benefits issued by the Company or one of its affiliates. Such an exchange
offer will be made in accordance with applicable federal securities laws and state insurance rules and regulations. We will provide the specific terms and conditions of any such exchange offer at the
time the offer is made.
Investment Options
You may allocate purchase payments using one or a combination of the investment options and Fixed
Accounts, as may be available under your contract:
•
Variable Portfolios
•
Fixed Accounts
•
Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account
•
Secure Value Account (optional Living Benefit only)
If you elect the optional Living Benefit, not all investment
options may be available and you must allocate your purchase payments in accordance
with the applicable investment requirements. Please see Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefit in
APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER
THE CONTRACT for the specific investment requirements applicable to your Living Benefit.
Variable Portfolios
The Variable Portfolios available under the contract invest in the Underlying Funds of the Trusts. Additional Variable Portfolios may be available in the
future.
Information regarding each Underlying Fund, including (i) its
name, (ii) its type, (iii) its investment advisor and any sub-investment advisor, (iv) current expenses, and (v) performance is available in an appendix to this
18
prospectus. See APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Each Underlying Fund has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the Underlying Fund. Read
these prospectuses carefully before investing. Paper or electronic copies of the Underlying Fund prospectuses may be obtained by calling (855)
421-2692 or visiting our website at www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses.
You may also obtain information about the Underlying Funds by accessing the U.S. Securities and Exchange
Commission’s website at www.sec.gov.
From time to time, certain Variable Portfolio names are changed. When we are notified of a name change, we will make changes so that the new name is
properly shown. However, until we complete the changes, we may provide you with various
forms, reports and confirmations that reflect a Variable Portfolio’s prior name.
Certain Underlying Funds offered under this contract have similar investment objectives to other
Underlying Funds managed by the same advisor or subadvisor. The investment results of
the Underlying Funds, however, may be higher or lower than such other Underlying Funds. We do not guarantee or make any representation that the investment results of any of the Underlying Funds will
be comparable to the investment results of any other Underlying Fund managed by the
same investment advisor or subadvisor.
| You can gain or lose money if you invest in these Variable Portfolios. You are responsible for allocating Purchase Payments to the Variable Portfolios as appropriate for your own individual circumstances, investment goals, financial situation and risk tolerance. You should periodically review your allocations and values to ensure they continue to suit your needs. You bear the risk of any decline in contract value resulting from the performance of the Variable Portfolio you have selected. In making your investment selections, you should investigate all information available to you including the Underlying Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information and annual and semi-annual reports. |
| We do not provide investment advice, nor do we
recommend or endorse any particular Underlying Fund. |
Please consult your financial representative regarding which of these Variable Portfolios are appropriate for your risk
tolerance.
You should read the prospectuses for the Trusts carefully for
detailed information about the Underlying Funds, including each Underlying Fund’s investment objective and risk factors.
Selection of Underlying Funds
The Underlying Funds offered through this contract are selected by us and we may consider various
factors in the selection process, including but not limited to: asset class
coverage, the
strength of the investment advisor’s or subadvisor’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, the alignment of the investment objectives of an Underlying Fund with our hedging strategy, performance
and the capability and qualification of each investment firm.
Another factor we may consider is whether the Underlying
Fund or its service providers (i.e. the investment advisor and/or subadvisor(s)) or
their affiliates will make payments to us or our affiliates in connection with certain
administrative, marketing and support services, or whether the Underlying Fund’s
service providers have affiliates that can provide marketing and distribution support for sales of the contract. Please see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACT below.
We review the Underlying Funds periodically and may make changes if we determine that an Underlying Fund no longer satisfies one or more of the selection
criteria and/or if the Underlying Fund has not attracted significant allocations from
contract Owners.
Fund-of-Funds
Certain Underlying Funds invest substantially all their assets in other Underlying Funds. These arrangements are referred to as Fund-of-Funds, as described
below. Expenses for a Fund-of-Funds may be higher than that for other funds because a
Fund-of-Funds bears its own expenses and indirectly bears its proportionate share of expenses of the Underlying Funds. As a result, you will pay higher fees and expenses under the Fund-of-Funds
structure than if you invested directly in each of the Underlying Funds held in the
Fund-of-Funds structure. This will reduce your investment return.
Volatility Control Funds
Certain Underlying Funds advised by our affiliate employ risk management strategies that are intended to control the Underlying Funds’ overall
volatility and to reduce the downside exposure of the Underlying Funds during
significant market downturns. Conversely, these Variable Portfolios could limit the
upside participation of these Underlying Funds in rising equity markets relative to other
Underlying Funds.
These risk management techniques help us to manage our financial risks associated with guarantees, like the living and death benefits because this managed
volatility strategy reduces the incidence of extreme outcomes including the probability
of large gains or losses.
Trusts
We offer Underlying Funds of affiliated and
unaffiliated Trusts. The Trusts serve as the underlying investment vehicles for other
variable annuity contracts issued by the Company as well as by other insurance companies.
Neither the Company nor the Trusts believe that offering shares of the Trusts in this manner
disadvantages you. The Trusts are monitored for potential conflicts. The Trusts may
19
have other
Underlying Funds, in addition to those listed here, that are not available for investment under this contract.
Unaffiliated Trusts
We offer Underlying Funds of the following unaffiliated Trusts:
•
AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) – Series II Shares
•
American Funds Insurance Series® – Class 4 Shares (for contracts issued on or after June 29, 2015)
•
American Funds Insurance Series® – Class 2 Shares (for contracts issued prior to June 29, 2015)
•
Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust – Class 2 Shares
•
Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust – Class Service Shares
•
Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. – Class VC Shares
•
MFS Variable Insurance Trust III – Service Class Shares
•
PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust – Class Advisor Shares
Affiliated Trusts
We offer Underlying Funds of the following affiliated Trusts at least in part because they are
managed by SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC (“SAAMCo”), an affiliate of the
Company. SAAMCo engages subadvisors to provide investment advice for certain Underlying
Funds. The Company and/or its affiliates may be subject to certain conflicts of
interest as the Company may derive greater revenues from Variable Portfolios offered by a Trust managed by an affiliate than certain other available Variable Portfolios.
•
Seasons Series Trust – Class 3 Shares
•
SunAmerica Series Trust – Class 3 Shares
Substitution, Addition or Deletion of
Variable Portfolios
We may, subject to any applicable law, make certain
changes to the Variable Portfolios offered in your contract. We may offer new Variable
Portfolios or stop offering existing Variable Portfolios. New Variable Portfolios may be
made available to existing contract Owners, and Variable Portfolios may be closed to
new or subsequent Purchase Payments, transfers or allocations. In addition, we may also
liquidate the shares of any Variable Portfolio, substitute the shares of one Underlying
Fund held by a Variable Portfolio for another and/or merge Variable Portfolios or cooperate in a merger of Underlying Funds. To the extent required by the Investment Company Act of 1940, as
amended, we may be required to obtain SEC approval or your approval.
Fixed Accounts
Your contract may offer a Fixed Account for a guaranteed period. Your Fixed Account interest crediting rates are guaranteed for amounts allocated to each
Fixed Account for up to 1 year. Thereafter, for Fixed Accounts other than Dollar Cost
Averaging Fixed Account options (as described below), we will declare annual Fixed Account crediting rates each contract year, and this rate will never be lower than the minimum guarantee rate as referenced
in your contract. Factors that influence the declared Fixed Account renewal rate
include, but are not limited to, the level of US treasury rates, credit spreads on corporate bonds and other fixed income instruments, company asset-liability matching strategies, the length of the contract
withdrawal charge period and the number of years since your annuity contract was
issued. You may obtain current interest rates by calling the Annuity Service Center or by speaking with your financial representative.
Please check with your financial representative regarding the availability of a Fixed Account. Allocations to the Fixed Account are obligations of the General Account. In reliance on certain exemptions and exclusions, interests in the General Account are not registered as securities under the Securities Act of 1933 and not registered
as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940. However, the
disclosures in the prospectus about the Fixed Accounts are subject to certain provisions of the federal securities laws regarding the accuracy and completeness of disclosures. Please see GENERAL ACCOUNT below.
Minimum Guaranteed Interest Rate
We guarantee that the interest rate credited to amounts allocated to any Fixed Account guarantee
periods will never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate specified in your
contract. Once the rate is established, it will not change for the duration of the guarantee period. The minimum guaranteed interest rate can vary but is never lower than 1%. We determine which, if any,
guarantee periods will be offered at any time in our sole discretion, unless state law
requires us to do otherwise.
Interest Rate
Categories
There are three categories of interest rates for money allocated to the Fixed Accounts. The
applicable rate is guaranteed until the corresponding guarantee period expires. With
each category of interest rate, your money may be credited a different rate as follows:
•
Initial Rate: The rate credited to any portion of the initial Purchase Payment allocated to a Fixed Account.
•
Current Rate: The rate credited to any portion of a subsequent Purchase Payment allocated to a Fixed Account.
•
Renewal Rate: The rate credited to money transferred from a Fixed Account or a Variable Portfolio into a Fixed Account and to money remaining in a Fixed Account after expiration of a guarantee period.
20
Transfers/Withdrawals from Fixed Accounts
There are no restrictions with respect to transferring out of or taking a withdrawal from a Fixed
Account. If you make a transfer out of or a withdrawal from a Fixed Account prior to
the end of a guarantee period, you will be credited the interest earned up to the time of transfer or withdrawal. When a guarantee period ends, you may leave your money in the same Fixed Account or you may
reallocate your money to another Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable
Portfolios. If you do not want to leave your money in the same Fixed Account, you must contact us within 30 days after the end of the guarantee period and provide us with new allocation instructions.
We do not contact you. If you do not contact us, your
money will remain in the same Fixed Account where it will earn interest at the renewal rate then in effect for that Fixed Account.
We reserve the right to defer payments for a
withdrawal from a Fixed Account for up to six months.
If available through our Dollar Cost Averaging Program, you may
systematically transfer interest earned in available Fixed Accounts into any of the Variable Portfolios on a monthly basis. Systematic transfers may be started, changed or terminated at any time by contacting
our Annuity Service Center.
Check with your financial representative about the current availability of this service.
Fixed Account Restrictions
At any time we are crediting the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your contract, we
reserve the right to restrict your ability to invest into the Fixed Accounts. All Fixed
Accounts may not be available in your state. Please check with your financial
representative regarding the availability of Fixed Accounts.
Secure Value Account
If you elect a Living Benefit, a certain percentage of your investment is automatically allocated to
the Secure Value Account. The Secure Value Account is only available with the election
of a Living Benefit and you may not reallocate your money from the Secure Value Account to another Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable Portfolios when the guarantee period ends. Please see Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in
APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER
THE CONTRACT. Allocations to the Secure Value Account are obligations of the General
Account. Please see GENERAL ACCOUNT below.
Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Accounts
Purchase Payments
You may invest initial and/or subsequent Purchase Payments in the dollar cost averaging (“DCA”) Fixed
Accounts, if available. The minimum Purchase Payment amounts are as follows:
| DCA Fixed Account |
Minimum Purchase Payment |
| 6-Month |
$600 |
| 12-Month |
$1,200 |
| 2-Year* |
$2,400 |
*
2-Year DCA Fixed Account not available for contracts issued on or after October 1, 2013.
•
The DCA Fixed Accounts only accept initial and subsequent Purchase Payments because they are offered as “source” accounts exclusively
to facilitate the DCA Program for a specified time period.
•
You may not make a transfer from a Variable Portfolio or available Fixed Account into a DCA Fixed Account. Please see DOLLAR COST AVERAGING PROGRAM below for more information.
•
Unless otherwise directed by you, any Purchase Payment less than the above minimum amounts will automatically be allocated to available investment
options according to your current allocation instructions on file.
If your contract
was issued on or after October 1, 2013, the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account is not available for investment. For contracts issued prior to October 1, 2013, without election of a Living Benefit, the 2-Year DCA
Fixed Account will remain available for subsequent Purchase Payments on contracts
issued initially with the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account. The minimum subsequent Purchase Payment that you must invest for the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account is $2,400.
DCA Interest Rate Crediting
DCA Fixed Accounts credit a fixed rate of interest and can only be elected to facilitate a DCA
Program. Interest is credited to amounts allocated to the DCA Fixed Accounts while your
money is transferred to available investment options over certain specified time frames. The interest rates applicable to the DCA Fixed Accounts may differ from those applicable to any other Fixed Account but
will never be less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your
contract. The minimum guaranteed interest rate can vary but is never lower than 1%.
However, when using a DCA Fixed Account, the annual interest rate is paid on a
declining balance as you systematically transfer your money to available investment
options. Therefore, the actual effective yield will be less than the stated annual crediting rate. We reserve the right to change the availability of DCA Fixed Accounts offered, unless state
law requires us to do otherwise.
Dollar Cost Averaging Program
Under the DCA Program, you systematically transfer a
specified dollar amount or percentage of contract value from a Variable Portfolio,
available Fixed Account or DCA Fixed Account (“source account”) to any available investment options (“target account”).
21
The DCA Program
allows you to invest gradually in available investment options at no additional cost. The DCA Program is designed to lessen the impact of market fluctuations on your investment. However, the DCA
Program can neither guarantee a profit nor protect your investment against a loss. When
you elect the DCA Program, you are continuously investing in securities fluctuating at
different price levels. You should consider your tolerance for investing through periods of fluctuating price levels.
Example of DCA Program
Assume that you want to move $750 each month from one Variable Portfolio to another Variable
Portfolio over six months. You set up a DCA Program and purchase Accumulation Units at
the following values:
| Month |
Accumulation Unit Value |
Units Purchased |
|
1 |
$7.50 |
100 |
|
2 |
$5.00 |
150 |
|
3 |
$10.00 |
75 |
|
4 |
$7.50 |
100 |
|
5 |
$5.00 |
150 |
| 6 |
$7.50 |
100 |
You paid an average price of only $6.67 per Accumulation
Unit over six months, while the average market price actually was $7.08. By investing
an equal amount of money each month, you automatically buy more Accumulation Units when
the market price is low and fewer Accumulation Units when the market price is high. This example is for illustrative purposes only.
DCA Program Guidelines
•
Fixed Accounts are not available as target accounts for the DCA Program.
•
Transfers occur on a monthly periodic schedule.
•
The minimum transfer amount under the DCA Program is $100 per transaction, regardless of the source account.
•
Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA Program are not counted towards the number
of free transfers per contract year.
Allocation of Subsequent Purchase Payments to DCA Program
If you have not elected an optional Living Benefit and you choose to allocate subsequent Purchase Payments to an active DCA Program with an available Fixed Account serving as the source account, the rate applicable to that Fixed Account at the time we receive the
subsequent Purchase Payment will apply. Further, we will begin transferring subsequent
Purchase Payments into your target account allocations on the same day of the month as the initial active DCA Program. Therefore, you may not receive a full 30 days of interest prior to the
first transfer to the target account(s). Please see DOLLAR COST
AVERAGING FIXED ACCOUNTS above for more
information.
Termination of DCA Program
You may terminate the DCA Program at any time. If you terminate the DCA Program and money remains in
the DCA Fixed Account(s), we transfer the remaining money according to your current
allocation instructions on file.
Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the DCA
Program and transfer the remaining money according to the current allocation
instructions on file.
Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program
Market fluctuations may cause the percentage of your investment in the Variable Portfolios to differ
from your original allocations. Automatic Asset Rebalancing typically involves shifting
portions of your money into and out of investment options so that the resulting allocations are consistent with your current investment instructions.
Under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program:
•
You may elect to have your investments in the Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts, if available, periodically rebalanced to return your
allocations to preselected percentages for no additional charge.
•
At your request, rebalancing occurs on a quarterly, semiannual or annual basis.
•
Transfers resulting from your participation in this program are not counted against the number of
free transfers per contract year.
Changes
to Rebalancing Instructions
If you make a transfer, you must provide updated rebalancing
instructions. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you make such transfer, we will change your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect the percentage allocations among the
new Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts, if available, resulting from your
transfer which will replace any previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”). You may change any applicable Default Rebalancing Instructions at
any time by contacting the Annuity Service Center. If we cannot complete automatic
rebalancing according to your current instructions due to Variable Portfolio changes, we reserve the right to allocate the applicable amounts that would have been transferred to the impacted Variable
Portfolio(s) to a money market option available under the contract.
Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the
Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.
Mandatory Rebalancing with Election of a Living Benefit
If you elect an optional Living Benefit, we will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset
Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing. If at any point, for any reason, your
rebalancing instructions would result in allocations inconsistent with the investment requirements, we will revert to the last compliant instructions on file and we will notify you of such reversion. If we cannot
complete automatic rebalancing according to your current instructions due to
22
Variable Portfolio
changes (including closures, substitutions, or mergers), we reserve the right to allocate the applicable amounts that would have been transferred to the impacted Variable Portfolio(s) to a money market
option available under the contract. In addition, any amount of your investment
allocated to the Secure Value Account cannot be rebalanced. Please see
OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT
below.
Automatic asset rebalancing will continue if it is a requirement of an optional Living Benefit that remains in effect pursuant to your Spousal
Beneficiary’s election of Spousal Continuation.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or
terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program at any time and we will notify you 30 days prior to exercising that right. In
the event of modification, we will administer the program according to the parameters of the modification. In the event of suspension or termination of the
program, we will no longer administer the program and your investments will no longer be rebalanced.
Transfers During the Accumulation Phase
Subject to the Company’s rules, restrictions and
policies (including short term trading policies) described below, you may transfer
funds between the Variable Portfolios and/or any available Fixed Accounts.
•
Funds already in your contract cannot be transferred into the DCA Fixed Accounts, if available.
•
You must transfer at least $100 per transfer.
•
If less than $100 remains in any Variable Portfolio or Fixed Account after a transfer, that amount must be transferred as well.
Submitting Transfer Instructions
Your transfer instructions must be received via one of the methods and locations referenced below;
otherwise they will not be considered received by us. Please see
SHORT-TERM TRADING POLICIES below for more
information.
| Telephone: (800) 445-7862 |
| Internet:
www.corebridgefinancial.com/annuities |
| United States Postal Service (first-class mail): Annuity Service Center P.O. Box 15570
Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570 |
| Facsimile:
(818) 615-1543 |
Telephone/Internet Authorization
We may accept transfers by telephone or the internet unless you tell us not to on your contract
application. When receiving instructions over the telephone or the internet, we
have procedures to
provide reasonable assurance that the transactions executed are genuine. Thus, we are not
responsible for any claim, loss or expense from any error resulting from instructions
received over the telephone or the internet. If we fail to follow our procedures, we may be liable for any losses due to unauthorized or fraudulent instructions.
For contracts issued in the state of New York, we may accept transfers by telephone if you complete
and send the Telephone Transfer Agreement form to our Annuity Service Center at the
above address.
Transfer Fees
There is no charge for your first 15 transfers in any contract year. We charge for transfers in excess of 15 in any contract
year. The fee is $25 for each transfer exceeding this limit. Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA or Automatic Asset Rebalancing Programs are not counted towards the number
of free transfers per contract year.
Accepting Transfer Requests
We cannot guarantee that we will be able to accept telephone, fax and/or internet transfer
instructions at all times. Any telephone, fax or computer system, whether it is yours,
your broker-dealer’s, or ours, can experience outages or delays for a variety of reasons and may prevent our processing of your transfer request. If telephone, fax and/or internet access is unavailable, you
must make your transfer request in writing by U.S. Mail to our Annuity Service Center
at the address above.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate telephone,
fax and/or internet transfer privileges at any time and we will notify you prior to exercising the right of suspension.
Pricing Transfer Requests
Any transfer request will be priced as of the day it is received by us in Good Order if the request
is received before Market Close. If the transfer request is received after Market
Close, the request will be priced as of the next NYSE business day.
Short-Term Trading Policies
This variable annuity contract is not designed to support frequent trading or trading strategies
that seek to benefit from short-term price fluctuations or price inefficiencies in the
Variable Portfolios of this product (“Short-Term Trading”) and we discourage Short-Term Trading as more fully described below.
Risks of Short-Term Trading
Short-Term Trading may create risks that may result in adverse effects on the investment return of
the Underlying Fund in which a Variable Portfolio invests. Such risks may include, but
are not limited to: (1) interference with the management and planned investment strategies of an Underlying Fund; (2) dilution of the interests in the Underlying Fund due to practices such as
“arbitrage”;
23
and/or (3)
increased brokerage and administrative costs due to forced and unplanned fund turnover. These circumstances may reduce the value of the Variable Portfolio. In addition to negatively impacting
the Owner, a reduction in contract value may also be harmful to Annuitants and/or
Beneficiaries.
We have adopted the following administrative procedures to discourage Short-Term Trading which are
summarized below.
Standard U.S. Mail Policy
Under the Standard U.S. Mail Policy, all transfers must be submitted by U.S. Mail for 12-months. The 15th transfer in a 12-month look-back period
(“12-Month Rolling Period”) triggers the Standard U.S. Mail Policy.
Transfer Requests under the U.S. Mail Policy
•
While the U.S. Mail Policy is in effect, we will not accept transfer requests sent by any other method except U.S. Mail.
•
Transfer requests required to be submitted by U.S. Mail can only be cancelled by a written request sent by U.S. Mail with the appropriate
paperwork received prior to the execution of the transfer.
•
All transfers made on the same day prior to Market Close are considered one transfer request for purposes of applying the Short-Term Trading policy and calculating the number of free
transfers.
•
Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA or Automatic Asset Rebalancing Programs are not included for the purposes of determining the
number of transfers before applying the Standard U.S. Mail Policy.
•
We apply the Standard U.S. Mail Policy uniformly and consistently to all contract Owners except for omnibus group contracts. See Omnibus Group Contracts below for more information.
Example
For example, if you made a transfer on August 21, 2025 and within the previous twelve months (from August 22, 2024 forward) you made 15 transfers including the August 21st transfer, then all transfers made for
twelve months after August 21, 2025 must be submitted by U.S. Mail (from August 22, 2025 through August 21, 2026).
Accelerated U.S. Mail Policy
We may become aware of transfer patterns among the Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts which appear to be Short-Term Trading or otherwise detrimental to the Variable Portfolios but have not yet triggered
the Standard U.S. Mail Policy described above. If such transfer activity comes to our
attention, we may require you to adhere to our Standard U.S. Mail Policy prior to reaching the specified number of transfers.
Additional Short-Term Trading Restrictions
To the extent we become aware of Short-Term Trading activities which cannot be reasonably controlled solely by the Standard U.S. Mail Policy or the
Accelerated U.S. Mail Policy, we reserve the right to evaluate, in our sole discretion,
whether to:
1.
impose further limits on the size, manner, number and/or frequency of transfers you can make;
2.
impose minimum holding periods;
3.
reject any Purchase Payment or transfer request;
4.
terminate your transfer privileges; and/or
5.
request that you surrender your contract.
We will notify you in writing if your transfer privileges are modified, suspended or terminated. In addition, we reserve the right not to accept or otherwise restrict transfers from a third party acting for you
and not to accept pre-authorized transfer forms.
Enforcement Determination Factors
Some of the factors we may consider when determining whether to accelerate the Standard U.S. Mail
Policy, reject transfers or impose other conditions on transfer privileges
include:
•
the number of transfers made in a defined period;
•
the dollar amount of the transfer;
•
the total assets of the Variable Portfolio involved in the transfer and/or transfer requests that represent a significant portion of the total assets of
the Variable Portfolio;
•
the investment objectives and/or asset classes of the particular Variable Portfolio involved in your
transfers;
•
whether the transfer appears to be part of a pattern of transfers to take advantage of short-term
market fluctuations or market inefficiencies;
•
the history of transfer activity in the contract or in other contracts we may offer; and/or
•
other activity, as determined by us, that creates an appearance, real or perceived, of Short-Term Trading or the possibility of Short-Term
Trading.
Applicability to Third Party Trading Services
The Standard and Accelerated U.S. Mail Policies are applied uniformly and consistently to contract Owners utilizing third party trading services/strategies
performing asset allocation services for a number of contract Owners at the same time.
You should be aware that such third party trading services may engage in transfer
activities that can also be detrimental to the Variable Portfolios, including trading
relatively large groups of contracts simultaneously. These transfer activities may not
be intended to take advantage of short-term price fluctuations or price inefficiencies. However, such activities can create the same or similar risks as Short-Term Trading and negatively impact the
Variable Portfolios as described above.
24
Deterrence
Limitations
Notwithstanding the administrative procedures above, there are limitations on the effectiveness of
these procedures. Our ability to detect and/or deter Short-Term Trading is limited by
operational systems and technological limitations, as well as our ability to predict strategies employed by contract Owners (or those acting on their behalf) to avoid detection. We cannot guarantee that we will detect
and/or deter all Short-Term Trading and it is likely that some level of Short-Term
Trading will occur before it is detected and steps are taken to deter it. To the extent that we are unable to detect and/or deter Short-Term Trading, the Variable Portfolios may be negatively impacted as
described above.
Additionally, the Variable Portfolios may be harmed by transfer activity related to other insurance
companies and/or retirement plans or other investors that invest in shares of the
Underlying Fund. Moreover, our ability to deter Short-Term Trading may be limited by decisions by state regulatory bodies and court orders which we cannot predict.
You should be aware that the design of our administrative procedures involves inherently subjective decisions which we attempt to make in a fair and
reasonable manner consistent with the interests of all Owners of this contract. We do not
enter into agreements with contract Owners whereby we permit or intentionally disregard
Short-Term Trading.
Omnibus Group
Contracts
Omnibus group contracts may invest in the same Underlying Funds available in your contract but on an
aggregate, not individual basis. Thus, we have limited ability to detect Short-Term
Trading in omnibus group contracts and the Standard U.S. Mail Policy does not apply to these contracts. Our inability to detect Short-Term Trading may negatively impact the Variable Portfolios as
described above.
We reserve the right to modify the policies and procedures
described in the TRANSFERS DURING THE ACCUMULATION PHASE section at any time. To the extent that we exercise this reservation of rights, we will do so uniformly and consistently unless we disclose otherwise.
Underlying Funds’ Short-Term Trading Policies
Please note that the Underlying Funds have their own policies and procedures (outlined in their respective prospectus) with respect to frequent purchases
and redemptions of their respective shares which may be more or less restrictive than
ours.
•
We reserve the right to enforce these Underlying Fund policies and procedures, including, but not limited to, the right to collect a redemption fee
on shares of the Underlying Fund if imposed by such Underlying Fund’s Board of
Trustees/Directors. As of the date of this prospectus, none of the Underlying Funds
impose a redemption fee.
•
We also reserve the right to reject, with or without prior notice, any purchase, transfer or allocation
into a Variable Portfolio if the corresponding Underlying Fund will not accept such purchase, transfer or allocation for any reason.
We are obligated to execute instructions from the Underlying Funds to restrict or prohibit further
purchases or transfers in an Underlying Fund under certain circumstances.
Processing Omnibus Orders
Many investments in the Underlying Funds outside of these contracts are omnibus orders from intermediaries such as other separate accounts or retirement
plans. If an Underlying Fund’s policies and procedures fail to successfully
detect and discourage Short-Term Trading, there may be a negative impact to the Owners of the Underlying Fund. If an Underlying Fund believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect transfer
requests from Owners engaged in Short-Term Trading, the Underlying Fund may reject the
entire omnibus order and delay or prevent us from implementing your transfer request.
Required Information Sharing
Under rules adopted by the SEC, we also have written agreements with the Underlying Funds that obligate us to, among other things, provide the Underlying
Funds promptly upon request certain information about you (e.g., your social security
number) and your trading activity.
Transfers During the Income Phase
During the Income Phase, only one transfer per month is permitted between the Variable Portfolios.
No other transfers are allowed during the Income Phase. Transfers will be effected for
the last NYSE business day of the month in which we receive your request for the transfer.
You may not use the DCA Program or the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program during the Income
Phase.
Voting
Rights
The Company is the legal owner of the Trusts’ shares. However, when an Underlying Fund
solicits proxies in conjunction with a shareholder vote, we must obtain your
instructions on how to vote those shares. We vote all of the shares we own in
proportion to your instructions. This includes any shares we own on our own behalf. As a result of this proportionate voting, the vote of a small number of contract Owners can determine the
outcome of a vote. Should we determine that we are no longer required to vote in the
manner described above, we will vote the shares in our own right.
Access to your Money
You can access money in your contract in one of the following ways:
•
Partial Withdrawal;
•
Systematic Withdrawal;
•
Total Withdrawal (also known as surrender); or
25
•
Annuity Income Payment (during Income Phase).
Withdrawals made
prior to age 59½ may result in a 10% IRS penalty tax. Certain Qualified plans restrict and/or prohibit your ability to withdraw money from your contract. Please see TAXES.
Minimum Withdrawal Amount and Minimum Contract Value
| |
Minimum
Withdrawal
Amount |
Minimum
Contract
Value(1) |
| Partial Withdrawal |
$1,000 |
$2,500(2) |
| Systematic Withdrawal |
$100 |
$2,500(2) |
(1)
The value left in any Variable Portfolio or available Fixed Account must be at least $100 after a withdrawal.
(2)
The total contract value must be at least $2,500 after a withdrawal.
Where
permitted by state law, we may terminate your contract if your contract value is less than $2,500 as a result of withdrawals and/or fees and charges. We will provide you with 60 days written notice that
your contract is being terminated. At the end of the notice period, we will distribute
the contract’s remaining value to you.
If you elected the optional Living Benefit, withdrawals taken under the parameters of the feature that reduce contract
value below the minimum contract value will not terminate your contract. Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT below.
Penalty-Free Withdrawal Amount
Your contract provides for a penalty-free withdrawal
amount each contract year during the applicable withdrawal period. The penalty-free
withdrawal amount is the portion of your contract that we allow you to take out without being charged a withdrawal charge. The penalty-free withdrawal amount does not reduce the basis used to
calculate future annual penalty-free withdrawals and withdrawal
charges.
| Your maximum annual penalty-free withdrawal amount equals 10% of remaining Purchase
Payments not yet withdrawn each contract year, and still
subject to withdrawal charges. |
| If you elect the optional Living Benefit, please see Penalty-Free Withdrawal Amount under “What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily
Flex?” under OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT
below. |
Purchase Payments that are no longer subject to a withdrawal
charge and not previously withdrawn may also be withdrawn penalty-free.
If, in any contract year, you choose to take less than the full penalty-free withdrawal amount, then
you may not carry over the unused amount as an additional penalty-free withdrawal in
subsequent years.
Assessment of Withdrawal
Charges
We deduct a withdrawal charge applicable to any amount of a partial or total withdrawal in excess of
your penalty-free withdrawal amount made before the end of the withdrawal
charge period.
Before purchasing this contract, you should consider the effect of withdrawal charges on your investment if you need to withdraw more than the annual penalty-free amount during the withdrawal
charge period. You should fully discuss this decision with your financial
representative.
The withdrawal charge percentage is determined by the number of years the Purchase Payment has been in the contract at the time of the withdrawal and the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint achieved based on the sum of all Purchase Payments. Please see WITHDRAWAL CHARGES and EXPENSES.
When you make a partial withdrawal, we deduct it from any remaining annual penalty-free withdrawal
amount first, next from remaining Purchase Payments on a first-in, first-out basis, and
then from any remaining contract value. This means that you will access your Purchase Payments that are lower or no longer subject to withdrawal charges before those Purchase Payments that are still
subject to withdrawal charges or higher withdrawal charges.
If you request a total withdrawal (surrender) of your contract,
we may also deduct any premium taxes, if applicable. If you fully
surrender your contract, withdrawal charges will be assessed against the amount of Purchase Payments subject to withdrawal charges. This means
that, if you surrender your contract while withdrawal charges still apply, any prior penalty-free withdrawal amounts taken in the current contract year are not
subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges. Please see EXPENSES.
Calculating Withdrawal Charges
For the purpose of calculating the withdrawal charge if you request a total withdrawal of your
contract, any prior penalty-free withdrawal amount, including a required minimum
distribution, in the current contract year is not subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges.
Example:
For example, you make an initial Purchase Payment of $100,000. For purposes of this example we will assume a 0% growth rate over the life of the
contract, no subsequent Purchase Payments and no election of optional features. In
contract year 2, you take out your maximum penalty-free withdrawal of $10,000. After
that penalty-free withdrawal your contract value is $90,000. In the 3rd contract year, you request a total withdrawal of your contract and your withdrawal charge based on your Accumulated
Premium Breakpoint for the 3rd contract year is 4%. We will apply the following
calculation:
A–(B × C)=D, where:
A=
Your contract value at the time of your request for withdrawal ($90,000)
Your contract value at the time of your request for withdrawal ($90,000)
B=
The amount of your Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charge ($100,000)
The amount of your Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charge ($100,000)
26
C=
The withdrawal charge percentage applicable to the age of each Purchase Payment (assuming 4% is the applicable percentage) [B × C=$4,000]
The withdrawal charge percentage applicable to the age of each Purchase Payment (assuming 4% is the applicable percentage) [B × C=$4,000]
D=
Your full contract value ($86,000) available for total withdrawal
Your full contract value ($86,000) available for total withdrawal
Required Minimum Distributions
If you are taking required minimum distributions applicable to this contract only, we waive any withdrawal charges applicable to those withdrawals. Please see TAXES for details regarding required minimum
distributions.
Annuity Income Payments
Any time after your second contract anniversary, you may receive annuity income payments for a specified period of time and at a frequency as elected by you.
We will waive any applicable withdrawal charges upon processing of your request to
annuitize the contract. Please see ANNUITY INCOME
OPTIONS.
Processing Withdrawal Requests
A request to access money from your contract, as outlined above, must be submitted in writing and in
Good Order to the Annuity Service Center at the following address. Withdrawals are
processed effective the date they are deemed in Good Order and payments are made within 7
days. If you take a partial withdrawal, you can choose whether any applicable
withdrawal charges are deducted from the amount withdrawn or from the contract value
remaining after the amount withdrawn. If you fully surrender your contract value, we
deduct any applicable withdrawal charges from the amount
surrendered.
For withdrawals of $500,000 and more, you are required to include a signature guarantee issued by
your broker-dealer which verifies the validity of your
signature.
| Annuity Service Center P.O. Box 15570 Amarillo, TX 79105-5570 |
Any request for withdrawal will be priced as of the day it is
received by us in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center, if the request is received
before Market Close. If the request for withdrawal is received after Market Close, the request will be priced as of the next NYSE business day. Withdrawals are processed effective the date they
are deemed in Good Order and payments are made within 7 days.
We may be required to suspend or postpone the payment of a withdrawal for any period of time when:
(1) the NYSE is closed (other than a customary weekend and holiday closings); (2)
trading with the NYSE is restricted; (3) an emergency exists such that disposal of or determination of the value of shares of the Variable Portfolios is not reasonably practicable; (4) the SEC, by order,
so permits for the protection of contract Owners.
Additionally, we reserve the right to defer payments for a withdrawal from a Fixed Account for up to six months.
Partial, Systematic, and Required Minimum Distributions
Partial withdrawals, systematic withdrawals and required minimum distributions will be made
proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and the Fixed Account in which you are
invested, unless you provide different instructions.
If you surrender your contract, we may deduct any premium
taxes, if applicable. Please see EXPENSES.
Optional Living Benefit Withdrawals
Partial Withdrawals under an optional Living Benefit must be deducted proportionately from each
Variable Portfolio and Secure Value Account in which you are invested. You cannot
request withdrawals from one or more specific funds in which you are invested.
Total Withdrawals
We calculate withdrawal charges upon total withdrawal
of the contract on the day after we receive your request in Good Order. Any prior
penalty-free withdrawal amount in the current contract year is not subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges. We will return your contract value less any
applicable fees and charges within 7 calendar days of the request.
Systematic Withdrawal Program
During the Accumulation Phase, you may elect to receive periodic withdrawals under the Systematic
Withdrawal Program for no additional charge. Under the program, you may choose to take
monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual payments from your contract. Electronic transfer of these periodic withdrawals to your bank account is available.
Please contact our Annuity Service Center which can provide the necessary enrollment forms. A withdrawal charge may apply if the amount of the periodic
withdrawals in any year exceeds the penalty-free withdrawal amount permitted each
year.
If you elect the Living Benefit and choose to receive periodic withdrawals under the Systematic Withdrawal Program on or after the Activation Date, you must
request withdrawals on the appropriate Living Benefit enrollment form. The Systematic
Withdrawal Program may not be established before the Activation Date. If we receive your request on another form, your request will not be processed. The Systematic Withdrawal Program for contracts
with a Living Benefit is designed to provide withdrawal amounts within the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount. Any amounts taken above your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
while enrolled in the Systematic Withdrawal Program will eliminate the remaining
systematic withdrawals within the same contract year and may permanently reduce future
guaranteed withdrawal amounts. The Systematic Withdrawal Program will be re-established in the following contract year after such withdrawals, and the annualized systematic withdrawals will be adjusted to account for
the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. If you must take Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) from this contract and want
to ensure that these withdrawals will not permanently reduce future guaranteed withdrawal
27
amounts on or after the Activation Date, your total distribution(s) during the current contract year must not exceed
the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount under the Living Benefit or the RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center. You may establish a Systematic Withdrawal Program to take your RMD, which will ensure the amount
taken does not exceed either the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount under the Living
Benefit or RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center.
Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the
Systematic Withdrawal Program.
We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate
the Systematic Withdrawal Program at any time and we
will notify you prior to exercising that right.
Nursing Home Waiver
If you are confined to a nursing home for 60 days or longer, we may waive the withdrawal charge on partial or total withdrawals made while you are in a nursing home or within 90 days after you leave the nursing home.
•
You cannot use this waiver during the first 90 days after your contract is issued.
•
The confinement period for which you seek the waiver must begin after you purchase your
contract.
•
We will only waive withdrawal charges on withdrawals paid directly to the contract owner, and not to a third party or other financial
services company.
In order to use
this waiver, you must submit the following documents to the Annuity Service Center:
1)
a doctor’s note recommending admittance to a nursing home;
2)
an admittance form which shows the type of facility you entered; and
3)
the bill from the nursing home which shows that you met the 60 day
confinement requirement.
Benefits Available Under the Contract
The following tables summarize information about the benefits available under the contract.
Standard Benefits (No Additional
Charge)
| Name of Benefit |
Purpose |
Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations |
| Standard Death Benefit |
Provides a death benefit
equal to the greater of contract value or Net Purchase Payments |
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit |
| Dollar Cost Averaging
(DCA) Fixed Accounts |
Interest is credited to
amounts allocated to a DCA
Fixed Account and your
money is systematically
transferred from the DCA
Fixed Account to one or
more investment options
over a specified period of
time |
•Must be funded with a Purchase Payment, not transferred contract value •Minimum funding requirements apply
•Only 6-Month, 12-Month, and 2-Year DCA Fixed Accounts may be available •Transfers may only occur on a monthly basis
•Availability may be restricted based on date of contract issuance
and election of optional benefits •Fixed Account options are not eligible to receive DCA
transfers •The interest rates applicable to the DCA Fixed Accounts may differ from
those applicable to any other Fixed Account but will never be less than
the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your
contract |
| Dollar Cost Averaging
(DCA) Program |
Allows you to have
systematic transfers of a
specified dollar amount or
percentage of contract value
from an investment option
to one or more eligible
investment options |
•Transfers may only occur on a monthly basis and will not count towards
the number of free transfers per contract year
•Minimum per transfer is $100 regardless of source account •Fixed Account options are not eligible to receive DCA
transfers •Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the DCA Program and
transfer the remaining money according to the current allocation
instructions on file |
| Automatic Asset
Rebalancing |
Allows you to have your
investments periodically
rebalanced to your
pre-selected percentages |
•Rebalancing may occur on a quarterly, semi-annual, or
annual basis •Updated rebalancing instructions must be provided upon making a non-automatic transfer, otherwise rebalancing instructions will be
automatically updated
•Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the Automatic Asset
Rebalancing Program
•If you elect an optional Living Benefit, we will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing |
28
Standard Benefits (No Additional Charge) (continued)
| Name of Benefit |
Purpose |
Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations |
| Systematic Withdrawal
Program |
Allows you to receive
periodic withdrawals from
your contract |
•Minimum withdrawal amount is $100 •Withdrawals may occur on a monthly, quarterly,
semi-annual, or annual basis
•Participation in program may be restricted if optional Living Benefit
elected |
| Automatic Payment Plan |
Allows you to make
automatic Purchase
Payments |
•Minimum requirements for the initial and subsequent
Purchase Payments and age restrictions apply
•May not be available with election of certain Living Benefit features |
Optional Benefits
no longer available for
election
| Name of
Benefit |
Purpose |
Maximum Fee |
Brief Description of Restrictions/Limitations |
| Polaris Income
Builder Daily
Flex Living Benefit |
A guaranteed minimum
withdrawal benefit,
designed for individuals who
want flexibility to activate
income at any time and
more frequent step-up
opportunities. |
2.50%
(as a percentage of
Income Base) |
May be elected only at time of contract issuance
•Covered person(s) must be age 45-80 at time of election •Withdrawal percentages depend on the number and age of
Covered Person(s) when guaranteed withdrawals are
activated
•All withdrawals before guaranteed withdrawals are activated may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit •Excess withdrawals after guaranteed withdrawals are
activated may significantly reduce or terminate the
benefit •Minimum Income Base not available after the 10th benefit
anniversary or after guaranteed withdrawals are activated, if
earlier
•Investment requirements limit available investment options •Purchase Payments subject to additional
restrictions •May not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th benefit anniversary •Certain events will automatically terminate the
benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fees may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios
only |
| Maximum
Anniversary
Value Death
Benefit |
Provides a death benefit
based on the greatest of
contract value, Net
Purchase Payments, or
highest contract value on an
eligible contract anniversary |
0.25%
(as a percentage of
average daily net
asset value allocated
to the Variable
Portfolios) |
May be elected only at time of contract issuance
•Must be younger than age 81 at time of election •Death benefit calculated differently depending on whether
an optional Living Benefit was elected
•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit |
| Polaris Income
Builder Daily
Living Benefit |
A guaranteed minimum
withdrawal benefit with
frequent step-up
opportunities |
2.50%
(as a percentage of
Income Base) |
•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit •Step-up opportunities change from daily to annually after
first withdrawal
•Investment requirements limit available investment options •Purchase Payments subject to additional
restrictions •May not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th benefit anniversary •Certain events will automatically terminate the
benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fees deducted pro rata from variable portfolios
only |
| Polaris Income
Builder Living
Benefit
(Formerly
SunAmerica
Income
Builder) |
A guaranteed minimum
withdrawal benefit with
Income Credits and step-up
opportunities |
2.20% One
Covered Person /
2.70% Two
Covered Persons
(as a percentage of
Income Base) |
•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate
the benefit
•Income Credits not available in any benefit year withdrawals are taken and not available after 12th benefit anniversary •Investment requirements limit available investment
options •Purchase Payments subject to additional restrictions •May not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th benefit
anniversary
•Certain events will automatically terminate the benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after
termination •Fees may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios only |
29
Optional Benefits no longer
available for election
(continued)
| Name of
Benefit |
Purpose |
Maximum Fee |
Brief Description of Restrictions/Limitations |
| SunAmerica
Income Plus
Living Benefit |
A guaranteed minimum
withdrawal benefit with
Income Credits and step-up
opportunities |
2.20% One
Covered Person /
2.70% Two
Covered Persons
(as a percentage of
Income Base) |
•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate
the benefit
•Income Credits unavailable after the 12th benefit anniversary •Investment requirements limit available investment
options •Minimum Income Base not available on 12th benefit anniversary if a withdrawal has been taken •Purchase Payments subject to additional
restrictions •May not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th benefit anniversary •Certain events will automatically terminate the
benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fees may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios
only |
Optional Living Benefit
General Information Applicable to the Living Benefit
This optional Living Benefit is designed for individuals and their spouses who are seeking
participation in the growth potential of the stock market and desire protection features
that provide guaranteed lifetime/retirement income. Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex
is designed to provide the contract owners(s) lifetime income with the flexibility to
activate income at any time. This feature allows the Income Base to step up more
frequently to Step-Up Values. If a contract is jointly owned by non-spousal joint Owners
(which can include Domestic Partners) and either Owner dies, the surviving Owner must
make an election in accordance with the death benefit provisions of the contract in
compliance with the IRC, which terminates the Living Benefit. Please
see DEATH BENEFITS below. Accordingly, the surviving Owner may not receive the full
benefit of the Living Benefit.
You must invest in accordance with investment requirements outlined below.
Any withdrawals taken may be subject to a 10% IRS tax penalty if you are under age 59½ at the time of the withdrawal. For information about how the
Living Benefit is treated for income tax purposes, you should consult a qualified tax
adviser concerning your particular circumstances. In addition, if you have a Qualified contract, tax law and the terms of the plan may restrict withdrawal amounts.
Certain Living Benefits are no longer offered or have changed since first being offered. If your contract was issued prior to May 1, 2023, please see
APPENDIX F – LIVING BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 1, 2023 for details regarding those benefits.
Below is a glossary of Living Benefit Terms and a
summary of the key features of the optional Living Benefit offered in your
contract.
Glossary of Living Benefit
Terms
Activation Date
The date on which
your Lifetime Income is activated. Upon activation of Lifetime Income, changes cannot be made to the Covered Person(s).
Anniversary Value
The contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary. The Continuation Contribution, if applicable, is
included in the calculation of Anniversary Values. Please see SPOUSAL
CONTINUATION below.
Benefit Effective Date
The date the Living Benefit is elected. The Benefit Effective Date is the same as the Contract Issue Date.
Benefit Quarter
Each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Quarter Anniversary
The date following each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date. If the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary has no corresponding date,
then the Benefit Quarter Anniversary will be deemed to be the following day.
For example, if a Benefit Quarter Anniversary is November 29, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary
would be February 29 of the following year; however, in a non-Leap Year, there is no
corresponding date. Therefore, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would be March 1.
Benefit Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Year Anniversary
The date on which each Benefit Year begins.
Contract Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the Contract Issue Date.
Covered Person(s)
The person, or persons, whose lifetime withdrawals are guaranteed under the Living Benefit.
30
Covered Person Change
The Covered Person(s) may be changed in the event of a Life Change Event prior to or on the
Activation Date. No further changes may be made to the Covered Person(s) after the
Activation Date.
Excess Withdrawal
Any withdrawal, or portion of a withdrawal, that is taken in a Benefit Year after the Activation Date and exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount or the Required Minimum Distribution amount as calculated by the Annuity Service
Center. An Excess Withdrawal will cause the Income Base and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount to be recalculated.
Income Base
The Income Base is a value used to determine the Living Benefit fee and the maximum amount that may
be withdrawn each Benefit Year after the Activation Date without reducing the Income
Base. The Income Base is also used to determine the amount paid each year over the
lifetime of the Covered Person(s), if and when the contract value is reduced to zero,
but the Income Base is still greater than zero, or upon the Latest Annuity Date.
Investment Requirements
In order to elect the Living Benefit, you must invest your money in accordance with certain requirements outlined under Investment Requirement for Optional
Living Benefits in APPENDIX A- UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Life Change Event
A change to the Covered Person(s) upon marriage, divorce or death if prior to the Activation
Date.
Lifetime Income
Any withdrawal taken on or after the Activation Date that is all or part of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or Protected Income Payment.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
The maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year on or after activating Lifetime Income and while the contract value is greater than zero
without reducing the Income Base.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount available for withdrawal each
Benefit Year after activating Lifetime Income and while the contract value is greater
than zero. For the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentages applicable to your contract, please see APPENDIX F — LIVING BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 1, 2023 or APPENDIX I - LIVING BENEFIT RATES FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED ON OR AFTER
MAY 1, 2023.
Minimum Income Base
The Minimum Income Base is a guaranteed minimum amount of the Income Base calculated on each contract Benefit Year Anniversary prior to the
Activation Date and
up to the 10th Benefit Year Anniversary of the contract. A Minimum Income Base Percentage will be
applied annually to each Purchase Payment received prior to that Benefit Year
Anniversary during the Minimum Income Base period of 10 years, as long as the Activation Date is after that Benefit Year Anniversary.
Any withdrawals taken will proportionately reduce each Purchase Payment used in the calculation of the Minimum Income Base. The Minimum Income Base is only
available in the first 10 Benefit Years, or upon the Activation Date, if earlier. For
example: a Purchase Payment received in the 5th Benefit Year prior to the Activation Date can only have a maximum of 5 Benefit Year Anniversaries on which the Minimum Income Base can increase by the annual
Minimum Income Base Percentage.
Minimum Income Base Percentage
A percentage by which the Minimum Income Base may increase on each Benefit Year Anniversary during
the Minimum Income Base period. For the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentages applicable to your contract, please see APPENDIX F — LIVING BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO
MAY 1, 2023 or APPENDIX I - LIVING BENEFIT RATES FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED ON OR AFTER
MAY 1, 2023.
Protected Income Payment
The amount to be paid each year over the lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the Activation Date, if and when the contract value is reduced to zero, but
the Income Base is still greater than zero or if the Latest Annuity Date has been
reached.
Protected Income Payment Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Protected Income Payment. For the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentages applicable to your contract, please see APPENDIX F — LIVING BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 1, 2023 or APPENDIX I - LIVING BENEFIT RATES FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED ON OR AFTER MAY 1, 2023.
Step-up Value
The Step-up Value is used to determine the Income Base on a daily basis. The Step-Up Value is
equal to the current contract value on any day where the current contract value is
greater than the current Income Base due to favorable market performance.
Overview of Living Benefit
The optional Living Benefit, Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex®, is designed to help you create a guaranteed income stream based on a series of withdrawals you may
take from your contract that may last as long as you live, or as long as you and your
spouse live. As long as you take these withdrawals within the parameters of the Living Benefit, you will receive a guaranteed income stream for life even if the entire contract value has been
reduced to zero. Alternatively, you should know that you may also receive
31
annuity income
payments for life if you annuitize your contract. Please see ANNUITY
INCOME OPTIONS below.
You may have elected the optional Living Benefit, which is a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, for an additional fee only at the time of contract issue. The
Living Benefit may offer protection in the event your contract value declines due to
unfavorable investment performance, certain withdrawal activity, if you live longer than expected or any combination of these factors. You may never need to rely on this protection as the benefit’s
value is dependent on your contract’s performance, your withdrawal activity and your longevity. If you do not expect to take any withdrawals, then electing the Living Benefit would not
be appropriate. Though the optional Living Benefit offers additional protections, the
additional fee associated with the benefit has the impact of reducing the net investment return. If you elect the Living Benefit prior to activating Lifetime Income, any withdrawal that reduces the
contract value to zero will terminate the contract including its optional Living Benefit.
However, although market performance and fees can reduce the contract value to zero,
they will not result in the termination of your contract and its benefits.
Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce the value of or terminate the Living Benefit; therefore,
election of the Living Benefit may not be appropriate for a contract owner who intends
to take withdrawals greater than the maximum annual withdrawal amount allowable under the Living Benefit.
Please see POLARIS INCOME BUILDER DAILY FLEX below for a more detailed description of the Living Benefit regarding how the benefit works, its availability, applicable restrictions, fees and additional
considerations. You should analyze the Living Benefit
thoroughly and understand it completely before deciding to elect the Living Benefit.
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex
How does Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex work?
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex offers guaranteed lifetime income plus the opportunity to increase income by locking in Step-up Values. If you elect this
feature, you must elect the date on which your Lifetime Income is activated (the
“Activation Date”).
This feature allows you flexibility to make a change to your initial election of Covered Person(s) (the “Covered Person Change”) on the Activation
Date. The Covered Person Change is also permitted where there is a marriage, divorce,
or death prior to the Activation Date (the “Life Change Event”) of the
original Covered Person(s). At least one of the original named Covered Person(s) must remain on the contract.
You may take withdrawals prior to the Activation Date that will not lock in the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage,
but any such withdrawals will proportionately reduce the Income Base and Purchase
Payments used in the calculation of the Minimum Income Base. Note: If the Activation Date is prior
to the specified
Benefit Year Anniversary, you will no longer be eligible for the Minimum Income Base on the Benefit Year Anniversary.
Prior to the Activation Date, the Income Base step-ups, if any, occur on a daily basis. The Income Base is the basis for the Covered Person(s)’ Lifetime
Income. The Income Base is initially equal to the first Purchase Payment, increased by
any subsequent Purchase Payments, if any, and reduced proportionately for any
withdrawals made. In addition, if the Activation Date is not prior to the specified Benefit Year Anniversary, you will be eligible for the Minimum Income Base on the Benefit Year Anniversary. The
Minimum Income Base is a specified percentage of the Purchase Payment(s). The Purchase
Payment(s) used to calculate the Minimum Income Base are reduced for any withdrawals
taken prior to the Activation Date.
On or after the Activation Date, while both the Income Base and the contract values are greater than zero, the Income Base may only be increased on the Benefit
Year Anniversary dates, looking back at the prior Benefit Year’s Step-up Values
and subsequent Purchase Payments, if any. Please see
“How do increases to the Income Base work under Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?”
below.
Are there investment requirements if I
elect the Living Benefit?
Yes, you must allocate your assets, including Purchase Payments and the Continuation Contribution, if any, to a combination of the Secure Value Account and
Variable Portfolios as detailed below.
With respect to amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account, the crediting interest rate will never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate
specified in your contract. The crediting interest rate, once established, will not
change for each allocation to the Secure Value Account for the duration of the guarantee period. The guarantee period for the Secure Value Account is a one year period that automatically renews every year from
the date of each allocation to the Secure Value Account, unless the Living Benefit has
been cancelled. Each allocation to the Secure Value Account may have different crediting interest rates. You may not reallocate your money in the Secure Value Account to a DCA Fixed Account or Fixed
Account, if available, or to the Variable Portfolios at any time unless the Living
Benefit is cancelled.
You may use available DCA Fixed Accounts to invest your target allocations in accordance with the
investment requirements.
Please see Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS
AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for specific investment
requirements applicable to your Living Benefit.
32
How do my
investment requirements impact my feature and contract?
Before you elect the Living Benefit, you should carefully consider whether the investment
requirements associated with the Living Benefit meet your investment objectives and
risk tolerance.
The investment requirements may reduce the need to rely on the guarantees provided by the Living Benefit because they allocate your investment across asset
classes and potentially limit exposure to market volatility. As a result, you may have
better, or worse, investment returns by allocating your investments more aggressively. Therefore, the investment restrictions reduce the Company’s risk that the contract value will be reduced to zero before
the Covered Person(s)’ death. Withdrawals taken while the contract value is greater
than zero are withdrawals of the contract owner’s own money. Thus, these
investment restrictions would reduce the likelihood that the Company would use its own assets to make payments in connection with the Living Benefit guarantee. Please consult your financial representative regarding which
Variable Portfolios are appropriate for the Living Benefit you elected.
To be considered in Good Order, your allocation instructions for any Purchase Payment as well as
your target allocations if you invest in a DCA Fixed Account must comply with the
investment requirements, provided under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A -
UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT, for the amount not
invested in the Secure Value Account. You may not transfer any amounts between the
Secure Value Account and the Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure
Value Account may not be used as a target account if you are using the DCA Program to
comply with investment requirements. You may not request any specific amount of any
withdrawal to be deducted solely from the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the contract
value.
We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable
Portfolios are added, deleted, substituted, merged or otherwise reorganized. We will
promptly notify you in writing of any changes to the investment requirements due to additions, deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options. The required allocation
percentage to the Secure Value Account will not change for the life of your contract.
Rebalancing and Investment Requirements
We will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing. If rebalancing instructions are not provided, we
will align your rebalancing allocations with your Purchase Payment allocation
instructions, or if using a DCA Fixed Account, your target DCA instructions. We require quarterly rebalancing because market performance, transfers, and withdrawal activity may result in your
contract’s allocations going outside these requirements. Quarterly rebalancing will
ensure that your
allocation will continue to comply with the investment requirements for this feature.
Automatic transfers and/or systematic withdrawals will not result in rebalancing before the next
automatic quarterly rebalancing occurs. The day following any transfer or withdrawal
you initiate, we will rebalance in accordance with your most current and compliant Automatic Asset Rebalancing instructions on file. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you
initiate a transfer, we will update your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect
the percentage allocations resulting from that transfer (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”) which will replace any previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided.
If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions would result in allocations
inconsistent with the investment requirements, we will revert to the last compliant
instructions on file. You can modify your rebalancing instructions, as long as they are
consistent with the investment requirements, at any time by calling the Annuity Service
Center. If we cannot complete automatic rebalancing according to your current instructions due to Variable Portfolio changes (including closures, substitutions, or mergers), we reserve the right to allocate
the applicable amounts that would have been transferred to the impacted Variable
Portfolio(s) to a money market option available under the contract.
Please see AUTOMATIC ASSET REBALANCING PROGRAM
above.
We will not rebalance amounts in the Secure
Value Account or DCA Fixed Accounts under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.
What are the factors used to calculate Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
The Lifetime Income offered by Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex is calculated by considering the
factors described below.
First, we determine the Step-up Values which are values used to determine the Income Base. The initial Step-up Value is equal to the contract
value. Then, on any day that the contract value is greater than the Income Base on that day, the Income Base is stepped up to that value. The Step-up Value is determined daily prior to the
Activation Date.
Second, we determine the Income Base, which initially is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase
Payment received and is reduced proportionately for any withdrawals taken prior to the
Activation Date and Excess Withdrawals taken on or after the Activation Date.
Third, if you do not activate Lifetime Income before each Benefit Year Anniversary up to the 10th Benefit Year Anniversary, an annual Minimum Income Base Percentage will be applied to Purchase Payments received prior to that Benefit Year Anniversary. Further, any withdrawals taken prior to activating Lifetime Income will proportionately reduce the Purchase Payments used in the calculation of the Minimum Income
Base.
33
Fourth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, which represents the maximum percentage of the Income Base that can be withdrawn each Benefit Year on or after the Activation Date and while
the contract value is greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base. If your
contract value is reduced to zero after the Activation Date but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of the Income Base you will receive each Benefit Year thereafter until the death of the
Covered Person(s).
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage are determined by
two factors upon the Activation Date: 1) whether there is one or two Covered Person(s)
and 2) the age of the Covered Person(s).
Fifth,
we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year on or after the Activation Date, while the contract value is greater
than zero, without reducing the Income Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is
calculated by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage. If your contract value is reduced to zero after activating Lifetime Income,
but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income
Payment is determined by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals, if any. Excess Withdrawals are withdrawals taken on or after the Activation Date that exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year. An Excess
Withdrawal reduces your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any
Excess Withdrawal reduces the Income Base in the same proportion by which the contract
value is reduced by the Excess Withdrawal. Please see
“What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?” below.
Please see APPENDIX D – OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT EXAMPLES for detailed numerical
examples of how your Living Benefit is calculated.
How do increases to the Income Base work under Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
Prior to the Activation Date, the Income Base is increased daily to the Step-up Value and by subsequent Purchase Payments, if any.
Additionally, prior to the Benefit Year Anniversary, but during the Minimum Income Base period, the Income Base will be increased to at least the Minimum
Income Base on the Benefit Year Anniversary as a specified percentage of the Purchase
Payments.
On or after the Activation Date, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the higher Step-up Value since the
Activation Date (“first look-back”) or, if one or more Excess Withdrawals
have been taken in that Benefit Year, to the higher Step-up Value since the last Excess
Withdrawal.
After the first look-back, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the higher Step-up Value since the last Benefit Year Anniversary. If one or more Excess Withdrawals have
been taken in that Benefit Year, the Income Base is increased on the Benefit Year
Anniversary by looking back to the higher Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal.
What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and the Purchase Payment(s) used in the calculation of the Minimum Income Base may change over
time as a result of the timing and amount of any withdrawals.
Prior to the Activation Date
Any withdrawal, including penalty-free withdrawals, in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base on the
date the withdrawal occurs and in the same proportion by which the contract value is
reduced by the withdrawal. This may result in a lower amount of Lifetime Income when Lifetime Income withdrawals are activated.
Additionally, any withdrawal taken will reduce each Purchase Payment included in the calculation of the Minimum Income Base. The reduction to the
Purchase Payment(s) will result in a lowered amount being applied to the Income Base
during the Minimum Income Base Period. However, the Minimum Income Base will continue to
increase during the Minimum Income Base Period prior to the Activation Date. Lastly,
any withdrawals will not lock-in your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage or Protected
Income Payment Percentage, if applicable, because your Lifetime Income withdrawals have
not been activated.
On or after the Activation Date
Lifetime Income withdrawals during a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base. However, if you
choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year, you may not carry over the unused amount for withdrawal in subsequent years. Your Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of taking less than the
entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please note that if you
delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals.
Penalty-Free Withdrawal Amount: Your Lifetime Income is free of withdrawal charges. However, if you take a withdrawal after the Activation Date which is greater than your Lifetime Income, that amount is
treated as an Excess Withdrawal. Such withdrawal may be subject to charges and could
result in your contract value being reduced to zero which would significantly reduce or eliminate the value of electing a Living Benefit.
For example, if you elected a Living Benefit and your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (MAWA) on or after the Activation Date is $6,000 (assuming Maximum
Annual
34
Withdrawal
Percentage of 6%, $100,000 Income Base and $100,000 Contract Value), your penalty-free withdrawal amount would be $10,000. That means that the $6,000 MAWA for that contract year would not be
assessed a withdrawal charge because it is within the penalty-free withdrawal amount
and was taken on or after the Activation Date. You may also take up to an additional $4,000 that contract year on or after the Activation Date as a penalty-free withdrawal amount; however,
this $4,000 would be considered an Excess Withdrawal under the Living Benefit which
proportionally reduces the Income Base and future Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amounts. In the event you take Excess Withdrawals on or after the Activation Date that are greater than your Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount, your contract value could be reduced to zero.
Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce the value of or
terminate the Living Benefit.
For example, assume that your contract value is $106,000, your
Income Base is $120,000, your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is $6,000 and your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage is 5%. You request a withdrawal of $11,000. Your Income Base will be reduced
to $114,000 as follows: $120,000 x {1 – [($11,000 - $6,000)/($106,000 - $6,000)]}
= $114,000. The new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will now be 5% of the Income Base: 5% x $114,000 which is $5,700.
Excess Withdrawals reduce your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any Excess Withdrawal in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base in the
same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“Excess Withdrawal”). As a result of a reduction of the Income Base, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be equal to the reduced Income
Base multiplied by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. The last
recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in a given Benefit Year is available for withdrawal at the beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than the previous Benefit Year’s Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount.
When the contract value is less than the Income Base, Excess Withdrawals will reduce the Income Base by an amount which is greater than the amount of the
Excess Withdrawal. The impact of withdrawals on specific factors is further explained
below:
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that year,
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not change for the next year unless your
Income Base is increased. If you take an Excess Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying the reduced Income Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. This recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is
available for withdrawal at the beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than your
previous Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.
Protected Income Payment: If the Income Base is greater than zero, but the contract value has been reduced to zero due to unfavorable investment performance, deduction of fees, or withdrawals within
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, we will pay any remaining Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount for the current Benefit Year. Thereafter, you will receive the
Protected Income Payment each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) which is calculated by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the
applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage. The Income Base is no longer increased
on Benefit Year Anniversaries after the contract value has been reduced to zero. As a
result, the Protected Income Payment is calculated once and will not change. Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?”
below.
Minimum Income Base: If you activate Lifetime Income during the Minimum Income Base Period, the Minimum Income Base will no longer increase on the
next Benefit Year Anniversary.
Look-back Periods: If you take one or more Excess Withdrawals in a Benefit Year, the Income Base may be increased on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back only to the Higher Step-up Value since the
last Excess Withdrawal. This means that if you take an Excess Withdrawal, you lose the
opportunity to lock in a potentially higher Step-up Value that may have occurred prior
to that Excess Withdrawal during that Benefit Year.
All withdrawals from the contract, including Lifetime Income withdrawals, will reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may impact other
provisions of your contract. Unfavorable investment experience and/or fees will also
reduce your contract value. Lifetime Income withdrawals are deducted proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and Secure Value Account in which you are invested. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above and EXPENSES
below.
What is the fee for Polaris Income
Builder Daily Flex?
The fee for Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex is calculated as
a percentage of the Income Base and deducted from the contract value on a quarterly basis beginning on the first Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the Benefit Effective Date. Please see APPENDIX B — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state
specific information regarding the assessment of the fee. After the first Benefit Year, on each Benefit Quarter Anniversary, we will (1) deduct the fee in
effect for the
35
previous Benefit
Quarter; and (2) determine the fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Please see fee table below:
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Fee
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decrease or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The quarterly fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40%/ 4).
The initial annual fee rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters
identified in the table above. Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary
formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index (“VIX®”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or
increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums
and maximums identified in the table above.
Should the VIX no longer be appropriate or available, we would
substitute the VIX with another measure of market volatility for determining the fee. If we substitute the VIX, we will notify you; however, the maximum and minimum annual fee rates described in this prospectus
are guaranteed for the life of your contract. Please see APPENDIX
C — FORMULA AND EXAMPLES OF CALCULATIONS OF THE POLARIS INCOME BUILDER
DAILY FLEX FEE.
An increase in the Income Base due to attaining a new Step-up Value or an addition of subsequent
Purchase Payment(s) will result in an increase to the amount of the fee you pay since
the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as described above.
If your contract value falls to zero, the fee will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit
is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect
while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender
your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by
multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date when the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter
Anniversaries.
What happens if the contract
value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?
Prior to the Activation Date:
If the contract value is reduced to zero, due to a withdrawal,
If the contract value is reduced to zero, due to a withdrawal,
but the Income Base is greater than zero, the contract will be terminated including any optional
benefits and features.
On or after the Activation Date:
If the contract value is reduced to zero, but the Income Base is greater than zero, we will pay the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit Year. Thereafter we will pay the Protected Income Payment over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s).
If the contract value is reduced to zero, but the Income Base is greater than zero, we will pay the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit Year. Thereafter we will pay the Protected Income Payment over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s).
If an Excess Withdrawal reduces your contract value to zero, no
further benefits are payable under the contract and your contract along with the Living Benefit will terminate.
If your contract value is reduced to zero, you may no longer make transfers, and no death benefit is payable. Therefore, you should be aware that, particularly
during times of unfavorable investment performance, Excess Withdrawals taken under the
Living Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero, thereby terminating any other benefits of the contract.
When the contract value equals zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, to receive any remaining Living Benefit, you must select one of the
following:
1.
The Protected Income Payment divided equally and paid on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the date of
death of the Covered Person(s); or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
Once you elect an option above, it cannot be changed. If you do
not select an option above, the remaining benefit will be paid as option 1 above. This amount will be divided equally and paid on a quarterly basis until the date of death of the Covered Person(s). No amount is payable
thereafter.
Additional important information
applicable to THE optional living benefit
When and how may I elect the Living Benefit?
A Living Benefit must be elected at the time of contract issue (the “Benefit Effective
Date”). You may elect to have the Living Benefit cover only your life or the lives of both you and your spouse, the “Covered Person(s).” If the contract is not owned by a natural
person, references to Owner(s) apply to the Annuitant(s). To elect the Living Benefit,
Covered Person(s) must meet the minimum and maximum age requirements. The age requirements vary depending on the type of contract and the number of Covered Persons. The age requirements for
optional death benefits and other optional features may be different than those listed
here. You must meet the age requirements for those features in order to elect them.
36
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex:
| Number of Owners |
Covered Person | |
| Minimum Age(1) |
Maximum Age(2) | |
| One Owner |
45 |
80 |
| Joint Owners(3) |
45 |
80 |
(1)
Minimum Age must be met by any Covered Person(s) as of the Contract Issue Date.
(2)
Maximum Age cannot be exceeded by any Covered Person(s) as of the date added.
(3) Joint Owners may
choose which of the two Owners will be the Covered Person. The Beneficiary’s age is not considered in determining the maximum issue age of the second Covered Person.
What are the allowable changes to Covered Person(s) prior to the Activation Date?
You may make changes to your Covered Person(s) prior to the Activation Date for specific Life Change Events as defined below by submitting the appropriate
Covered Person(s) Change form. Note: Any Covered Person being added must meet the above
minimum and maximum age requirements.
•
Marriage – If there is one Covered Person, you may add your spouse as the second Covered
Person;
•
Divorce – If there are two Covered Persons, you may remove one of the Covered Persons as a result
of divorce;
•
Death – Upon the death of one of the Covered Persons, you may remove the deceased Covered Person.
What are the allowable changes to Covered Person(s) on the Activation Date?
| Number of Owners and
Covered Persons |
Allowed Changes to Covered Person(s)
on the Activation Date |
| Single Owned Contract &
One Covered Person |
Add Spouse as the second Covered Person |
| Single Owned Contract &
Two Covered Persons(1) |
Remove or Change the second Covered
Person who is not the Single Owner |
| Jointly Owned Contract &
One Covered Person |
Add Joint Owner as the second Covered
Person |
| Jointly Owned Contract &
Two Covered Persons(1) |
Remove or Change either Covered Person |
(1)
You must keep at least one of the original Covered Person(s) if requesting to remove or change either Covered Person. Note: If a second Covered Person or if one of
the original Covered Person(s) is changed, Covered Person(s) must meet the above minimum and maximum age requirements.
Your Lifetime
Income will change as a result of removing or adding a Covered Person(s).
If I own a Qualified contract, how do Required Minimum Distributions impact my Living Benefit?
Prior to the Activation Date, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMD”) will proportionately reduce the Income Base and the Purchase Payments used to calculate the Minimum Income Base.
On or after the Activation Date, as the original Owner, or Continuing Spouse (two Covered Persons elected) electing to treat the annuity contract as their own, if you are taking Required Minimum Distributions
(“RMD”) from this
contract, and the amount of the RMD (based only on the contract to which the feature is elected and
using the Uniform Lifetime Table or Joint Life Expectancy Table from the regulations
under the Internal Revenue Code) is greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any given Benefit Year, no portion of the RMD will be treated as an Excess Withdrawal. Please see “What are the effects of
withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?”above.
Any withdrawal taken before you activate Lifetime Income
(including RMDs) will result in a reduction of the amount of future withdrawals of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (MAWA).
We will provide RMD favorable treatment, in each Benefit Year, to the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount. Any portion of a
withdrawal in a Benefit Year which exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount or RMD amount will be considered an Excess Withdrawal. If
you must take RMD from this contract and want to ensure that these withdrawals are not considered Excess Withdrawals, your total
distribution(s) during the current contract year must not exceed the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount as calculated by our
Annuity Service Center. Therefore, if you plan to take an Excess Withdrawal, then this
feature may not be appropriate for you.
The age at which you must begin taking RMDs is 73 (if you were born January 1, 1951 or later), 72 (if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before
January 1, 1951), or 70 ½ (if you were born before July 1,
1949).
If you are transferring from another company and have already reached the age you must begin taking
RMDs, you should take the current tax year’s RMD prior to the transfer, as we
cannot systematically calculate the RMD as we do not possess the valuation for the previous year end. Further, if you are turning the age you must begin taking RMDs, you should know that although tax
code allows for deferral of the first withdrawal to April of the tax year following
your attainment of the age you must begin taking RMDs, doing so may result in subsequent withdrawals being treated as Excess Withdrawals for that Benefit Year.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected one
Covered Person and if the contract value is greater than zero?
Prior to the Activation Date, if the single Covered Person dies, the surviving Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal Beneficiary may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract and the Living Benefit as a new single Covered Person. The Continuing Spouse will receive the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount upon Lifetime Income Activation and the Protected Income Payment after the contract value
goes to zero. The Continuing Spouse cannot add a
37
new Covered Person. Upon the death of the Continuing Spouse, the Beneficiary must make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and
the contract.
If an Owner that is not the single Covered Person dies, the surviving Spousal Joint Owner who is the Covered Person may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract and the Living Benefit as the current single Covered Person. The Continuing Spouse will receive the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount upon Lifetime Income Activation and the Protected Income Payment after the contract value goes to zero. The Continuing Spouse cannot add a new Covered Person. Upon the
death of the Continuing Spouse, the Beneficiary must make a death claim, which
terminates the Living Benefit and the contract.
On or after the Activation Date, if the single Covered Person dies, the surviving Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal Beneficiary may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, without the Living Benefit.
If an Owner that is not the single Covered Person dies, the
surviving Spousal Joint Owner who is the Covered Person may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, with the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount and Protected Income Payment.
Note: At any time, if, the contract value goes to zero due to a
withdrawal, the Spousal Beneficiary cannot continue the
contract.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected two
Covered Persons and if the contract value is greater than zero?
Prior to the Activation Date, upon death of the first of the two Covered Persons, the surviving Covered Person (Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal Beneficiary)
may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract as a single Covered Person. The Continuing Spouse will receive the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount upon Lifetime Income Activation and the Protected Income Payment after the contract value goes to zero. The Continuing
Spouse cannot add a new Covered Person. Upon the death of the Continuing Spouse, the
Beneficiary must make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the
contract.
Note: Prior to the
Activation Date, if the contract value goes to zero due to a withdrawal, the Living Benefit and the contract terminate, and the Spousal Beneficiary cannot continue the contract.
On or after the Activation Date, upon the first of the two Covered Person’s death, the surviving Covered Person (Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal
Beneficiary) may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, with the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount and Protected Income Payment.
Note: On or after the Activation Date, if the contract value
goes to zero due to: a) a withdrawal taken within the parameters of the Living Benefit,
the Spousal Beneficiary can continue the Living Benefit as the surviving Covered Person
with the current Protected Income Payment for their lifetime or b) an Excess Withdrawal, the Living Benefit and contract will terminate, and the Spousal Beneficiary cannot continue the contract.
The components of the Living Benefit in effect at the time of Spousal Continuation will not change.
The surviving Covered Person can elect to receive withdrawals in accordance with the
provisions of the Living Benefit elected based on the age of the younger Covered Person on the Activation Date. If Lifetime Income was not activated prior to the Spousal Continuation, the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the Protected Income Payment Percentage will be based
on the age of the surviving Covered Person on the Activation Date.
Please see “How does Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex work?” above.
If Spousal Continuation occurs, the Continuing Spouse will continue to receive any increase to the
Income Base for Step-up Values and the Continuing Spouse will also be eligible to
receive the Minimum Income Base on Benefit Year Anniversaries during the Minimum Income Base period if Lifetime Income was not activated during the Minimum Income Base period. On or after the
Activation Date, the Continuing Spouse is no longer eligible for any further
adjustments to the Minimum Income Base.
Can a non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any remaining benefits under my
Living Benefit upon the death of the second
spouse?
No. Upon the death of the Covered Person(s), if the contract value is greater than zero, a
non-spousal Beneficiary must make an election under the death benefit provisions of the
contract, which terminates the Living Benefit. Please see DEATH
BENEFITS below.
What happens to my Living
Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?
On the Latest Annuity Date if the contract value is
greater than zero, You must select one of the following options:
1.
Annuitize by selecting from choices a. or b. below:
a.
elect to begin one of the Annuity Income Payment Options set forth in Your Contract. If
38
you choose this option, We will apply the contract value to provide annuity income payments as described under ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS; or
b.
elect to receive Lifetime Income under Your Living Benefit by means of an Annuitization while any of the last named Covered Person(s) is living. If You have already activated Lifetime Income under the Living Benefit, You will continue to receive Lifetime Income by means of an Annuitization as described below. If you have
not yet activated Lifetime Income, you may activate Lifetime Income by means of an
Annuitization as described under ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS; or
2.
Fully surrender your Contract
Note: Under 1b) upon annuitization you will receive the
applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for a fixed period while you are alive. The
fixed period is determined by dividing the contract value as of the Latest Annuity Date by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. After that fixed period ends, you will receive the Protected
Income Payment, which is calculated by multiplying the Income Base as of the Latest
Annuity Date by then applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage, paid until the death(s) of all Covered Person(s). The amount of each such payment will equal the Protected Income Payment amount divided
according to the payment frequency you selected.
An election under option 1 above converts Your contract value or Lifetime Income amount to an Annuitization payable through a series of payments as
described above. Once the selected Annuitization begins, all other benefits under
Your Contract, will be terminated, transfers may no longer be made, a death benefit is no longer payable, and the Living Benefit Fee will no longer be deducted. If You do not select an option listed above by
the Latest Annuity Date, We will automatically begin making Lifetime Income payments,
which would equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as long as the contract value is greater than zero, or the Protected Income Payment if the contract values goes to zero, in accordance with
option 1b) above, divided equally and paid on a monthly frequency until the death(s) of
all of the last named Covered Person(s).
Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?
The Living Benefit may not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary unless you
surrender your contract. The Living Benefit may be cancelled by you on or after the 5th
Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table below.
| Cancellation
Request Received |
Cancellation
Effective Date |
| Years 1-5 |
5th Benefit Year Anniversary |
| Years 5+ |
Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the receipt of the cancellation request |
Once cancellation is effective, the guarantees under the Living
Benefits are terminated. In addition, the investment
requirements for the Living Benefit will no longer apply to your contract. You may not re-elect or
reinstate the Living Benefit after cancellation.
If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of the first Covered Person, the surviving Covered Person (generally, the Continuing Spouse) may cancel the
Living Benefit on or after the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will
be effective as outlined in the table above. Upon the cancellation effective date of the Living Benefit, there will be one final fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the cancellation
occurs, on the same Benefit Quarter Anniversary. Thereafter, the fee will no longer be
charged.
What happens to the Secure Value
Account and Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions if I elect to cancel Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
Amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will be automatically transferred to the 1-Year Fixed Account, if available. If the 1-Year Fixed Account is
not available, in the state in which your contract was issued, amounts will be
transferred to a money market or similar portfolio. From the day following the
automated transfer from the Secure Value Account, you may transfer this amount to another available investment option under the contract for a period of 90 days during which the transfer will not
count against the annual number of free transfers or U.S. Mail transfers, or incur a
transfer fee. You may move your funds out of the 1-Year Fixed Account or a money market
portfolio, as applicable, at any time.
The Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program and your instructions on file will not be terminated or changed upon cancellation of your Living Benefit.
Amounts transferred from the Secure Value Account into the 1-Year Fixed Account or a
money market portfolio will not impact the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions on file and that transfer will not result in new Default Rebalancing Instructions. On or after cancellation
of these features, you may provide new rebalancing instructions or you may choose to
terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program by contacting the Annuity Service Center.
Are there circumstances under which my Living Benefit will be automatically cancelled?
The Living Benefit and Lifetime Income will automatically be cancelled upon the occurrence of one of the following:
(i)
Annuitization of the contract; or
(ii)
Termination or surrender of the contract; or
(iii)
A death benefit is paid resulting in the contract being terminated; or
(iv)
Any withdrawal prior to the Activation Date that reduces the Contract Value to zero; or
(v)
On or after the Activation Date, any Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value and Income Base to zero; or
39
(vi)
Death of the Covered Person, if only one is elected after Lifetime Income has been activated; or, if
two Covered Persons are elected, death of the surviving Covered Person; or
(vii)
A change that removes all of the original Covered Persons from the contract; or
(viii)A Change of the Owner or Assignment; or
(ix)
You elect to cancel Your Living Benefit.
If a change of ownership occurs from a natural person to a
non-natural entity, the original natural Owner(s) must also be the Annuitant(s) after
the ownership change to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. A change of ownership
from a non-natural entity to a natural person can only occur if the new natural
Owner(s) was the original natural Annuitant(s) in order to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. Any ownership change is contingent upon prior review and approval by the
Company.
Any amounts that we may pay under the feature
in excess of your contract value are subject to the Company’s financial strength
and claims-paying ability.
Death Benefits
You must elect one of the death benefit options at the time you purchase your contract. Some options
are available for an additional fee, as described later in this section. Once elected,
you cannot change your death benefit option. You should discuss the available options with your financial representative to determine which option is best for you.
If your contract was issued prior to September 9, 2019
please see APPENDIX H – DEATH BENEFITS
FOLLOWING SPOUSAL CONTINUATION FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED
PRIOR TO SEPTEMBER 9, 2019.
We do not pay a death benefit if:
•
your contract value is reduced to zero; or
•
you die after you begin the Income Phase. Your Beneficiary would receive any remaining guaranteed annuity income payments in accordance with the
annuity income option you selected. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS.
We pay a death
benefit to your Beneficiary(ies) if you die during the Accumulation Phase. The death benefit will become payable upon death of the following individual.
| Owner |
Payable Upon
Death of |
| Natural persons |
Owner (or first to die,
if jointly owned) |
| Non-natural person
(e.g. Trust) |
Annuitant |
Beneficiary Designation
You must notify us in writing of the Beneficiary(ies) who will receive any death benefit payments
under your contract. You may change the Beneficiary at any time, unless otherwise
specified below.
•
If your contract is jointly owned, the surviving joint Owner must be the sole primary Beneficiary. Any other individual you designate as Beneficiary will
be the contingent Beneficiary.
•
If the Owner is a non-natural person then joint Annuitants, if any, shall be each other’s sole
primary Beneficiary, except when the Owner is a charitable remainder trust.
•
If the Owner is a trust, whether as an agent for a natural person or otherwise, you should consult with your tax and/or legal adviser to determine
whether this contract is an appropriate trust investment.
Death Benefit Processing
We process death benefit requests when we receive all required documentation, including satisfactory
proof of death, in Good Order, at the Annuity Service
Center.
| Satisfactory proof of death includes, but may not be limited to: |
| (1)A certified copy of the death certificate; or |
| (2)A certified copy of a decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death; or |
| (3)A written statement by a medical doctor who attended the deceased at the time of death. |
When Death Benefits are Calculated
•
All death benefit calculations are made as of the day required documentation is received in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center before Market
Close. If the death benefit request is received after Market Close, the death benefit
calculation will be made as of the next NYSE business day.
The contract value will remain invested pursuant to the Owner’s latest allocation instructions
on file subject to the limitations described in this prospectus, until we receive
notification of death and/or death claim paperwork in Good Order. Thereafter, a
Beneficiary may elect one of the death settlement options by contacting the Annuity Service Center.
If we receive notification of the Owner’s death before any previously requested transaction is
completed (including systematic transfer and withdrawal programs), we will cancel the
previously requested transaction.
For contracts in which the aggregate of all Purchase Payments
in contracts issued by Corebridge Financial Company to the same Owner/Annuitant are in excess of the Purchase Payments Limit, we reserve the right to
limit the death benefit amount that is in excess of the contract value at the time we
receive all paperwork and satisfactory proof of death. Any limit on the maximum death benefit payable
40
would be mutually
agreed upon in writing by you and the Company prior to purchasing the contract.
Death Benefit Settlement Options
Your Beneficiary must elect one of the following settlement options after providing required
documentation, including satisfactory proof of death, in Good
Order.
•
Lump sum payment; or
•
Annuity Income Option; or
•
Continue the contract as the spousal Beneficiary, or under a Beneficiary continuation option; or
•
Payment option that is mutually agreeable between you and us
In general, the death benefit must be paid within 5 years of
the date of death unless the Beneficiary elects to have it payable in the form of an
annuity income option. If the Beneficiary elects an annuity income option, it must be paid over the Beneficiary’s life expectancy or a shorter period. Payments associated with such
election must begin within one year of death. Federal tax law may limit the
Beneficiary’s death benefit and payout options available after your death.
Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS.
Beneficiary Continuation
Programs
Please consult a tax adviser regarding tax implications about your
particular circumstances if you are considering a Beneficiary Continuation option.
Extended Legacy Program
The Beneficiary to an existing contract issued by the Company may elect the Extended Legacy Program. The program may not be elected in conjunction with
any other settlement option.
Upon election of the Extended Legacy Program:
•
The contract continues in Owner’s name for the benefit of the Beneficiary who elected the Extended Legacy Program.
•
The Beneficiary may withdraw all or a portion of the contract value at any time and withdrawals are not subject to withdrawal charges.
•
The Beneficiary may choose to participate in the Systematic Withdrawal Program and the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.
Upon election of the Extended Legacy Program, the beneficiary
may choose to receive the death benefit under (1) a 5-year settlement option or (2) in the form of withdrawals for a longer period of time:
Under the 5-year settlement option, the Beneficiary may take withdrawals as desired, but the death benefit proceeds must be distributed no later than five
years from the date of death of the Owner.
Note: For IRAs, if an IRA Owner died prior to January 1, 2020, the 5-year settlement option is not available if the date of the Owner's death occurred after
the required beginning date for distributions.
If the
Beneficiary elects to take the death benefit in the form of withdrawals over a longer period of time:
•
Generally, IRS required minimum distributions must be made at least annually over a period not to exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy as
determined in the calendar year after the Owner’s death, with the flexibility to
withdraw more than the IRS required minimum distribution.
•
Payments must begin no later than the first anniversary of death for Non-Qualified contracts or
December 31 of the year following the year of the Owner’s death for IRAs.
Note: For IRAs, if the Owner’s death occurred on or after
January 1, 2020, choosing to receive the death benefit in the form of withdrawals for a
longer period of time is only available for a Spousal Beneficiary or a Non-Spousal
Beneficiary who is less than 10 years younger than the IRA Owner. Other Non-Spousal
Beneficiaries may instead elect the 5-year settlement option, if available.
If the contract value is less than the death benefit amount as of the date we receive satisfactory
proof of death and all required documentation in Good Order, we will increase the
contract value by the amount which the death benefit exceeds contract value.
| We will process an Extended Legacy election as of the date we receive the following in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center: |
| •Death Claim form electing Extended Legacy Program;
and |
| •Satisfactory proof of death of the original Owner. |
Upon the Beneficiary’s request to our Annuity Service Center, we will provide a prospectus and Extended Legacy Guide, with important information including
expenses, investment options and administrative features.
Restrictions on Extended Legacy
Program
•
The Extended Legacy Program cannot be elected with rollover contracts from other companies.
•
No Purchase Payments are permitted.
•
Living Benefit and death benefits that may have been elected by the original Owner are not available
and any charges associated with these features will no longer be deducted.
•
In the event of the Beneficiary’s death, any remaining contract value will be paid to the person(s) named by the Beneficiary.
•
The contract may not be assigned and ownership may not be changed or jointly owned.
•
Any Fixed Accounts and/or DCA Fixed Accounts that may have been available to the original Owner
will no longer be available for investment.
41
Expenses
We will charge the Beneficiary an annual Base Contract Expense of 0.85%. This charge is deducted
daily from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable
Portfolios.
Investment Options
•
The Beneficiary may transfer funds among the available Variable Portfolios
•
Variable Portfolios may differ from those available to the original Owner; and
•
Variable Portfolios may be of a different share class subject to higher 12b-1 fees.
Inherited Account Program
The Inherited Account Program, if available, can allow
a Beneficiary of another company’s annuity contract to transfer their inherited
Non-Qualified deferred annuity or certain Beneficiaries to transfer their inherited IRA to fund a new contract issued by the Company.
•
The Beneficiary of the transferred contract becomes the Owner (as the Beneficiary of the deceased) of the contract issued by us.
•
The Internal Revenue Code requires minimum distributions from inherited IRAs and inherited Non-Qualified deferred annuity contracts.
•
Once the contract is issued, a Systematic Withdrawal Program must be established and cannot be terminated.
•
Upon your death, your designated Beneficiary will receive the
standard death benefit, unless you elect an optional death benefit at contract issue, for an additional fee.
| We will process an Inherited Account election as of the date we receive the following at the Annuity Service Center: |
| •Inherited Account and Required Minimum Distribution Election Form; and |
| •New contract application |
Restrictions on Inherited Account Program
•
No Purchase Payments are permitted after the contract has been issued.
•
Optional Living Benefits cannot be elected under the Inherited Account Program.
•
The contract may not be assigned and ownership may not be changed or jointly owned.
Expenses
The contract issued is subject to the same fees and charges applicable to any Owner of the contract, including withdrawal charges if applicable.
Investment Options
All Variable Portfolios and available Fixed Accounts offered by the contract are available for
investment. You may transfer funds among the investment options.
DEATH BENEFIT DEFINED TERMS
The term “Net Purchase Payment” is used
frequently in describing the death benefit payable. Net Purchase Payment is an on-going
calculation. It does not represent a contract value.
We determine Net Purchase Payments as Purchase Payments less adjustments for withdrawals. Net Purchase Payments are increased by the amount of
subsequent Purchase Payments, if any, and reduced for withdrawals, if any, in the same
proportion that the contract value was reduced on the date of such withdrawal.
The term “Withdrawal Adjustment” is used for the standard death benefit, if you have
elected the Living Benefit, to describe the way in which the amount of the death benefit
will be adjusted for withdrawals.
Prior to the Activation Date any withdrawal taken: reduces the death benefit proportionately by the percentage by which each withdrawal reduced the contract value.
On or after the Activation Date any withdrawal taken reduces the death benefit as follows:
•
If cumulative Lifetime Income withdrawals for the current contract year are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the amount of adjustment will equal the amount of each Lifetime Income withdrawal.
•
If cumulative Lifetime Income withdrawals for the current contract year are in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the contract value and death benefit are first reduced by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The resulting death benefit is further adjusted by the withdrawal amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (Excess Withdrawal) by the percentage by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the resulting contract value.
The term
“withdrawals” as used in describing the death benefit options is defined as withdrawals and the fees and charges applicable to those
withdrawals.
The Company does not accept Purchase
Payments from anyone age 86 or older. Therefore, the death benefit calculations assume
that no Purchase Payments are received on or after your 86th birthday.
Death Benefit Options
Standard Death Benefit
The standard death benefit is calculated differently depending on whether you have also elected the Living Benefit described above.
42
The following describes the standard death benefit without election of the Living
Benefit:
If the contract is issued prior to your 86th birthday, the death benefit is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments.
The following describes the standard death benefit with election of the Living Benefit:
If the contract is issued prior to your 86th birthday, the death benefit is the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Purchase Payments reduced by:
a.
any Withdrawal Adjustments, as defined above, if the Living Benefit has not been terminated; or
b.
any Withdrawal Adjustments, as defined above, prior to the date the Living Benefit is terminated; and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit is terminated.
Please see Appendix G – DEATH BENEFIT EXAMPLES for examples of how your death
benefit is calculated.
Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
For an additional fee, you may elect the Maximum
Anniversary Value death benefit described below which can provide greater protection
for your Beneficiaries. You may only elect the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit at
the time you purchase your contract and you cannot change your election thereafter at
any time. The fee for the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit is 0.25% of the
average daily net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. You may pay for the
optional death benefit and your Beneficiary may never receive the benefit once you
begin the Income Phase. The Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit can only be elected
prior to your 81st birthday.
The death benefit is the
greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Net Purchase Payments; or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary prior to the earlier of your 83rd birthday or date of death, plus Purchase Payments
received since that anniversary; and reduced for any withdrawals since that anniversary
in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of
such withdrawal. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on
the applicable contract anniversary.
Please see APPENDIX G – DEATH BENEFIT EXAMPLES for examples of how your death
benefit is calculated.
Spousal Continuation
The Continuing Spouse may elect to continue the contract after your death. A spousal continuation
can only take place once, upon the death of the original Owner of the contract.
Upon election of Spousal Continuation:
•
Generally, the contract, its benefits and elected features, if any, remain the same.
•
Continuing Spouse is subject to the same fees, charges and expenses applicable to the original
Owner of the contract. Please see EXPENSES.
•
Continuing Spouse may not terminate the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit if elected at contract issue.
•
Continuing Spouse will be subject to the investment risk of Variable Portfolios, as was the original Owner.
Non-spousal joint Owners (including Domestic Partners) are not
eligible for spousal continuation, under current tax law.
Upon a spousal continuation, we will contribute to the contract
value an amount by which the death benefit that would have been paid to the Beneficiary upon the death of the original Owner, exceeds the contract value as of the Good Order date (“Continuation
Contribution”), if any. The Continuation Contribution is not considered a Purchase
Payment for the purposes of any other calculations except the death benefit following
the Continuing Spouse’s death.
| We will process a spousal continuation as of the date we receive the following at the Annuity Service Center: |
| •Death Claim form;
and |
| •Satisfactory proof of death of the original Owner. |
We will add any Continuation Contribution as of the date we receive both the Continuing Spouse’s written request to continue the contract and satisfactory
proof of death of the original Owner (“Continuation Date”) at the Annuity
Service Center.
The age of the Continuing Spouse on the Continuation Date will be used to determine any future death benefits under the contract. If you elected the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit, the death benefit payable upon the Continuing Spouse’s death would differ
depending on the Continuing Spouse’s age on the Continuation Date.
Please see APPENDIX E – DEATH BENEFITS FOLLOWING SPOUSAL CONTINUATION for a discussion of the death benefit
calculations upon a Continuing Spouse’s death.
Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT above for information on the effect of Spousal Continuation on
these benefits.
Expenses
We may deduct the following fees and expenses if applicable from your contract, as described later
in this section.
43
•
Base Contract Expenses
•
Premium Based Charge
•
Withdrawal Charges
•
Contract Maintenance Fee
•
Transfer Fee
•
Underlying Fund Expenses
•
Optional Living Benefit Fee
•
Optional Death Benefit Fee
Fees and expenses
associated with your contract reduce your investment return. Before purchasing this contract, you should consider the effect of fees and expenses on your investment. You should fully discuss this
decision with your financial representative. We will not increase certain contract
fees, such as the Base Contract Expenses or withdrawal charges for the life of your contract. Underlying Fund investment management fees may increase or decrease.
We intend to profit from the sale of the contracts. Our profit may be derived as a result of a
variety of pricing factors including but not limited to the fees and charges assessed
under the contract and/or amounts we may receive from an Underlying Fund, its
investment advisor and/or subadvisors (or affiliates thereof). Please
see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE
CONTRACT below. The fees, charges, amounts received from the Underlying Funds (or affiliates thereof) and any resulting profit may be used for any
corporate purpose including supporting marketing, distribution and/or administration of
the contract and, in its role as an intermediary, the Underlying
Funds.
| Base Contract Expenses |
0.95% |
(annualized charge as a percentage of the average daily ending
net asset value allocated to Variable Portfolios)
The Base Contract Expense (also referred to as Separate Account
Charge) compensates the Company for the mortality and expense risk and the costs of contract distribution assumed by the Company.
Generally, the mortality risks assumed by the Company arise from its contractual obligations to make annuity income payments after the Annuity Date and to
provide a death benefit. The expense risk assumed by the Company is that the costs of
administering the contracts and the Separate Account will exceed the amount received from the fees and charges assessed under the contract. There may not necessarily be a relationship between the
administrative charge imposed under the contract and the amount of expenses that may be
attributable to the contract.
If these charges do not cover all of our expenses, we will pay
the difference. Likewise, if these charges exceed our expenses, we will keep the difference. The mortality and expense risk charge is expected to result in a profit. Profit may be used for any cost or expense
including supporting distribution. Please see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION
WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACT below.
If your Beneficiary
elects to take the death benefit amount under the Extended Legacy Program, we will deduct an annual Base Contract Expense of 0.85% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. Please see Extended Legacy Program under DEATH BENEFITS.
Premium Based Charge
A Premium Based Charge applies to all initial and subsequent Premiums you make to your contract and is deducted from your contract value on each
Quarter Anniversary following the date each Premium is received by us. The Premium
Based Charge equals a percentage of each Premium and is based on the Accumulated Premium
Breakpoint achieved by the amount of the Premium or the sum of Premiums received by us,
according to the table below. The Premium Based Charge reimburses us for distribution
expenses, including commissions.
Each Premium is subject to a Premium Based Charge during the
period beginning on the first Quarter Anniversary following the date the Premium is received by us and continuing for a total of 28 Quarter Anniversaries (over a 7 year period). Once the Premium Based
Charge has been deducted for 28 Quarter Anniversaries, the Premium is no longer subject
to the Premium Based Charge.
The Accumulated Premium Breakpoint that determines the Premium
Based Charge percentage applicable on the first Quarter Anniversary is determined by the sum of Premiums received during the first contract quarter.
For example, if you make an initial Premium of $40,000
during the first contract quarter, on the first Quarter Anniversary, the Accumulated
Premium Breakpoint achieved is “Less than $50,000” and the corresponding
Premium Based Charge percentage is 5.00%.
After the first Quarter Anniversary, the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint and Premium Based Charge percentage applicable to subsequent Premium(s) are
determined by the sum of all Premiums previously received plus the subsequent
Premium(s) when received by us. If the sum of Premiums results in a higher Accumulated
Premium Breakpoint being achieved, the Premium Based Charge percentage applicable to
the entire subsequent Premium will be based on the corresponding Accumulated Premium Breakpoint. Once a Premium Based Charge is set for a Premium, it is fixed for seven years and will not change for that
Premium even if subsequent Premiums are received and/or withdrawals are taken.
For example, assuming an initial Premium of $40,000, you make a subsequent Premium of $20,000 six
months after the initial Premium. The sum of Premiums, $60,000, qualifies to meet the
next Accumulated Premium Breakpoint of “$50,000 but less than $100,000” and
the corresponding Premium Based Charge percentage of 4.50%. Therefore, the Premium
Based Charge percentage for the entire $20,000 Premium would be 4.50%.
44
| Accumulated Premium Breakpoint |
Premium
Based Charge |
Quarterly
Premium
Based Charge
(over 7 Year
Period) |
| Less than $50,000 |
5.00% |
0.1786% |
| $50,000 but less than $100,000 |
4.50% |
0.1607% |
| $100,000 but less than $250,000 |
3.50% |
0.1250% |
| $250,000 but less than $500,000 |
2.50% |
0.0893% |
| $500,000 but less than
$1,000,000 |
2.00% |
0.0714% |
| $100,000,000 or more |
1.25% |
0.0446% |
If you fully surrender your contract, we will not deduct any remaining Premium Based Charge from the
amount surrendered. We will not assess a Premium Based Charge when we pay a death
benefit, when you switch to the Income Phase and when there are no Premiums subject to
the Premium Based Charge.
Please see APPENDIX B – STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state specific information
regarding the Premium Based Charge.
Withdrawal Charges
The contract provides a penalty-free withdrawal amount every contract year. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above. You may incur a withdrawal charge if you take a withdrawal in excess of the penalty-free
withdrawal amount and/or if you fully surrender your contract. Withdrawal Charges
reimburse us for the cost of contract sales, expenses associated with issuing your contract and other acquisition expenses.
We apply a withdrawal charge schedule to each Purchase Payment (also known as “Premium”)
you contribute to the contract. A withdrawal charge does not apply to each Premium
after it has been in the contract for 7 complete years. The withdrawal charge percentage declines over time for each Premium in the contract.
The Accumulated Premium Breakpoint schedule below is used to determine the Withdrawal Charge Schedule applicable to each Premium as determined on the day
we receive the Premium. The withdrawal charge applies to each Premium for 7 years. The
Withdrawal Charge Schedule, once determined, will not change for that Premium even if
subsequent Premiums are made or withdrawals are taken.
Your initial Accumulated Premium Breakpoint is
determined by the amount of your initial Premium. Thereafter, the Accumulated Premium
Breakpoint and withdrawal charge schedule applicable to subsequent Premiums are determined by the sum of all Premiums previously received plus the subsequent premium(s) when received by
us.
You may reduce the applicable percentage but not the duration of your Withdrawal Charge Schedule by
adding subsequent Premiums which may also allow you to achieve a higher Accumulated
Premium Breakpoint. If a portion of a subsequent Premium results in a sum of Premiums that
achieves a higher
Accumulated Premium Breakpoint, according to the table below, then that entire subsequent
Premium will be subject to the Withdrawal Charge Schedule applicable to the
corresponding Accumulated Premium Breakpoint.
For example, if you make an initial Premium of $40,000, the Accumulated Premium Breakpoint achieved is “Less than $50,000” and the
corresponding Withdrawal Charge Schedule over 7 years is “6%, 5%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%,
1%, 0%.” If you make a subsequent Premium of $20,000 six months later, the sum of
Premiums, $60,000, qualifies for the next Accumulated Premium Breakpoint of
“$50,000 but less than $100,000.” Therefore, the corresponding Withdrawal
Charge Schedule over 7 years for the entire $20,000 subsequent Premium would be
“5.5%, 5%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0%.”
The Accumulated Premium Breakpoints and corresponding Withdrawal Charge Schedules are listed below:
Withdrawal Charge Schedule
| Accumulated
Premium
Breakpoint |
Years Since Receipt of Each Premium | |||||||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8+ | |
| Less than
$50,000 |
6% |
5% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $50,000 but
less than
$100,000 |
5.5% |
5% |
5% |
4% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $100,000 but
less than
$250,000 |
4.5% |
4% |
4% |
3% |
3% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $250,000 but
less than
$500,000 |
3.5% |
3% |
3% |
2.25% |
2% |
2% |
1% |
0% |
| $500,000 but
less than
$1,000,000 |
3% |
2% |
2% |
1.5% |
1% |
1% |
1% |
0% |
| $1,000,000 or
more |
2.25% |
1.5% |
1.5% |
1% |
1% |
0.75% |
0.5% |
0% |
When calculating the withdrawal charge, we treat withdrawals as coming first from the Purchase Payments that have been in your contract the longest,
which means the Purchase Payments that have the lowest Withdrawal Charge percentages.
However, for tax purposes, per IRS requirements, your withdrawals are considered as coming first from taxable earnings, then from Purchase Payments, which are not taxable if your contract is
Non-Qualified. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY
above.
If you take a partial withdrawal, you can choose whether any applicable withdrawal charges are
deducted from the amount withdrawn or from the contract value remaining after the
amount withdrawn. If you fully surrender your contract value, we deduct any applicable withdrawal charges from the amount surrendered.
We will not assess a withdrawal charge when we pay a death benefit or when you annuitize your contract.
Withdrawals made prior to age 59½ may result in tax penalties. Please see TAXES below.
45
Underlying Fund Expenses
There are deductions from and expenses paid out of the assets of each Underlying Fund. Detailed information about these deductions and expenses can be found in the
prospectuses for the Underlying Funds.
Investment Management Fees
Investment management fees are set by the Underlying
Funds’ own board of directors, and may vary. These fees are not fixed or
specified in your annuity contract.
Each Variable Portfolio purchases shares of a corresponding
Underlying Fund. The Accumulation Unit value for each purchased Variable Portfolio
share reflects the investment management fees and other expenses of the corresponding
Underlying Fund. These fees may vary. They are not fixed or specified in your annuity
contract, rather the fees are set by the Underlying Funds’ own board of directors.
12b-1 Fees
Certain Underlying Funds available in this product assess a 12b-1 fee of 0.25% of the average daily
net assets allocated to those Underlying Funds. Over time these fees will increase the
cost of your investment.
There is an annualized 0.25%
fee applicable to Class 4 shares of American Funds Insurance Series for contracts
issued on or after June 29, 2015 and Class 2 shares of American Funds Insurance Series
for contracts issued prior to June 29, 2015, Class 3 shares of Seasons Series Trust
and SunAmerica Series Trust, Class Service shares of Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance
Trust, Series II shares of AIM Invesco Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance
Funds), Class Advisor shares of PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, Class 2 shares of
Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, and Service Class shares of MFS
Variable Insurance Trust III. This amount is generally used to pay financial
intermediaries for services provided over the life of your contract.
The 12b-1 fees compensate us for costs associated with the
servicing of these shares, including, but not limited to, reimbursing us for
expenditures we make to registered representatives in selling firms for providing services to contract Owners who are indirect beneficial Owners of these shares and for maintaining contract
Owner accounts.
Contract Maintenance Fee
During the Accumulation Phase, we deduct a contract maintenance fee of $50 from your contract once per year on your contract anniversary. This charge compensates us for the cost of administering your contract.
The fee is deducted proportionately from your contract value on your contract
anniversary by redeeming the number of Accumulation Units invested in the Variable
Portfolios and the dollar amount invested in available Fixed Accounts which in total
equal the amount of the fee. If you withdraw your entire contract value, we will deduct
the contract maintenance fee from that withdrawal.
If
your contract value is $75,000 or more on your contract anniversary date, we currently waive this fee. This waiver is subject to change without
notice.
Transfer Fee
| After 15 Transfers |
$25 |
We permit 15 free transfers between investment options each contract year. We charge you $25 for each additional transfer that contract year. The transfer fee compensates us for the cost of processing your
transfer.
In Pennsylvania and Texas, any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer fee.
In Pennsylvania and Texas, any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer fee.
Optional Living Benefit Fee
The Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit fee will be calculated as a percentage of the Income Base for all years in which the Living Benefit is in effect. The Living
Benefit fee is charged and received by the Company in consideration of the Living
Benefit guarantees provided to you.
The fee is deducted proportionately from your contract value by redeeming the number of Accumulation Units invested in the Variable Portfolios and the value in
the Secure Value Account, which in total equals the amount of the fee. If your contract
value is reduced to zero before the Living Benefit has been cancelled, the fee will no longer be assessed.
We will not assess a quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit is paid
before the end of the Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect while
your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will
assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is
calculated by multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date the fee was
last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter Anniversaries.
Optional Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Fee
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decrease or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The fee rate can decrease or increase no more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40%/ 4).
The initial annual fee rate is guaranteed not to change for the
first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. After the first Benefit Year, on each “Benefit Quarter Anniversary,” we
will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the previous Benefit Quarter; and (2) determine the fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Any fee
46
adjustment is based
on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in VIX. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the
minimums and maximum identified in the table above.
Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the VIX. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate
will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximum identified
in the table above.
Please see APPENDIX C — FORMULA AND EXAMPLES OF CALCULATIONS
OF THE POLARIS INCOME
Builder Daily Flex FEE.
If your contract was purchased prior to May 1, 2023,
please see APPENDIX F — LIVING BENEFITS FOR
CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 1, 2023, for applicable
fees. If your contract was purchased on or after May 1, 2023, please see APPENDIX I - LIVING BENEFIT RATES FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED ON OR AFTER MAY 1,
2023 for the applicable initial annual fee rate.
Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Fee
If you elect the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit, the fee is 0.25% of
the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolio(s).
Premium Tax
Certain states charge the Company a tax on Purchase Payments that ranges from 0% to 3.5%. Some
states assess this premium tax when the contract is issued while other states only
assess the tax upon annuitization. The Company may advance any tax amount due, but we will deduct such amount from your contract value only when and if you begin the Income Phase
(annuitization).
Income Taxes
We do not currently deduct income taxes from your contract. We reserve the right to do so in the
future.
Reduction or
Elimination of Fees, Expenses and Additional Amounts Credited
Sometimes sales of contracts to groups of similarly situated individuals may lower our fees and
expenses. We determine which groups are eligible for this treatment. Some of the
criteria we evaluate to make a determination are size of the group; amount of expected
Purchase Payments; relationship existing between us and the prospective purchaser; length of time a group of contracts is expected to remain active; purpose of the purchase and whether that
purpose increases the likelihood that our expenses will be reduced; and/or any other
factors that we believe indicate that fees and expenses may be reduced.
The Company may make such a determination regarding sales to its employees, its affiliates’
employees and
employees of currently contracted broker-dealers; its registered representatives; and immediate
family members of all of those described.
Payments in connection with distribution of the contract
Payments We Make
We make payments in connection with the distribution of the contracts that generally fall into the three categories below.
As a result of the payments that financial representatives may receive from us or other companies,
some financial representatives may have a financial incentive to offer you a new
contract in place of the one you already own. You should consider exchanging a contract you already own only if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better
for you to purchase the new contract rather than continue to own your existing
contract.
Commissions. Registered representatives of affiliated and unaffiliated broker-dealers (“selling
firms”) licensed under federal securities laws and state insurance laws sell the
contract to the public. The selling firms have entered into written selling agreements
with the Company and Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., the distributor of the
contracts. We pay commissions to the selling firms for the sale of your contract. The
selling firms are paid commissions for the promotion and sale of the contracts according to one or more schedules. The amount and timing of commissions will vary depending on the selling firm and
its selling agreement with us. For example, as one option, we may pay upfront
commission only, up to a maximum 5.00% of each Purchase Payment you invest (which may include promotional amounts we may pay periodically as commission specials). Another option may be a lower
upfront commission on each Purchase Payment, with a trail commission of up to a maximum 0.25% of contract value annually for the life of the contract.
The registered representative who sells you the contract typically receives a portion of the compensation we pay to his/her selling firm, depending on the
agreement between the selling firms and its registered representative and their
internal compensation program. We are not involved in determining your registered
representatives’ compensation.
Additional Cash Compensation. We may enter
into agreements to pay selling firms support fees in the form of additional cash
compensation (“revenue sharing”). These revenue sharing payments may be intended to reimburse the selling firms for specific expenses incurred or may be based on sales, certain assets under
management, longevity of assets invested with us and/or a flat fee. Asset-based
payments primarily create incentives to service and maintain previously sold contracts.
Sales-based payments primarily create incentives to make new sales of contracts.
47
These revenue
sharing payments may be consideration for, among other things, product placement/preference and visibility, greater access to train and educate the selling firm’s registered representatives
about our contracts, our participation in sales conferences and educational seminars
and for selling firms to perform due diligence on our contracts. The amount of these
fees may be tied to the anticipated level of our access in that selling firm.
We enter into such revenue sharing arrangements in our discretion and we may negotiate customized
arrangements with selling firms, including affiliated and non-affiliated selling firms
based on various factors. These special compensation arrangements are not offered to all selling firms and the terms of such arrangements may vary between selling firms depending on, among other
things, the level and type of marketing and distribution support provided, assets under
management and the volume and size of the sales of our contracts.
If allowed by his or her selling firm, a registered
representative or other eligible person may purchase a contract on a basis in which an
additional amount is credited to the contract. Please see REDUCTION OR
ELIMINATION OF FEES, EXPENSES AND ADDITIONAL AMOUNTS
CREDITED above.
We provide a list of firms to whom we paid annual amounts greater than $15,000 under these revenue sharing arrangements in
2024 in the Statement of Additional Information which is available upon request.
Non-Cash Compensation. Some registered representatives and their supervisors may receive various types of non-cash compensation such as gifts, promotional items and entertainment in connection with our marketing
efforts. We may also pay for registered representatives to attend educational and/or
business seminars. Any such compensation is paid in accordance with SEC and FINRA
rules.
We do not assess a specific charge directly to you or your Separate Account assets in order to cover commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we
pay. However, we anticipate recovering these amounts from our profits which are derived
from the fees and charges collected under the contract. We hope to benefit from these revenue sharing arrangements through increased sales of our contracts and greater customer service support.
Revenue sharing arrangements may provide selling firms and/or their registered representatives with an incentive to favor sales of our contracts over other
variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to which a selling firm
does not receive the same level of additional compensation. You should
discuss with your selling firm and/or registered representative how they are compensated for sales of a contract and/or any resulting real or
perceived conflicts of interest. You may wish to take such revenue sharing arrangements into account when considering or evaluating any recommendation
relating to this contract.
Payments We Receive
We and our affiliates may directly or indirectly receive revenue sharing payments from the Trusts, their investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors
(or affiliates thereof), in connection with certain administrative, marketing and other
services we provide and related expenses we incur. The availability of these revenue sharing arrangements creates an incentive for us to seek and offer Underlying Funds (and classes of shares
of such Underlying Funds) that pay us higher amounts. Other Underlying Funds (or
available classes of shares) may have lower fees and better overall investment performance. Not all Trusts pay the same amount of revenue sharing. Therefore, the amount of fees we collect may be greater or
smaller based on the Underlying Funds you select.
We and our affiliates generally receive three kinds of
payments described below.
Rule 12b-1 or Service Fees. We receive 12b-1 fees of up to 0.25% or service fees of up to 0.50% of the average daily net assets in certain Underlying Funds.
These fees are deducted directly from the assets of the Underlying Funds. Please see EXPENSES above.
Administrative, Marketing and Support Service Fees. We receive compensation of up to 0.70% annually based on assets under management from certain Trusts’ investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof). These payments may be derived, in
whole or in part, from the profits the investment advisor realizes on the investment
management fees deducted from assets of the Underlying Funds or wholly from the assets of the Underlying Funds. Contract Owners, through their indirect investment in the Trusts, bear the costs
of these investment management fees, which in turn will reduce the return on your
investment. The payments we receive are generally based on assets under management from certain Trusts’ investment advisors or their affiliates and vary by Trust. Some investment advisers, subadvisors
and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) pay us more than others. The amount may be
significant. Such amounts received from SAAMCo, an affiliate under common control
with the Company, are not expected to exceed 0.70% annually based on assets under management.
Other Payments. Certain investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) may help
offset the costs we incur for marketing activities and training to support sales of the
Underlying Funds in the contract. These amounts are paid voluntarily and may provide such advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors access to national and regional sales conferences attended by our
employees and registered representatives. The amounts paid depend on the nature of the
meetings, the number of meetings attended, the costs expected to be incurred and the level of the advisor’s, subadvisor’s or distributor’s participation.
In addition, we (and our affiliates) may receive
occasional gifts, entertainment or other compensation as an incentive to market the
Underlying Funds and to cooperate with their marketing efforts. As a result of these payments, the
48
investment
advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) may benefit from increased access to our wholesalers and to our affiliates involved in the distribution of the contract.
Annuity Income Options
The Income Phase
What is the Income Phase?
During the Income Phase, we use the money accumulated in your contract to make regular payments to
you. This is known as “annuitizing” your contract. At this point, the
Accumulation Phase ends. You will no longer be able to take withdrawals of contract
value and all other features and benefits of your contract will terminate, including your
ability to surrender your contract.
Beginning the Income Phase is an important event. You
have different options available to you. You should
discuss your options with your financial
representative and/or tax adviser
so that together you may make the best decision for your particular circumstances.
When does the Income Phase begin?
Generally, you can annuitize your contract any time after your second contract anniversary
(“Annuity Date”) and on or before the Latest Annuity Date, defined below, by
completing and mailing the Annuity Option Selection Form to our Annuity Service
Center.
If you do not request to annuitize your
contract on the Annuity Date of your choice, your contract will be annuitized on the
Latest Annuity Date, except as specified below for certain contracts issued in New York. If your contract is jointly owned, the Latest Annuity Date is based on the older Owner’s date of
birth. Your Latest Annuity Date is defined as the first NYSE business day of the month
following your 95th birthday. For example, if your 95th birthday is July 8, 2022, the
first NYSE business day of the following month would be Monday, August 1, 2022. In
accordance with the Company’s final settlement of a multi-state audit and market
conduct examination, and other related state regulatory inquiries regarding unclaimed
property, if your contract was issued in New York with a Latest Annuity Date of age 90,
you must notify us that you want to extend the Latest Annuity Date to your 95th
birthday. At your request to extend the Latest Annuity Date, the Accumulation Phase
will also extend to the first NYSE business day of the month following your 95th
birthday for contracts issued in New York.
How do I elect to begin the Income Phase?
You must select one of the annuity income payment options, listed below, that best meets your needs
by mailing a completed Annuity Option Selection Form to our Annuity Service Center. If
you do not select an annuity income payment option, your contract will be annuitized in
accordance with the default annuity income payment option specified under Annuity Income Options below.
What is the impact on the living and death benefits if I annuitize?
If you annuitize, you may choose to take annuity income payments or withdrawals under your Living Benefit. Prior to annuitizing, you should seek advice on
whether taking annuity income payments under the contract or guaranteed withdrawals
under a Living Benefit are more advantageous to you. Upon annuitizing the contract, the death benefit will terminate. If your contract value is reduced to zero prior to annuitization as a result of receiving
guaranteed withdrawals under the Living Benefit, you will receive your Protected Income
Payment under the Living Benefit. Please see OPTIONAL
LIVING BENEFIT and DEATH BENEFITS above.
Annuity Income Options
You must send a written request to our Annuity Service Center to select an annuity income option.
Once you begin receiving annuity income payments, you cannot change your annuity income
option. If you elect to receive annuity income payments but do not select an annuity income option, your annuity income payments shall be in accordance with Option 4 for a period of 10 years; for annuity
income payments based on joint lives, the default is Option 3 for a period of 10 years.
Generally, the amount of each annuity income payment will be less with greater frequency of payments or if you chose a longer period certain guarantee.
We base our calculation of annuity income payments on the life expectancy of the Annuitant and the annuity rates set forth in your contract. In most
contracts, the Owner and Annuitant are the same person. The Owner may change the
Annuitant if different from the Owner at any time prior to the Annuity Date. The Owner
must notify us if the Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date and designate a new
Annuitant. If we do not receive a new Annuitant election, the Owner may not select an annuity income option based on the life of the Annuitant.
If the contract is owned by a non-natural Owner, the Annuitant cannot be changed after the contract has been issued and the death of the Annuitant will
trigger the payment of the death benefit.
If you elect a lifetime based annuity income option without a guaranteed period, your annuity income payments depend on longevity only. That means that you may
potentially not live long enough to receive an annuity income payment. If you die
before the first annuity income payment, no annuity income payments will be made.
Annuity Income Option 1 – Life Income Annuity
This option provides annuity income payments for the life of the Annuitant. Annuity income payments
end when the Annuitant dies.
Annuity Income Option 2 – Joint and Survivor Life Income Annuity
This option provides annuity income payments for the life of the Annuitant and for the life of
another designated person. Upon the death of either person, we will continue to make
49
annuity income
payments during the lifetime of the survivor. Annuity income payments end when the survivor dies. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances, the survivor’s annuity income payments may
be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.
Annuity Income Option 3 – Joint and Survivor Life Income Annuity with 10 or 20
Years Guaranteed
This option is similar to Option 2 above, with an additional guarantee of payments for at least 10
or 20 years, depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant and the survivor die
before all of the guaranteed annuity income payments have been made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments greater than 10
years may not be available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain
circumstances the survivor's annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.
Annuity Income Option 4 – Life Income Annuity with 10 or 20 Years
Guaranteed
This option is similar to income Option 1 above with an additional guarantee of payments for at
least 10 or 20 years, depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant dies before all
guaranteed annuity income payments are made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments greater than 10 years may not be
available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances
the Beneficiary’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.
Annuity Income Option 5 – Income for a Specified
Period
This option provides annuity income payments for a guaranteed period ranging from 5 to 30 years,
depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant dies before all the guaranteed annuity
income payments are made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the
Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments for more than 10 years may not
be available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances
the Beneficiary’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code. Additionally, if variable annuity income payments are elected under this option, you (or the
Beneficiary under the contract if the Annuitant dies prior to all guaranteed annuity income payments being made) may redeem any remaining guaranteed variable annuity income payments after the
Annuity Date. Upon your request, the contract may be commuted if a period certain
annuitization income option has been elected. The amount available upon such redemption
would be the discounted present value of any remaining guaranteed annuity income payments that would reflect the fluctuating trading costs for liquidating the securities in place to pay for these
contractual obligations. The detrimental impact depends on the nature of the securities
(and which may include short-term, medium term, and/or long-term investments) resulting in varying losses to
the Company. The sum of remaining guaranteed variable annuity income payments is discounted at a rate of no less than 8% in order to determine the
discounted present value.
The value of an Annuity Unit,
regardless of the option chosen, takes into account Base Contract Expense which
includes a mortality and expense risk charge. Since Option 5 does not contain an
element of mortality risk, no benefit is derived from this charge.
Please see the Statement of Additional Information for
a more detailed discussion of the annuity income options.
Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT above for annuity income options available under the Living
Benefit.
Fixed or Variable Annuity Income
Payments
You can choose annuity income payments that are fixed, variable or both. Unless otherwise elected,
if at the date when annuity income payments begin you are invested in the Variable
Portfolios only, your annuity income payments will be variable and if your money is only in Fixed Accounts at that time, your annuity income payments will be fixed in amount. Further, if you are invested in
both Fixed Accounts and Variable Portfolios when annuity income payments begin, your
payments will be fixed and variable, unless otherwise elected. If annuity income payments are fixed, the Company guarantees the amount of each payment. If the annuity income payments are variable, the
amount is not guaranteed and may fluctuate as described under ANNUITY
INCOME PAYMENTS below.
Annuity Income Payments
We make annuity income payments on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis as elected by you. You instruct us to send you a check or to have the
payments directly deposited into your bank account. If state law allows, we distribute
annuities with a contract value of $5,000 or less in a lump sum. Also, if state law allows and the selected annuity income option results in annuity income payments of less than $50 per payment, we may
decrease the frequency of payments.
If you are invested in the Variable Portfolios after the Annuity Date, your annuity income payments
vary depending on the following:
•
for life income options, your age when annuity income payments begin; and
•
the contract value attributable to the Variable Portfolios on the Annuity Date; and
•
the 3.5% assumed investment rate used in the annuity table for the contract; and
•
the performance of the Variable Portfolios in which you are invested during the time you receive
annuity income payments.
If you are invested in both the Fixed Accounts and the Variable Portfolios after the Annuity Date, the allocation of funds between the Fixed Accounts and
Variable Portfolios also impacts the amount of your annuity income payments.
50
The value of fixed
annuity income payments, if elected, will not be less than 1%. The value of variable annuity income payments, if elected, is based on an assumed interest rate (“AIR”) of 3.5% compounded
annually. Variable annuity income payments generally increase or decrease from one
annuity income payment date to the next based upon the performance of the applicable
Variable Portfolios. If the performance of the Variable Portfolios selected is equal to
the AIR, the annuity income payments will remain constant. If performance of Variable
Portfolios is greater than the AIR, the annuity income payments will increase and if it is less than the AIR, the annuity income payments will decline.
Deferment of Payments
We may defer making fixed payments for up to six months, or less if required by law. Interest is credited to you during the deferral period. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above for a discussion of when
payments from a Variable Portfolio may be suspended or postponed.
Taxes
The Federal income tax treatment of annuity contracts or retirement plans/programs is complex and
sometimes uncertain. The discussion below is intended for general informational
purposes only and are not intended as tax advice, either general or individualized, nor
should they be interpreted to provide any predictions or guarantees of a particular tax
treatment. Such discussions generally are based upon the Company’s understanding of current tax rules and interpretations, and may include areas of those rules that are more or less clear or certain. This discussion also does not address other Federal tax consequences (including consequences of sales to foreign individuals or entities), state or local tax
consequences, estate or gift tax consequences, or the impact of foreign tax laws, associated with your contract.
Tax laws are subject to legislative modification, and while many such modifications will have only a prospective application, it is important to recognize that
a change could have a retroactive effect as well. As a result, you should always
consult a tax adviser about the application of tax rules found in the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended
(“IRC” or the Code), Treasury Regulations and applicable Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) guidance to
your individual situation. We do not guarantee the tax status or treatment of your annuity.
Section 72 of the Code governs taxation of annuities in general. A natural owner is not taxed on increases in the value of a contract until distribution occurs,
either in the form of a non-annuity distribution (or deemed distribution) or as annuity
income payments under the annuity option elected. For a lump-sum payment received as a total surrender (total redemption), the recipient is taxed on
the portion of the payment that exceeds the cost basis of the contract. For a payment
received as a withdrawal (partial redemption), federal tax liability is determined on a last-in, first-out basis, meaning taxable income is withdrawn before
the cost
basis of the contract is withdrawn. A different rule applies to Purchase Payments made (including, if applicable, in the case of a contract issued in exchange for a prior contract) prior to August 14, 1982. Those Purchase Payments are considered withdrawn first for federal income tax purposes, followed by earnings on those Purchase Payments. For Non-Qualified contracts, the cost
basis is generally the Purchase Payments. The taxable portion of the lump-sum payment
is taxed at ordinary income tax rates. Tax penalties may also
apply.
If you purchase your contract under one of a number of types of employer-sponsored retirement plans,
as an individual retirement annuity, or under an individual retirement account, your
Contract is referred to as a Qualified Contract. Examples of qualified plans or
arrangements are: Individual Retirement Annuities and Individual Retirement Accounts
(IRAs), Roth IRAs, Tax-Sheltered Annuities (also referred to as 403(b) annuities or
403(b) contracts), plans of self-employed individuals (often referred to as H.R. 10
Plans or Keogh Plans), pension and profit sharing plans including 401(k) plans, and
governmental 457(b) plans. Typically, for employer-sponsored retirement plans and
tax-deductible IRA contributions, you have not paid any tax on the Purchase Payments
used to buy your contract and therefore, you have no cost basis in your contract. However, you normally will have a cost basis in a Roth IRA, a designated Roth account in a 403(b), 401(k), or
governmental 457(b) plan, and you may have cost basis in a traditional IRA or in
another Qualified contract.
For annuity income payments, the portion of each payment that
is in excess of the exclusion amount is includible in taxable income. The exclusion amount for payments based on a fixed annuity option is determined by multiplying the payment by the ratio that the cost basis
of the Contract (if any, and adjusted for any period or refund feature) bears to the
expected return under the Contract. The exclusion amount for payments based on a variable annuity option is determined by dividing the cost basis of the Contract (adjusted for any period certain or refund
guarantee) by the number of years over which the annuity is expected to be paid.
Payments received after the investment in the Contract has been recovered (i.e. when the total of the excludable amount equals the investment in the Contract) are fully taxable. The taxable portion is
taxed at ordinary income tax rates. For certain types of qualified plans there may be
no cost basis in the Contract within the meaning of Section 72 of the Code. Owners, annuitants and beneficiaries under the Contracts should consult a tax advisor for advice about the tax consequences of any
distributions.
Annuity Contracts in General
The IRC provides for special rules regarding the tax treatment of annuity contracts.
•
Generally, taxes on the earnings in your annuity contract are deferred until you take the money out.
51
•
Qualified contracts that satisfy specific IRC requirements automatically provide tax deferral
regardless of whether the underlying contract is an annuity, a trust, or a custodial
account.
•
Different rules and tax treatment apply depending on how you take the money out and whether your contract is Qualified or Non-Qualified.
Non-Qualified Contract
If you do not purchase your contract under an employer-sponsored retirement plan/arrangement, or an Individual Retirement Account or Individual
Retirement Annuity (“IRA”), including a Roth IRA, your contract is referred
to as a Non-Qualified contract.
Qualified Contract
If you purchase your contract under an
employer-sponsored retirement plan/arrangement or an Individual Retirement Account or
Individual Retirement Annuity (“IRA”), including Roth IRA, your contract is referred to as a Qualified contract. Taxation of owners in each qualified plan varies with the type of plan and terms and conditions of each specific plan. Owners and
Beneficiaries are cautioned that benefits under a qualified plan may be subject to
limitations under the IRC and the employer-sponsored plan, in addition to the terms and
conditions of the contracts issued pursuant to the plan.
Employer-sponsored plans/arrangements
include:
•
Tax-Sheltered Annuities (also referred to as 403(b) annuities)
•
Plans of self-employed individuals (often referred to as H.R. 10 Plans or Keogh Plans)
•
Pension and profit sharing plans including 401(k) plans, and governmental 457(b) plans
If you are
purchasing the contract as an investment vehicle for a trust under a Qualified contract, you should consider that the contract does not provide any additional tax-deferral benefits beyond the treatment
provided by the trust itself.
In addition, if the contract itself is a qualifying arrangement (as with a 403(b) annuity or IRA), the contract generally does not provide tax deferral benefits
beyond the treatment provided to alternative qualifying arrangements such as trusts or
custodial accounts. However, in both cases the contract offers features and benefits that other investments may not offer. You and your financial representative should carefully consider whether the features and benefits,
including the investment options, lifetime annuity income options, and protection through Living Benefits, death benefits and other benefits provided under an annuity
contract issued in connection with a Qualified contract are suitable for your needs and objectives and are appropriate in light of the expense.
On December 20, 2019, the Setting Every Community Up
for Retirement Enhancement (“SECURE”) Act was signed into law as part of
larger appropriations legislation. Additionally, The SECURE 2.0 Act OF 2022 (“SECURE
2.0”) was
passed on December 29, 2022. SECURE and SECURE 2.0 include many provisions affecting Qualified Contracts including:
•
an increase in the age at which required minimum distributions (RMDs) generally must commence. The updated RMD ages are:
○
Age 75, if you were born on or after January 1, 1960.
○
Age 73 if you were born on or after January 1, 1951, and before January 1, 1960.
○
Age 72 if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951.
○
Age 70 ½ if you were born before July 1, 1949.
•
new limitations on the period for beneficiary distributions following the death of the plan participant or IRA owner (when the death occurs
on or after January 1, 2020;
•
elimination of the age 70 ½ restriction on traditional IRA contributions for tax years beginning 2020 (combined with an offset to the amount of eligible qualified charitable distributions
(QCDs) by the amount of post-70 ½ IRA contributions);
•
new exceptions to the 10% additional tax on early distributions, for the qualified birth or adoption of a child, which also became an allowable plan
distribution event for terminal illnesses, and for eligible distributions for domestic
abuse victims;
•
expansion of distribution and loan (including loan repayment) rules for qualified disaster recovery distributions from certain employer-sponsored
retirement plans and IRAs; and
•
reduction of the earliest permissible age for in-service distributions from pension plans and
certain Section 457 plans to 59 ½.
The
foregoing is not an exhaustive list. The SECURE Act and SECURE 2.0 included many additional provisions affecting Qualified Contracts. Additionally, SECURE 2.0 introduced numerous provisions into law that
take effect after 2023.
Some provisions in the Act are subject to the terms of an employer’s retirement plan and IRA
and may not be available with your annuity. You should consult with your financial
professional or personal tax advisor if you are impacted by these changes.
Tax Treatment of Purchase Payments
Non-Qualified Contract
In general, your cost basis in a Non-Qualified contract is equal to the Purchase Payments you put into the contract. You have already been taxed on the
Purchase Payments you contributed in your Non-Qualified contract.
52
Qualified
Contract
Typically, for employer sponsored plans/arrangements and tax-deductible IRA contributions, you have
not paid any tax on the Purchase Payments contributed to your contract and therefore,
you have no cost basis in your contract. However, you normally will have cost basis in a Roth IRA, a designated Roth account in a 403(b), 401(k), or governmental 457(b) plan, and you may have cost
basis in a traditional IRA or in another Qualified contract.
The following are general summary descriptions
of the types of qualified plans with which the contracts may be used. Such descriptions
are not exhaustive and are for general information purposes only. The tax rules regarding qualified plans are very complex and will have differing applications depending on individual facts and
circumstances. Each purchaser should obtain competent tax advice prior to purchasing a
contract issued under a qualified plan. Contracts issued pursuant to qualified plans include special provisions restricting contract provisions that may otherwise be available and described in this
prospectus. Generally, contracts issued pursuant to qualified plans are not
transferable except upon surrender or annuitization. Various penalty and excise taxes
may apply to contributions or distributions made in violation of applicable limitations.
Furthermore, certain contractual withdrawal penalties and restrictions may apply to
surrender from Qualified contracts. You should consult a qualified tax advisor associated with any questions related to the contribution to or distribution or transfer from a qualified plan or
IRA, or Roth IRA.
Note that the Company no longer issues new qualified contracts
other than IRAs or ROTH IRAs.
Qualified Contract - Plans of
Self-Employed Individuals: “H.R. 10 Plans”
Section 401 of the Code permits self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans for
themselves and their employees, commonly referred to as “H.R. 10” or “Keogh” Plans. Contributions made to the plan for the benefit of the employees will not be included in the gross
income of the employees, for federal tax purposes, until distributed from the plan if
certain conditions are met. The tax consequences to owners may vary depending upon the particular plan design. However, the Code places limitations and restrictions on these plans, such as: amounts of
allowable contributions; form, manner and timing of distributions; vesting and
non-forfeitability of interests; nondiscrimination in eligibility and participation;
and the tax treatment of distributions, withdrawals and surrenders. Purchasers of contracts for use with an H.R. 10 Plan should obtain competent tax advice as to the tax treatment and suitability of
such an investment.
Qualified Contract—Tax-Sheltered Annuity (403(b))
Section 403(b) of the Code permits the purchase of “tax-sheltered annuities” by public
schools and not-for-profit organizations described in Section 501(c)(3) of the Code.
These qualifying employers may make contributions to the contracts for the benefit of
their employees. Such contributions are not includible in the gross income of the
employee until the employee receives distributions from the
contract if
certain conditions are met. The amount of contributions to the tax-sheltered annuity is limited to certain maximums imposed by the Code, adjusted annually. One of these limits, on the amount that the
employee may contribute on a voluntary basis, is imposed by the annuity contract as
well as by the Code. Furthermore, the Code sets forth additional restrictions governing such items as transferability, distributions, nondiscrimination and withdrawals. Any employee should obtain
competent tax advice as to the tax treatment and suitability of such an
Investment.
On July 26, 2007, the Treasury Department published comprehensive 403(b) regulations that were largely effective on January 1, 2009. Included in the requirements under the regulations was a requirement that employers maintain their 403(b) plans pursuant to a written plan. Effective January 1, 2009 the Company no longer accepts new Purchase Payments (including contributions, transfers and exchanges) into new or existing 403(b) annuities. You may wish to discuss the regulations and/or the general information
above with your tax adviser.
Qualified Contract—Individual Retirement Annuities (IRA) or Roth IRA
The IRA Disclosure Statement, ROTH IRA Disclosure Statement, or Traditional, SEP, and Roth Individual Retirement Annuity (IRA) Combined Disclosure
Statement which was received at the time of original issue of your IRA or Roth IRA
contains information about eligibility, contribution limits, distribution restrictions and other tax information.
Individual Retirement Annuities
Section 408(b) of the Code permits eligible individuals to contribute to an individual retirement
program known as a traditional “Individual Retirement Annuity” (“IRA”). Under applicable limitations, certain amounts (adjusted annually) may be contributed to an IRA which will
be deductible from the individual’s gross income. The ability to deduct an IRA
contribution to a traditional IRA is subject to limits based upon income levels,
retirement plan participation status, and other factors. IRAs are subject to limitations on eligibility, contributions, transferability and distributions. Purchasers of contracts to be qualified as IRAs
should obtain competent tax advice as to the tax treatment and suitability of such an
investment.
Roth IRAs
Section 408A of the Code permits an individual to contribute to an individual retirement program
called a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible but distributions are
tax-free if certain requirements are satisfied. Unlike traditional IRAs, to which everyone can contribute even if they cannot deduct the full contribution, Roth IRAs have income limitations on
who can establish such a contract. All persons may be eligible to convert a
distribution from an employer-sponsored plan or from a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA.
Conversions or rollovers
53
from
qualified plans into Roth IRAs normally require taxes to be paid on any previously untaxed amounts included in the amount converted.
Qualified Contract—Pension and
Profit Sharing Plans
Section 401(a) of the Code permits certain employers to establish various types of retirement plans,
including 401(k) plans, for employees. However, governmental employers may not
establish new 401(k) plans. These retirement plans may permit the purchase of the contracts to provide benefits under the plan. Contributions to the plan for the benefit of employees will not be includible in the
gross income of the employee until distributed from the plan if certain conditions are
met. The tax consequences to owners may vary depending upon the particular plan design. However, the Code places limitations on all plans on such items as amount of allowable contributions; form,
manner and timing of distributions; investing and non-forfeitability of interests;
nondiscrimination in eligibility and participation; and the tax treatment of
distributions, withdrawals and surrenders. Purchasers of contracts for use with pension or profit sharing plans should obtain competent tax advice as to the tax treatment and suitability of such an
investment.
Qualified Contract— Deferred Compensation Plans — Section 457(b)
Under Section 457(b) of the Code, governmental and certain other tax-exempt employers may establish, for the benefit of their employees, deferred
compensation plans, which may invest in annuity contracts. The Code, as in the case of
employer sponsored retirement plans generally establishes limitations and restrictions on eligibility, contributions and distributions. Under these plans, contributions made for the benefit of the
employees will not be includible in the employees’ gross income until distributed
from, or in some cases made available under the plan.
Funds in a non-governmental 457(b) plan remain assets of the employer and are subject to claims by the creditors of the employer. All 457(b) plans of state
and local governments must hold assets and income in a qualifying trust, custodial
account, or annuity contract for the exclusive benefit of participants and their Beneficiaries.
Tax Treatment of Distributions
Distributions from Non-Qualified Contracts
Federal tax rules generally require that all Non-Qualified
contracts issued by the same company to the same policyholder during the same calendar
year will be treated as one annuity contract for purposes of determining the taxable
amount upon distribution. Such treatment may result in adverse tax consequences
including more rapid taxation of the distributed amounts from such combination of
contracts. For purposes of this rule, contracts received in a Section 1035 exchange
will be considered issued in the year of the exchange. (However, the contracts may be treated as issued on the issue date of the contract being exchanged, for certain purposes, including for determining whether the contract is an immediate
annuity contract.) Owners should consult a tax adviser prior to purchasing
more than
one Non-Qualified annuity contract from the same issuer in any calendar year.
The taxable portion of any withdrawals, whether annuity income payment or other withdrawal,
generally is subject to applicable state and/or local income taxes, and may be subject
to an additional 10% penalty tax unless withdrawn in conjunction with the following circumstances:
•
after attaining age 59½;
•
when paid to your Beneficiary after you die;
•
after you become disabled (as defined in the IRC);
•
when paid as a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for your life (or life expectancy)
or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated Beneficiary
for a period of 5 years or attainment of age 59½, whichever is later;
•
under an immediate annuity contract;
•
when attributable to Purchase Payments made prior to August 14, 1982.
Partial or Total Withdrawals
If you make partial or total withdrawals from a Non-Qualified contract, the IRC generally treats such withdrawals as coming first from taxable
earnings and then coming from your Purchase Payments. Purchase Payments made prior to August 14, 1982, however, are an important exception to this general rule, and for tax
purposes generally are treated as being distributed first, before either the earnings
on those contributions, or other Purchase Payments and earnings in the contract.
Annuitization
If you annuitize your contract, a portion of each annuity income payment will be considered, for tax purposes, to be a return of a portion of your Purchase
Payment, generally until you have received all of your Purchase Payment. The portion of
each annuity income payment that is considered a return of your Purchase Payment will not be taxed.
Annuity to Annuity Transfer
A transfer of contract value to another annuity contract generally will be tax reported as a distribution unless we have sufficient information, on a form
satisfying us, to confirm that the transfer qualifies as an exchange under IRC Section
1035 (a “1035 exchange”). Partial exchanges may be treated in a similar
manner as 1035 exchanges of the entire contract. Revenue Procedure 2011-38 provides
that on or after October 24, 2011 a direct transfer of a portion of the cash surrender value of an existing annuity contract for a second annuity contract,
regardless of whether the two annuity contracts are issued by the same or different
companies, will be treated as a tax-free exchange under Code section 1035 if no amounts, other than amounts received an annuity for a period of 10 years or more or during one or more lives, are received under the original contract or the new contract during the
180 days beginning on the date of the transfer (in the case of a new contract, on the
date the contract is placed in-force). Owners should
54
seek their
own tax advice regarding such transactions and the tax risks associated with subsequent surrenders or withdrawals.
Additional Tax on Net Investment
Income
Information in this section generally does not apply to Qualified contracts, however taxable
distributions from such contracts may be taken into account in determining the
applicability of the Modified Adjusted Gross Income (“MAGI”)
threshold.
Under Federal Tax law, there is a tax on net investment income, at the rate of 3.8% of applicable
thresholds for MAGI based on type of filer. Further information may be found on www.irs.gov. An individual with MAGI in excess of the threshold will be required to pay this 3.8% tax on net investment income in excess of the
applicable MAGI threshold. For this purpose, net investment income generally will
include taxable withdrawals from a Non-Qualified contract, as well as other taxable amounts including amounts taxed annually to an Owner that is not a natural person (see Contracts Owned by a Trust or Corporation
below).
Distributions from Qualified Contracts
Generally, you have not paid any taxes on the Purchase Payments used to buy a Qualified contract. As a result, most amounts withdrawn from the contract or
received as annuity income payments will be taxable income. Exceptions to this general
rule include withdrawals attributable to after-tax amounts permitted under the employer’s plan or contributed to a Roth IRA or non-deductible traditional IRA. Please consult your tax or legal advisors with regard to any tax reporting associated with a
distribution from a traditional IRA that contains cost basis.
Withdrawals from other Qualified contracts are
often limited by the IRC and by the employer-sponsored plan/arrangement.
The taxable portion of any withdrawal or annuity
income payment from a Qualified contract (except for Tax-Sheltered Annuities) will be
subject to an additional 10% penalty tax, under the IRC, except in the following
circumstances:
•
after attainment of age 59½;
•
when paid to your Beneficiary after you die;
•
after you become disabled (as defined in the IRC);
•
after you become terminally ill;
•
as a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for your life (or life expectancy) or the joint
lives (or joint expectancies) of you and your designated Beneficiary for a period of 5
years or attainment of age 59½, whichever is later;
•
dividends paid with respect to stock of a corporation described in IRC Section 404(k);
•
payments up to the amount of your deductible medical expenses (without regard to whether you itemize deductions for the taxable year);
•
for payment of health insurance if you are unemployed and meet certain requirements;
•
distributions from IRAs for qualifying higher education expenses or first home purchases, with certain limitations;
•
payments to certain individuals called up for active duty after September 11, 2001;
•
payments up to $3,000 per year for health, life and accident insurance by certain retired public
safety officers, which are federal income tax-free;
•
distributions for parents after the “qualified birth or adoption” of a new child
(subject to limitations);
•
certain amounts to a domestic abuse victim;
•
certain amounts for emergency personal expenses;
•
withdrawals of net income on excess IRA contributions returned by the due date of your tax return.
Non-IRA contracts:
•
amounts distributed from a Code Section 457(b) plan other than to the extent such amounts in a
governmental Code Section 457(b) plan represent rollovers from an IRA or
employer-sponsored plan to which the 10% penalty would otherwise apply and which are
treated as distributed from a Qualified plan for purposes of the premature distribution
penalty;
•
payments to employees after separation from service after attainment of age 55 (does not apply to IRAs);
•
payments from a tax-qualified plan or section 403(b) plan made after you separate from service if you provided firefighting services and you
(1) will be at least age 50 in the year of the separation or (2) have at least 25 years
of service under the Plan (does not apply to IRAs); and
•
transfers to alternate payees pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order (does not apply to
IRAs).
Annuitization
Unlike a Non-Qualified contract, if you annuitize your Qualified annuity contract the entire annuity
income payment will be considered income, for tax purposes.
Direct and Indirect
Rollovers
Under certain circumstances, you may be able to transfer amounts distributed from your employer
sponsored plan/arrangement to another eligible plan or IRA. Generally, a distribution
may be eligible for rollover but certain types of distributions cannot be rolled over, such as distributions received on account of:
(a)
a required minimum distribution,
(b)
a hardship withdrawal, or
55
(c)
a series of substantially equal payments (at least annually) made over your life expectancy or the joint life expectancies of you and your designated
Beneficiary or a distribution made for a specified period of 10 years or more.
The IRS issued Announcement 2014-32 confirming its intent to
apply the one-rollover-per-year limitation of 408(d)(3)(B) on an aggregate basis to all IRAs that an individual owns. This means that an individual cannot make a tax-free IRA-to-IRA rollover if he or
she has made such a rollover involving any of the individual’s IRAs in the current
tax year. If an intended rollover does not qualify for tax-free rollover treatment,
contributions to your IRA may constitute excess contributions that may exceed contribution limits. This one-rollover-per-year limitation does not apply to direct trustee-to-trustee transfers. You
should always consult your tax adviser before you move or attempt to move any funds.
The IRC limits the withdrawal of an employee’s elective deferral Purchase Payments from a Tax-Sheltered Annuity (TSA) contract under IRC 403(b) and certain other Qualified Contracts. Generally, withdrawals can only be made when an Owner:
•
reaches age 59½;
•
severs employment with the employer;
•
dies;
•
birth or adoption of child (subject to limitations);
•
becomes disabled (as defined in the IRC); or
•
experiences a financial hardship (as defined in the IRC).*
*
In the case of hardship, the Owner can only withdraw Purchase Payments.
Additional plan limitations may also apply.Amounts held in a TSA contract as of December 31, 1988 are not subject to these restrictions except as otherwise imposed by the plan.
There are certain exceptions to these restrictions which are generally based upon the type of investment arrangement, the type of contributions, and the date the
contributions were made. Transfers of amounts from one Qualified contract to another investment option under the same plan, or to another contract or account of the same plan type or from a qualified plan to a state defined benefit plan to purchase service credits are not considered distributions, and thus are not subject to these withdrawal limitations. Such transfers may,
however, be subject to limitations under the annuity contract or plan.
Transfers among 403(b) annuities and/or 403(b)(7) custodial accounts generally are subject to rules set out in the plan, the IRC, treasury
regulations, IRS pronouncements, and other applicable legal authorities.
Required Minimum Distributions
Information in this section generally does not apply to Non-Qualified contracts.
Failure to satisfy the minimum distribution requirements may result in a tax penalty. You should
consult your tax adviser for more information.
Commencement Date
Generally, the IRC requires that you begin taking annual distributions from Qualified annuity
contracts by April 1 of the calendar year following the later of (1) the calendar year
in which you attain age:
•
Age 75 if you were born January 1, 1960 or later.
•
Age 73 if you were born on or after January 1, 1951, and before January 1, 1960.
•
Age 72 if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951.
•
Age 70 ½ if you were born before July 1, 1949.
or (2) the calendar year in which you sever employment from the
employer sponsoring the plan. If you own a traditional IRA, you must begin receiving minimum distributions by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you reach
age:
•
Age 75 if you were born January 1, 1960 or later.
•
Age 73 if you were born on or after January 1, 1951, and before January 1, 1960.
•
Age 72 if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951.
•
Age 70 ½ if you were born before July 1, 1949.
If you choose to delay your first distribution until the year
after the year in which you reach the applicable RMD age or sever employment, as
applicable, then you will be required to withdraw your second required minimum
distribution on or before December 31 in that same year. For each year thereafter, you
must withdraw your required minimum distribution by December 31.
Combining Distributions from Multiple
Contracts
If you own more than one IRA, you may be permitted to take your annual distributions in any
combination from your IRAs. A similar rule applies if you own more than one TSA.
However, you cannot satisfy this distribution requirement for your IRA contract by
taking a distribution from a TSA, and you cannot satisfy the requirement for your TSA by taking a distribution from an IRA.
Automatic Withdrawal Option
You may elect to have the required minimum distribution amount on your contract calculated and
withdrawn each year under the automatic withdrawal option. You may select monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, or annual withdrawals for this purpose. This service is provided as a courtesy and we do not guarantee the accuracy of our calculations. Accordingly, we recommend you consult your tax
adviser concerning your required minimum distribution.
Impact of Optional Benefits
IRS regulations require that the annuity contract value used to determine required minimum
distributions include the actuarial present value of other benefits under the contract,
such as enhanced death benefits and/or Living Benefits. As a result, if you request a minimum distribution calculation, or if one is otherwise required to be provided, in those specific circumstances where this
requirement applies, the
56
calculation may be
based upon a value that is greater than your contract value, resulting in a larger required minimum distribution. This regulation does not apply to required minimum distributions made under an
irrevocable annuity income option. You should discuss the effect of these regulations
with your tax adviser.
Tax
Treatment of Death Benefits
The taxable amount of any death benefits paid under the
contract are taxable to the Beneficiary. The rules governing the taxation of payments
from an annuity contract, as discussed above, generally apply whether the death benefit
is paid as lump sum or annuity income payments. Estate taxes may also apply.
Enhanced death benefits are used as investment protection and are not expected to give rise to any
adverse tax effects. However, the IRS could take the position that some or all of the
charges for these death benefits should be treated as a partial withdrawal from the contract. In that case, the amount of the partial withdrawal may be includible in taxable income and subject to the 10% penalty
if the Owner is under 59½, unless another exception applies. You should consult
your tax adviser for more information.
If you own a Qualified contract and purchase an enhanced death
benefit, the IRS may consider these benefits “incidental death benefits” or “life insurance.” The IRC imposes limits on the amount of the incidental benefits and/or life insurance allowable for
Qualified contracts and the employer-sponsored plans under which they are purchased. If
the death benefit(s) selected by you are considered to exceed these limits, the benefit(s) could result in taxable income to the Owner of the Qualified contract, and in some cases could adversely impact
the qualified status of the Qualified contract or the plan. You should consult your tax
adviser regarding these features and benefits prior to purchasing a contract.
Tax Treatment of Optional Living
Benefits
Generally, we will treat amounts credited to the contract value under the optional Living Benefit
guarantees, for income tax purposes, as earnings in the contract. Thus, payments of
Living Benefits are treated as taxable withdrawals to the extent there are taxable gains in the contract value. Payments in accordance with such guarantees after the contract value has been
reduced to zero may be treated for tax purposes as amounts received as an annuity, if
the other requirements for such treatment are satisfied. All payments or withdrawals after cost basis has been reduced to zero, whether or not under such a guarantee, will be treated as taxable amounts. If
available and you elect an optional Living Benefit, the application of certain tax
rules, including those rules relating to distributions from your contract, are not entirely clear. Such benefits are not intended to adversely affect the tax treatment of distributions or of the contract.
However, you should be aware that little guidance is available. You should consult a
tax adviser before electing an optional Living Benefit.
Contracts Owned by a Trust or
Corporation
A Trust or Corporation or other Owner that is not a natural person (“Non-Natural Owner”) that is considering purchasing this contract should consult
a tax adviser.
Generally, the IRC does not confer tax-deferred status upon a Non-Qualified contract owned by a
Non-Natural Owner for federal income tax purposes. Instead in such cases, the
Non-Natural Owner pays tax each year on the contract’s value in excess of the
Owner’s cost basis, and the contract’s cost basis is then increased by a like amount. However, this treatment is not applied to a contract held by a trust or other entity as an agent for a natural
person nor to contracts held by Qualified Plans.
Withholding
Taxable amounts distributed from annuity contracts are subject to federal and state income tax
reporting and withholding. In general, we will withhold federal income tax from the
taxable portion of such distribution based on the type of distribution and, in certain cases, the amount of your distribution. An election out of withholding must be made in accordance with the IRS guidance as
directed on forms that we provide. If an election out of withholding or election of
another amount is not made, withholding is imposed (1) for periodic payments, at the rate that would be imposed if the payments were wages, and the payee was
single with no adjustments, or (2) for other distributions, at the rate of 10%. If you are a U.S. person (which includes a resident alien), and your address of record is a non-U.S. address, we are required to withhold income tax
unless payments are directed to your U.S. residential address.
State income tax withholding rules vary and we
will withhold based on the rules of your state of residence.
Special tax rules apply to withholding for nonresident
aliens, and we generally withhold income tax for nonresident aliens at a 30% rate. A
different withholding rate may be applicable to a nonresident alien based on the terms of an existing income tax treaty between the United States and the nonresident alien’s country. You
should consult your tax adviser as to the availability of an exemption from, or
reduction of, such tax under an applicable income tax treaty, if any.
Any income tax withheld is a credit against your income tax liability. Regardless of the amount
withheld by us, you are liable for payment of federal and state income tax on the
taxable portion of annuity distributions. You should consult with your tax adviser
regarding the payment of the correct amount of these income taxes and potential liability if you fail to pay such taxes.
20% Withholding on Eligible Rollover Distributions
For certain qualified employer sponsored plans, we are required to withhold 20% of the taxable
portion of your withdrawal that constitutes an “eligible rollover distribution” for Federal income taxes. An “eligible rollover distribution” is the taxable portion of any amount received by a covered
57
employee
from a retirement plan qualified under Sections 401 or 403 or, if from a plan of a governmental employer, under Section 457(b) of the Code, or from a tax-sheltered annuity qualified under Section 403(b) of the Code. This requirement
is mandatory and cannot be waived by the owner.
You may avoid withholding if you directly transfer a withdrawal from this Contract to another qualified plan or IRA. Similarly, you may be able to avoid
withholding on a transfer into the Contract from an existing qualified plan you may
have with another provider by arranging to have the transfer made directly to us.
Contract Owners should consult a tax advisor for any questions.
Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act
(“FATCA”)
A Contract Owner who is not a “United States person”
which is defined to mean:
•
a citizen or resident of the United States
•
a partnership or corporation created or organized in the United States or under the law of the United States or of any state, or the District of
Columbia
•
any estate or trust other than a foreign estate or foreign trust (see Internal Revenue Code section 7701(a)(31) for the definition of a foreign estate
and a foreign trust)
should be
aware that FATCA provides that a 30% withholding tax will be imposed on certain gross payments (which could include distributions from cash value life insurance or annuity products) made to a
foreign entity if such entity fails to provide applicable certifications under a Form
W-9, Form W-8 BEN-E, Form W-8IMY, or other applicable form. Certain withholding certifications will remain effective until a change in circumstances makes any information on the form incorrect.
Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, any Form W-8 (including the Form W-8 BEN-E and
Form W-8IMY), is only effective for three years from date of signature unless a change in circumstances makes any information on the form incorrect. An entity, for this purpose, will be considered a
foreign entity unless it provides an applicable withholding certification to the
contrary. The Contract Owner must inform the Company within 30 days of any change in
circumstances that makes any information on the form incorrect by furnishing a new IRS
Form W-9, Form W-8 BEN-E, Form W-8IMY, or other applicable form. Contract Owners should
consult a tax advisor as to the availability of any exemption under an applicable
income tax treaty, if any.
Gifts, Pledges and/or Assignments of a
Contract
Non-Qualified Contracts
If you transfer ownership of your Non-Qualified contract to a person other than your spouse (or
former spouse incident to divorce) as a gift you will pay federal income tax on the
contract’s cash value to the extent it exceeds your cost basis. The
recipient’s cost basis will be increased by the amount on which you will pay federal taxes. In addition, the
IRC treats
any assignment or pledge (or agreement to assign or pledge) of any portion of a Non-Qualified contract as a withdrawal.
Qualified Contracts
The IRC prohibits Qualified annuity contracts including IRAs from being transferred, assigned or
pledged as security for a loan.
This prohibition, however, generally does not apply to loans under an employer-sponsored plan (including loans from the annuity contract) that satisfy certain
requirements, provided that:
•
the plan is not an unfunded deferred compensation plan; and
•
the plan funding vehicle is not an IRA.
Another
exception to this rule includes an assignment pursuant to a domestic relations order meeting the requirements of the plan or arrangement under which the contract is issued (for many plans, a
Qualified Domestic Relations Order, or QDRO), or, in the case of an IRA, pursuant to a
decree of divorce or separation maintenance or a written instrument incident to such decree. You should consult a tax advisor as to the availability of these
exceptions.
Diversification and Investor Control
Diversification
For a contract to be treated as a variable annuity for Federal income tax purposes, the underlying
investments under the variable annuity must be “adequately diversified”.
Treasury Regulations provide standards that must be met to comply with the rules.
Under the regulations an investment portfolio will be deemed adequately diversified if
(1) no more than 55% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any one investment; (2) no more than
70% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any two investments; (3) no more than 80% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any three investments; and (4) no more than 90% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any four investments. For purposes of
determining whether or not the diversification standards imposed on the underlying
assets of variable contracts by Section 817(h) of the Code have been met, “each United States government agency or instrumentality shall be treated as a separate issuer.” If the variable annuity fails to comply with these diversification standards, you could be required
to pay tax currently on the excess of the Contract Value over the contract Purchase
Payments. We expect that the manager of the Underlying Funds monitors the Funds so as to comply with these Treasury Regulations.
These requirements generally do not apply to Qualified contracts, which are considered “Pension Plan Contracts” for purposes of these Code
requirements.
58
Investor Control
These investor control limitations generally do not apply to Qualified contracts, which are referred
to as “Pension Plan Contracts” for purposes of this rule, although the limitations could be applied to Qualified contracts in the future.
Under certain circumstances, you, and not the Company, could be treated as the owner of the Underlying Funds under your Non-Qualified contract, based on
the degree of control you exercise over the underlying investments. If this occurs, you
may be currently taxed on income and gains attributable to the assets under the contract.
There is little guidance in this area, and the determination of whether you possess sufficient
incidents of ownership over Variable Portfolio assets to be deemed the owner of the
Underlying Funds depends on all of the relevant facts and circumstances. However, IRS
Revenue Ruling 2003-91 provides that an annuity owner’s ability to choose among
general investment strategies either at the time of the initial purchase or thereafter,
does not constitute control sufficient to cause the contract holder to be treated as the owner of the Variable Portfolios. The Revenue Ruling provides that if, based on all the facts and
circumstances, you do not have direct or indirect control over the Separate Account or any Variable Portfolio asset, then you do not possess sufficient incidents of ownership over the assets
supporting the annuity to be deemed the owner of the assets for federal income tax
purposes. We do not know what limits may be set by the IRS in any future guidance that it may issue and whether such limits will apply to existing contracts.
While we believe the contract does not give you investment control over the Underlying Funds, we reserve the right to modify the contract as necessary in an
attempt to prevent you from being considered as the owner of the assets of the contract
for purposes of the Code.
Our Taxes
The Company is taxed as a life insurance company under the Code. For federal income tax purposes, the Separate Account is not a separate entity from the Company and
its operations form a part of the Company. We are entitled to certain tax benefits related to the investment of company assets, including assets of the Separate
Account, which may include the foreign tax credit and the corporate dividends received
deduction. These potential benefits are not passed back to you, since we are the owner of the assets from which tax benefits may be derived.
Other Information
The Distributor
Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302, distributes the contracts. Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., an affiliate under common control with the Company, is a
registered broker dealer under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended,
and is a member of
the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”). No underwriting fees are retained by Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. in connection with the distribution of the contracts.
The Company
The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York
The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York (“US Life”) is a stock
life insurance company organized under the laws of the state of New York. Its home
office is 28 Liberty Street, Floor 45th, New York, NY
10005-1400. US Life conducts life insurance and annuity business primarily in the state
of New York.
US Life is obligated to pay all amounts promised to investors under a contract issued by US
Life.
Operation of the Company
The operations of the Company are influenced by many factors, including general economic conditions,
monetary and fiscal policies of the federal government, and policies of state and other
regulatory authorities. The level of sales of the Company’s financial and insurance products is influenced by many factors, including general market rates of interest, the strength, weakness and volatility
of equity markets, terms and conditions of competing financial and insurance products
and the relative value of such brands.
The Company is exposed to market risk, interest rate risk,
contract Owner behavior risk and mortality/longevity risk. Market volatility may result
in increased risks related to guaranteed death and Living Benefits on the Company’s financial and insurance products, as well as reduced fee income in the case of assets held in separate accounts, where applicable. These guaranteed benefits
are sensitive to equity market and other conditions. The Company primarily uses capital
market hedging strategies to help cover the risk of paying guaranteed Living
Benefits in excess of account values as a result of significant downturns in equity
markets or as a result of other factors. The Company has treaties to reinsure a portion
of the guaranteed minimum income benefits and guaranteed death benefits for equity and
mortality risk on some of its older contracts. Such risk mitigation may or may not
reduce the volatility of net income and capital and surplus resulting from equity market
volatility.
The Company is regulated for the benefit of contract Owners by the insurance regulator in its state of domicile; and also by all state insurance
departments where it is licensed to conduct business. The Company is required by its
regulators to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet its contractual
obligations to contract Owners. Insurance regulations also require the Company to maintain additional surplus to protect against a financial impairment the amount of which is based on the
risks inherent in the Company’s operations.
59
The Separate Account
FS Variable Separate Account is a separate account of US Life under New York law.
The Separate Account is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.
Purchase Payments you make that are allocated to the Variable Portfolios are invested in the
Separate Account. The Company owns the assets in the Separate Account and invests them
on your behalf, according to your instructions. Purchase Payments invested in the Separate Account are not guaranteed and will fluctuate with the value of the Variable Portfolios you select. Therefore,
you assume all of the investment risk for contract value allocated to the Variable
Portfolios. These assets are kept separate from our General Account and may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business we may conduct. Additionally, income gains and losses (realized and
unrealized) resulting from assets in the Separate Account are credited to or charged
against the Separate Account without regard to other income gains or losses of the
Company.
You benefit from dividends received by the Separate Account through an increase in your unit value. The Company expects to benefit from these dividends
through tax credits and corporate dividends received deductions; however, these
corporate deductions are not passed back to the Separate Account or to contract Owners.
The General Account
Obligations that are paid out of the Company’s general account (“General Account”)
include any amounts you have allocated to available Fixed Accounts and the Secure Value
Account, including any interest credited thereon, and amounts owed under your contract
for death and/or Living Benefits which are in excess of portions of contract value
allocated to the Variable Portfolios. The obligations and guarantees under the contract
are the sole responsibility of the Company. Therefore, payments of these obligations are
subject to our financial strength and claims paying ability, and our long term ability
to make such payments.
The General Account assets are invested in accordance with applicable state regulation. These assets
are exposed to the typical risks normally associated with a portfolio of fixed income
securities, namely interest rate, option, liquidity and credit risk. The Company manages its exposure to these risks by, among other things, closely monitoring and matching the duration and cash flows of its
assets and liabilities, monitoring or limiting prepayment and extension risk in its
portfolio, maintaining a large percentage of its portfolio in highly liquid securities and engaging in a disciplined process of underwriting, reviewing and monitoring credit risk. With respect to the
Living Benefits available in your contract, we also manage interest rate and certain
market risk through a hedging strategy in the portfolio and we may require that those who elect a Living
Benefit allocate
their Purchase Payments in accordance with specified investment parameters.
Financial Statements
The financial statements described below are important for you to consider. Information about how to
obtain these financial statements is also provided below.
The Company and the Separate Account
The financial statements of the Company and the Separate Account are required to be provided because
you must look to those entities directly to satisfy our obligations to you under the
Contract.
Instructions to Obtain Financial
Statements
The financial statements of the Company and Separate Account are included in the Statement of Additional Information and available on the Company’s website at
www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses and on SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. You may also request a free copy of the Statement of Additional Information by following the instructions on the back page or by contacting our Annuity Service Center at:
Mailing Address:
Annuity Service Center
P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570
Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862
Annuity Service Center
P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570
Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862
We encourage both existing and prospective contract Owners to read and understand the financial statements.
Administration
We are responsible for the administrative servicing of your contract. Please contact our Annuity Service Center at (800) 445-7862, if you have any comments,
questions or service requests.
We send out transaction confirmations and quarterly statements. During the Accumulation Phase, you will receive confirmation of transactions for your
contract. Transactions made pursuant to contractual or systematic agreements, such as
dollar cost averaging, if available, may be confirmed quarterly. Purchase Payments received through the automatic payment plan may also be confirmed quarterly. For all other transactions, we send
confirmations. It is your responsibility to review these documents carefully and notify
our Annuity Service Center of any inaccuracies immediately. We investigate all
inquiries. Depending on the facts and circumstances, we may retroactively adjust your contract, provided you notify us of your concern within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or
quarterly statement. Any other adjustments we deem warranted are made as of the time we
receive notice of the error.
Legal Proceedings
There are no pending legal proceedings affecting the Separate Account. Various federal, state or other regulatory agencies may from time to time review,
examine or inquire into the operations, practices and procedures of the Company, such
as through financial examinations,
60
subpoenas,
investigations, market conduct exams or other regulatory inquiries. Based on the current status of pending regulatory examinations, investigations and inquiries involving the Company, the Company believes
that none of these matters will have a material adverse effect on the ability of the
principal underwriter to perform its contract with the Registrant or of the depositor to meet its obligations under the variable annuity contracts.
Various lawsuits against the Company have arisen in the ordinary course of business. As of the date of this prospectus, the Company believes that none of
these matters will have a material adverse effect on the ability of the principal
underwriter to perform its contract with the Registrant or of the depositor to meet its obligations under the variable annuity contracts.
Registration Statements
Registration statements under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, related to the contracts offered by this prospectus are on file with the SEC. This
prospectus does not contain all of the information contained in the registration
statements and exhibits. For further information regarding the Separate Account, the
Company and its General Account, the Variable Portfolios and the contract, please refer
to the registration statements and exhibits.
61
Appendix A – Underlying Funds Available Under the Contract
The following is a list of Underlying Funds available under the contract.
More information about the Underlying Funds is available in the prospectuses for the Underlying Funds, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at
www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses. You can also request this information
at no cost by calling (855) 421-2692. Depending on the optional benefits you choose,
you may not be able to invest in certain Underlying Funds. See “Investment Requirements For Optional Living Benefits” in this appendix.
The current expenses and performance information below reflect fees and expenses of the Underlying Funds, but do not reflect the other fees and expenses that your contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these other charges were included. Each Underlying Fund’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance.
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2024) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Asset
Allocation |
American Funds Asset Allocation Fund – Class 21
Capital
Research and Management Company |
0.54% |
16.44% |
8.32% |
8.32% |
| |
American Funds Asset Allocation Fund – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
0.79% |
16.11% |
8.04% |
8.05% |
| |
American Funds Capital Income Builder – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
0.78%* |
9.93% |
5.75% |
5.17% |
| |
Franklin Allocation VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
0.82%* |
9.15% |
5.57% |
5.38% |
| |
Franklin Income VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
0.72%* |
7.20% |
5.29% |
5.27% |
| |
Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc. |
0.82% |
11.91% |
8.12% |
7.09% |
| |
MFS Growth Allocation Portfolio – Service Class Massachusetts Financial Services Company |
1.04% |
10.05% |
6.60% |
7.77% |
| |
SA Allocation Aggressive Portfolio2 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.05%* |
13.70% |
8.11% |
7.54% |
| |
SA Allocation Balanced Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.01%* |
8.09% |
4.08% |
4.56% |
| |
SA Allocation Moderate Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.02%* |
10.42% |
5.69% |
5.77% |
| |
SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio3 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
1.03%* |
11.56% |
6.63% |
6.46% |
| |
SA BlackRock Multi-Factor 70/30 Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC |
0.76%* |
11.90% |
N/A |
N/A |
| |
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio4 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Franklin Advisers, Inc.4 |
1.18%* |
18.89% |
9.76% |
8.30% |
| |
SA Franklin Tactical Opportunities Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.06%* |
12.56% |
6.84% |
N/A |
| |
SA Global Index Allocation 60/40 Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.79%* |
8.62% |
5.24% |
N/A |
| |
SA Global Index Allocation 75/25 Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.79%* |
10.24% |
6.32% |
N/A |
| |
SA Global Index Allocation 90/10 Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.75% |
11.59% |
7.35% |
N/A |
| |
SA Goldman Sachs Multi-Asset Insights Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. |
1.12%* |
13.40% |
7.12% |
N/A |
| |
SA Index Allocation 60/40 Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.71% |
12.01% |
7.06% |
N/A |
A-1
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2024) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Asset
Allocation
(continued) |
SA Index Allocation 80/20 Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.69% |
14.86% |
9.04% |
N/A |
| |
SA Index Allocation 90/10 Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC |
0.68% |
16.09% |
9.87% |
N/A |
| |
SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. |
0.97%* |
9.27% |
6.05% |
5.98% |
| |
SA MFS Total Return Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company |
0.96% |
7.35% |
5.77% |
6.09% |
| |
SA T. Rowe Price Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio5
– Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc. |
1.00% |
13.98% |
8.53% |
N/A |
| |
SA Wellington Strategic Multi-Asset Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Wellington Management Company LLP |
1.06%* |
12.67% |
6.28% |
N/A |
| Bond |
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
0.98% |
-3.32% |
-2.65% |
-0.33% |
| |
American Funds The Bond Fund of America – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
0.73%* |
0.98% |
0.07% |
1.42% |
| |
Franklin Strategic Income VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.04%* |
4.02% |
1.19% |
1.98% |
| |
Lord Abbett Bond Debenture Portfolio – Class VC Lord, Abbett & Co. LLC |
0.99% |
6.72% |
1.90% |
3.73% |
| |
Lord Abbett Total Return Portfolio – Class VC Lord, Abbett & Co. LLC |
0.71% |
2.66% |
0.11% |
1.50% |
| |
PIMCO Emerging Markets Bond Portfolio – Advisor Class Pacific Investment Management Company, LLC |
1.38% |
7.42% |
0.82% |
3.27% |
| |
PIMCO Total Return Portfolio – Advisor Class Pacific Investment Management Company, LLC |
0.89% |
2.43% |
-0.13% |
1.43% |
| |
SA American Century Inflation Managed Portfolio6 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
American Century Investment Management,
Inc. |
0.90% |
1.58% |
0.74% |
1.31% |
| |
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Federated Investment Management Company |
0.80% |
2.06% |
0.51% |
2.62% |
| |
SA Fixed Income Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.59%* |
0.85% |
-0.40% |
N/A |
| |
SA Fixed Income Intermediate Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.59%* |
2.60% |
0.69% |
N/A |
| |
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. and Massachusetts
Financial Services Company |
0.79%* |
1.80% |
0.06% |
1.47% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. |
0.78% |
5.08% |
1.35% |
0.96% |
| |
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Pacific Investment Management Company, LLC |
1.24%* |
-1.59% |
-3.12% |
-0.79% |
A-2
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2024) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Bond
(continued) |
SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC PineBridge Investments, LLC |
0.97% |
7.23% |
4.98% |
5.61% |
| |
SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Wellington Management Company LLP |
0.82% |
0.90% |
-0.92% |
0.62% |
| |
Templeton Global Bond VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
0.75%* |
-11.37% |
-4.85% |
-2.03% |
| Cash |
Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market Fund – Service Shares Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. |
0.43%* |
4.91% |
2.25% |
1.51% |
| Stock |
American Funds Global Growth Fund – Class 21
Capital
Research and Management Company |
0.66%* |
13.68% |
9.76% |
10.74% |
| |
American Funds Global Growth Fund – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
0.91%* |
13.39% |
9.49% |
10.46% |
| |
American Funds Global Small Capitalization Fund – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
1.15%* |
2.12% |
2.74% |
5.54% |
| |
American Funds Growth Fund – Class 21
Capital
Research and Management Company |
0.59% |
31.63% |
18.83% |
16.58% |
| |
American Funds Growth Fund – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
0.84% |
31.30% |
18.53% |
16.29% |
| |
American Funds Growth-Income Fund – Class 21
Capital
Research and Management Company |
0.53% |
24.23% |
13.02% |
12.20% |
| |
American Funds Growth-Income Fund – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
0.78% |
23.92% |
12.73% |
11.93% |
| |
American Funds International Fund – Class 4 Capital Research and Management Company |
1.03% |
2.93% |
0.97% |
3.75% |
| |
Franklin Mutual Global Discovery VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
1.16% |
4.66% |
6.42% |
5.87% |
| |
Franklin Rising Dividends VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
0.88%* |
10.79% |
10.30% |
10.44% |
| |
Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc. |
1.10% |
34.56% |
15.56% |
13.88% |
| |
Invesco V.I. American Value Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc. |
1.14% |
30.10% |
13.40% |
8.85% |
| |
Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc. |
1.01% |
14.87% |
11.31% |
9.21% |
| |
Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc. |
1.00% |
15.72% |
9.81% |
8.53% |
| |
Lord Abbett Developing Growth Portfolio8 – Class VC
Lord, Abbett & Co. LLC |
1.04%* |
22.18% |
7.27% |
8.59% |
| |
Lord Abbett Growth and Income Portfolio – Class VC Lord, Abbett & Co. LLC |
0.93% |
20.60% |
10.37% |
9.05% |
| |
Lord Abbett Mid Cap Stock Portfolio – Class VC Lord, Abbett & Co. LLC |
1.14% |
14.90% |
9.20% |
6.83% |
| |
SA AB Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC AllianceBernstein L.P. |
0.88% |
24.95% |
15.81% |
15.67% |
| |
SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC AllianceBernstein L.P. |
1.15%* |
9.49% |
8.71% |
7.35% |
| |
SA Emerging Markets Equity Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.85%* |
5.56% |
0.55% |
N/A |
A-3
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2024) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Stock
(continued) |
SA Fidelity Institutional AM® International Growth
Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC FIAM LLC |
1.14% |
7.57% |
6.53% |
N/A |
| |
SA Fidelity Institutional AM® Real Estate Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC FIAM LLC |
1.08% |
7.61% |
4.10% |
5.21% |
| |
SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Brandywine Global Investment Management, LLC |
0.95%* |
18.41% |
9.75% |
9.72% |
| |
SA Franklin Small Company Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC |
1.23%* |
11.67% |
8.08% |
7.89% |
| |
SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Core Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
0.81% |
30.08% |
13.44% |
N/A |
| |
SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc. |
0.89% |
20.06% |
9.65% |
10.79% |
| |
SA International Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.73% |
2.85% |
4.02% |
N/A |
| |
SA Invesco Growth Opportunities Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Invesco Advisers, Inc. |
1.05% |
16.00% |
6.93% |
8.14% |
| |
SA Janus Focused Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Janus Capital Management, LLC |
1.04%* |
28.24% |
15.03% |
13.45% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. |
1.46%* |
10.23% |
1.12% |
3.24% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Equity-Income Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. |
0.83% |
12.46% |
8.23% |
9.07% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Global Equities Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. |
1.08% |
21.38% |
11.14% |
8.76% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. |
0.95%* |
23.51% |
12.51% |
11.26% |
| |
SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. |
1.00%* |
13.93% |
10.81% |
11.35% |
| |
SA Large Cap Growth Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.60%* |
35.31% |
16.30% |
N/A |
| |
SA Large Cap Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.50%* |
24.37% |
13.92% |
N/A |
| |
SA Large Cap Value Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.60%* |
11.63% |
9.89% |
N/A |
| |
SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio9 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Massachusetts Financial Services
Company |
0.94% |
35.39% |
17.48% |
14.59% |
A-4
| Type |
Underlying Fund – Share Class
Advisor
Subadvisor (if applicable) |
Current
Expenses |
Average Annual Total Returns
(as of 12/31/2024) | ||
| 1 Year |
5 Year |
10 Year | |||
| Stock
(continued) |
SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company |
0.93%* |
19.35% |
11.30% |
10.95% |
| |
SA Mid Cap Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.61% |
13.27% |
9.61% |
N/A |
| |
SA Morgan Stanley International Equities Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc. |
1.11%* |
2.66% |
3.49% |
4.10% |
| |
SA PIMCO RAE International Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Pacific Investment Management Company, LLC |
1.08%* |
1.76% |
2.74% |
2.27% |
| |
SA Putnam International Value Portfolio10 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
Putnam Investment Management, LLC
|
1.18%* |
5.46% |
6.77% |
5.38% |
| |
SA Small Cap Index Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC7 |
0.65%* |
10.66% |
6.57% |
N/A |
| |
SA Wellington Capital Appreciation Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Wellington Management Company LLP |
0.97% |
41.41% |
16.69% |
15.14% |
| Volatility
Control |
SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced Portfolio11 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc. |
1.08% |
13.32% |
5.47% |
N/A |
| |
SA VCP Dynamic Allocation Portfolio11 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
AllianceBernstein L.P. |
1.02% |
13.56% |
5.71% |
5.82% |
| |
SA VCP Dynamic Strategy Portfolio11 – Class 3
SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC
AllianceBernstein L.P. |
1.05% |
12.63% |
5.53% |
5.50% |
* This Underlying Fund is subject to an expense reimbursement or
fee waiver arrangement resulting in a temporary expense reduction. See the Underlying Fund prospectus for additional information.
1
For contracts issued prior to June 29, 2015, Class 2 Shares of American Funds Insurance Series are available instead of Class 4 Shares.
2
On April 28, 2025, SA Allocation Growth
Portfolio was renamed SA Allocation Aggressive Portfolio.
3
On April 28, 2025, SA Allocation Moderate Growth Portfolio was renamed SA
Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio.
4
On April 28, 2025, SA Putnam Asset Allocation Diversified Growth Portfolio was
renamed SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio and Franklin Advisers, Inc. became its subadvisor.
5
On April 28, 2025, SA T. Rowe Price Asset Allocation Growth Portfolio was renamed SA T. Rowe Price Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio.
6
On April 28, 2025, SA American Century Inflation Protection Portfolio was renamed
SA American Century Inflation Managed Portfolio.
7
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC is the subadvisor effective on or about April
30, 2025.
8
Not available for investment if your contract was issued on or after May 3,
2021.
9
On
April 28, 2025, SA MFS Blue Chip
Growth Portfolio was renamed SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio.
10
On April 28, 2025, SA Putnam International Growth and Income Portfolio was renamed
SA Putnam International Value Portfolio.
11
Not available for investment if your contract was issued on or after September 10,
2018.
INVESTMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONAL
LIVING BENEFITS
If you elected an
optional Living Benefit, your contract is subject to investment requirements, as reflected below. Depending on the optional Living Benefit you elected, you
may not be able to invest in certain investment options. If you did not elect any
optional benefits, or if the only
optional benefit you
elected is a death benefit, your contract is not subject to investment requirements.
This section contains the investment requirements for the following optional Living Benefits that we are
no longer offering to investors:
•
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex
A-5
•
Polaris Income Builder Daily
•
Polaris Income Builder
•
SunAmerica Income Plus
Polaris Income Builder Daily
Flex
If you elect Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex, you must allocate your assets in accordance with the following:
| 20% Secure
Value Account |
80% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts: American Funds Asset Allocation
Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market
Fund
MFS Growth Allocation
PIMCO Total Return
SA Allocation Aggressive
SA Allocation Balanced
SA Allocation Moderate
SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive
SA American Century Inflation Managed
SA BlackRock Multi-Factor 70/30
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond
SA Fixed Income Index
SA Fixed Income Intermediate Index
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
SA Franklin Tactical Opportunities
SA Global Index Allocation 60/40
SA Global Index Allocation 75/25
SA Global Index Allocation 90/10
SA Goldman Sachs Multi-Asset Insights
SA Index Allocation 60/40
SA Index Allocation 80/20
SA Index Allocation 90/10
SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond
SA MFS Total Return
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities
SA T. Rowe Price Allocation Moderately
Aggressive
SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond
SA Wellington Strategic Multi-Asset
DCA Fixed Accounts* 6-Month DCA 1-Year DCA *You may use a DCA Fixed Account to invest your
target allocations in accordance with the investment
requirements. |
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex
If your contract was purchased between
September 9, 2019 and May 23,
2021, and you elected Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex, you must allocate your assets
in accordance with the following:
| 10% Secure
Value Account |
90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios: American Funds Asset Allocation
Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market
Fund
MFS Growth Allocation
PIMCO Total Return
SA Allocation Aggressive
SA Allocation Balanced
SA Allocation Moderate
SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive
SA American Century Inflation Managed
SA BlackRock Multi-Factor 70/30
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond
SA Fixed Income Index
SA Fixed Income Intermediate Index
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
SA Franklin Tactical Opportunities
SA Global Index Allocation 60/40
SA Global Index Allocation 75/25
SA Global Index Allocation 90/10
SA Goldman Sachs Multi-Asset Insights
SA Index Allocation 60/40
SA Index Allocation 80/20
SA Index Allocation 90/10
SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond
SA MFS Total Return
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities
SA T. Rowe Price Allocation Moderately
Aggressive
SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond
SA Wellington Strategic Multi-Asset
DCA Fixed Accounts* 6-Month DCA 1-Year DCA *You may use a DCA Fixed Account to invest your
target allocations in accordance with the investment
requirements. |
A-6
Polaris Income Builder Daily
If your contract was purchased between September 10, 2018 and September 8,
2019 and you elected Polaris Income Builder Daily, you must allocate your assets in
accordance with the following:
| 10% Secure
Value Account |
90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios: American Funds Asset Allocation
Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market
Fund
MFS Growth Allocation
PIMCO Total Return
SA Allocation Aggressive
SA Allocation Moderate
SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive
SA American Century Inflation Managed
SA BlackRock Multi-Factor 70/30
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond
SA Fixed Income Index
SA Fixed Income Intermediate Index
SA Franklin Allocation Moderately Aggressive
SA Franklin Tactical Opportunities
SA Global Index Allocation 60/40
SA Global Index Allocation 75/25
SA Global Index Allocation 90/10
SA Goldman Sachs Multi-Asset Insights
SA Index Allocation 60/40
SA Index Allocation 80/20
SA Index Allocation 90/10
SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond
SA MFS Total Return
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities
SA T. Rowe Price Allocation Moderately
Aggressive
SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond
SA Wellington Strategic Multi-Asset |
Polaris Income Builder
If your contract was purchased between March 10, 2014 and September 9, 2018 and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets in accordance with the
following:
| 1 |
10% Secure
Value Account |
90% SA VCP Dynamic Allocation |
| 2 |
10% Secure
Value Account |
90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios, except as otherwise noted: Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money
Market Fund
SA American Century Inflation Managed
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities
SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced*
SA VCP Dynamic Allocation
SA VCP Dynamic Strategy*
SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond
*You may invest up to a maximum of 50% in each of these Variable Portfolios. |
If your contract was purchased between
May 1, 2013 and March 9, 2014 and you elected the optional
Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets in accordance with
the following:
| 1 |
Option 1 10% Secure
Value Account |
45% SA VCP Dynamic Allocation and
45% in one of three following allocations*: - Allocation
A - Allocation B
- Allocation C
*Please see the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models at the end of this Appendix. |
| 2 |
Option 2 10% Secure
Value Account |
90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios, except as otherwise noted: Goldman Sachs VIT
Government Money Market Fund
SA American Century Inflation Managed
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities
SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced*
SA VCP Dynamic Allocation
SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond
*You may invest up to a maximum of 50% in each of these Variable Portfolios. |
A-7
SunAmerica Income Plus
If your contract was issued between April 30, 2012 and April 30, 2013 and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets
in accordance with the following:
After investing 10% in the Secure Value Account, you must comply with the investment requirements by investing the remaining 90% of your Purchase Payments in
accordance with one of the two options below either directly or by using an available
DCA Fixed Account. If you choose a DCA Fixed Account, you must comply with the investment
requirements by investing your target allocations in accordance one of the two options
below.
| Option |
Investment Options |
| Option 1 |
Invest 45% in the SA VCP Dynamic Allocation
Portfolio and 45% in the following Sample Portfolio: - Balanced Toward
Growth1
or
Invest 45% in the SA VCP Dynamic Allocation
Portfolio and 45% in one of the three following
Allocations*: - Allocation
A - Allocation B
- Allocation C
*Please see the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models at the end of this Appendix. |
| Option 2 |
Invest 90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios, except as otherwise noted: Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market Fund
SA American Century Inflation Managed
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities
SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced*
SA VCP Dynamic Allocation
SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond
*You may invest up to a maximum of 50% in each of these Variable Portfolios. |
1
If your contract was issued between April 30, 2012 and June 24, 2012 and
you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit, the Balanced Growth & Income Sample Portfolio is no longer available as an investment option for Purchase Payments or transfers. If you are currently invested in the Balanced
Growth & Income Sample Portfolio, your investment will not be changed by us.
If your contract was issued prior to April 30, 2012 and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit, the investment requirements and options
applicable to the Living Benefit are as follows:
Flexible Allocation — Check-the-Box Options 1-3
After investing 10% in the Secure Value Account, the remaining 90% of Purchase Payments can be
invested in accordance with Option 1, 2 or 3:
| Option 1 |
Invest in one of three available Allocations*: Allocation A,
Allocation B or Allocation C or
Invest in one of three available Sample Portfolios: Balanced Growth &
Income1
Balanced Toward Growth
Growth Focus
*Please see the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models at the end of this Appendix. |
| Option 2 |
Invest in one or more of the following Variable
Portfolios, except as otherwise noted: American Funds Asset
Allocation Franklin Income VIP Fund
Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market Fund
SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced
SA MFS Total Return
SA VCP Dynamic Allocation |
| Option 3 |
Invest in the SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond Portfolio |
1 The Balanced Growth & Income Sample Portfolio is no
longer available as an investment option for Purchase Payments or transfers. If you are
currently invested in the Balanced Growth & Income Sample Portfolio, your investment
will not be changed by us.
Flexible Allocation — Build-Your-Own Option 4
After investing 10% in the Secure Value Account, the remaining 90% of Purchase Payments can be invested among the Variable Portfolios and available Fixed
Accounts, as follows:
| Investment
Group |
Investment
Requirement |
Variable Portfolios
and/or Fixed Accounts |
| A. Bond, Cash
and Fixed
Accounts |
Minimum 20%
Maximum 90% |
Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market Fund SA American Century Inflation Managed SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond DCA Fixed Accounts* 6-Month DCA 1-Year DCA 2-Year DCA Fixed Accounts 1-Year Fixed (if available) |
A-8
| Investment
Group |
Investment
Requirement |
Variable Portfolios
and/or Fixed Accounts |
| B. Equity |
Minimum 0%
Maximum 70% |
American Funds Asset
Allocation
American Funds Capital World
Bond
American Funds Growth
American Funds Growth-Income
Franklin Allocation VIP Fund
Franklin Income VIP Fund
Invesco V.I. American Franchise
Fund
Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund
Invesco V.I. Growth and Income
Fund
Lord Abbett Growth and Income
Lord Abbett Mid Cap Stock
SA AB Growth
SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value
SA Franklin BW U.S. Large
Cap Value
SA Franklin Systematic
U.S. Large Cap Value
SA Janus Focused Growth
SA JPMorgan Diversified
Balanced
SA JPMorgan Equity-Income
SA JPMorgan Global Equities
SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core
SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth
SA MFS Large Cap Growth
SA MFS Massachusetts
Investors Trust
SA MFS Total Return
SA Morgan Stanley
International Equities
SA PIMCO RAE International
Value
SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond
SA Putnam International Value
SA VCP Dynamic Allocation
SA Wellington Capital
Appreciation |
| C. Limited
Equity |
Minimum 0%
Maximum 10% |
SA Fidelity Institutional
AM® Real Estate SA Franklin Small Company Value SA Invesco Growth Opportunities SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets |
*
You may use a DCA Fixed Account to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.
Polaris Portfolio Allocator Program for Contracts Issued Prior to February 6,
2017
Effective on February 6, 2017, the Polaris Portfolio Allocator Program is no longer
offered and we will no longer update the Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models on an annual basis.
If you are currently invested in a Polaris Portfolio Allocator Model, you will remain invested in the same Variable Portfolios and in the same amounts and weights as before the Polaris Portfolio Allocator
Program was terminated; however, the investment will no longer be considered to be a
Polaris Portfolio Allocator Model and you may no longer trade into a Polaris Portfolio Allocator Model. Any active asset rebalancing or dollar cost averaging programs will continue according to your
current allocations on file.
Additionally, if you elected a Living Benefit which allowed Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models or Sample Portfolio as
part of the investment requirements, you may trade out of your allocation at any time
into any investment that meets your Living Benefit’s investment requirements,
including the asset allocation of the Variable Portfolios listed in the tables below (“Allocations”). After the termination effective date, only the asset allocation of the Variable Portfolios of your current
model or the Allocations below will meet the investment requirements for Living
Benefits which previously allowed Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models.
A-9
Allocations (effective February 6, 2017)
| Variable Portfolios |
Allocation A |
Allocation B |
Allocation C |
| American Funds Global Growth |
2.0% |
3.0% |
4.0% |
| American Funds Growth-Income |
0.0% |
0.0% |
1.0% |
| Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund |
5.0% |
5.0% |
6.0% |
| Invesco V.I. Growth and Income
Fund |
6.0% |
7.0% |
8.0% |
| SA AB Growth |
3.0% |
4.0% |
4.0% |
| SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value |
1.0% |
1.0% |
1.0% |
| SA American Century Inflation
Managed |
5.0% |
3.0% |
2.0% |
| SA Federated Hermes Corporate
Bond |
10.0% |
8.0% |
7.0% |
| SA Fidelity Institutional AM® Real
Estate |
0.0% |
0.0% |
0.0% |
| SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap
Value |
4.0% |
4.0% |
4.0% |
| SA Franklin Small Company Value |
0.0% |
2.0% |
2.0% |
| SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large
Cap Value |
3.0% |
3.0% |
3.0% |
| SA Janus Focused Growth |
0.0% |
1.0% |
1.0% |
| SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets |
0.0% |
1.0% |
2.0% |
| SA JPMorgan Equity-Income |
6.0% |
7.0% |
8.0% |
| SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core |
3.0% |
4.0% |
4.0% |
| SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond |
17.0% |
13.0% |
10.0% |
| SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond |
2.0% |
1.0% |
0.0% |
| SA MFS Large Cap Growth |
2.0% |
3.0% |
4.0% |
| SA MFS Massachusetts Investors
Trust |
6.0% |
6.0% |
7.0% |
| SA Morgan Stanley International
Equities |
3.0% |
3.0% |
4.0% |
| SA PIMCO Global Bond
Opportunities |
4.0% |
4.0% |
2.0% |
| SA PIMCO RAE International
Value |
3.0% |
3.0% |
3.0% |
| SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond |
4.0% |
3.0% |
2.0% |
| SA Wellington Capital Appreciation |
3.0% |
3.0% |
4.0% |
| SA Wellington Government and
Quality Bond |
8.0% |
8.0% |
7.0% |
| Total |
100% |
100% |
100% |
A-10
Appendix B – State Contract Availability and/OR Variability
| PROSPECTUS PROVISION |
AVAILABILITY OR VARIATION |
ISSUE STATE |
| Administrative Charge |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
New York |
| Annuity Date |
You may begin the Income Phase any time after 13 months after contract
issue. |
New York |
| Free Look |
The Free Look amount is calculated as the greater of (1) Purchase
Payments including fees and charges or (2) the value of
your contract on the day we receive your request in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center. |
New York |
| Minimum Contract Value |
The minimum remaining contract value after a partial withdrawal must
be $2,000. |
New York |
| Premium Based Charge |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
New York |
| Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
New York |
| Polaris Income Builder Daily |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
New York |
| Polaris Income Builder |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
New York |
| SunAmerica Income Plus |
Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios
only. |
New York |
B-1
Appendix C – Formula and examples of calculations of the
polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Fee
The fee for Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex is assessed against the Income Base and deducted from the contract value at the end of each Benefit Quarter.
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Fee
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decreased or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| Once Covered Person |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40%/ 4).
The initial annual fee rate is guaranteed for the first Benefit
Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters
identified in the table above. Any fee rate adjustment is based on the non-discretionary
formula stated below which is tied to the change in the Volatility Index
(“VIX”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. The fee rate is based on the average of the daily VIX squared values (VIX multiplied by VIX on the same day)
as of Market Close on each day during the Benefit Quarter for which the fee is being
calculated (the “Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2)”). In general, as the Quarterly Average (Daily VIX2) decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the maximums and minimums identified in the table above.
The non-discretionary formula used in the calculation of the Annual Fee Rate applicable after the
first Benefit Year is:
Initial Annual Fee Rate + {0.05% x [Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2)/33 –
10]}
You may find the value of the VIX for any given day by going to the Chicago Board Options Exchange
website, www.cboe.com.
Please see APPENDIX F — LIVING BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO MAY 1, 2023 for applicable fee rates and
the non-discretionary formula if your contract was issued prior to May 1, 2023.
Example:
Assumptions:
•
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex was elected
•
The initial annual fee rate is 1.45%
•
The Quarterly Averages (Daily VIX2) are as displayed from the table below:
| Benefit
Quarter
Anniversary |
Quarterly
Average
(Daily
VIX2) |
Calculated
Annual Fee Rate* |
Annual
Fee Rate |
Quarterly
Fee Rate** |
| 1st |
525.71 |
N/A |
1.45% |
0.3625% |
| 2nd |
412.12 |
N/A |
1.45% |
0.3625% |
| 3rd |
770.25 |
N/A |
1.45% |
0.3625% |
| 4th |
573.97 |
N/A |
1.45% |
0.3625% |
| 5th |
204.42 |
1.26% |
1.26% |
0.3150% |
*
The Calculated Annual Fee Rate equals the number resulting from the application of the formula stated above. This amount is compared to the minimum and maximum fee and
the maximum quarterly fee increase to determine the annual fee rate each quarter.
**
The Quarterly Fee Rate is the Annual Fee Rate divided by 4.
The Annual Fee Rates and Quarterly Fee Rates are calculated as
follows:
On the 5th Benefit Quarter Anniversary, the Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2) is 204.42. We
calculate the Annual Fee Rate for the 5th Benefit Quarter as follows:
Step 1:
Calculation of the Annual Fee Rate
Initial Annual Fee Rate + {0.05% x [Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2)/33 – 10]}
1.45% + {0.05% x [204.42/33 – 10]}
1.45% + [0.05% x (-3.81)]
1.45% + (-0.19%) = 1.26% (Annual Fee Rate)
Step
2:
Determine whether the Annual Fee Rate calculated in Step 1 is within the Maximum or Minimum Annual Fee Rate and within the
Maximum Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Increase of Decrease
1.45% - 1.26% = 0.19% which is within 0.40% of the previous
Annual Fee Rate (1.45%).
1.26% is higher than the Minimum Annual Fee Rate (0.60%) and is lower than Maximum Annual Fee Rate
(2.50%)
Therefore, the Annual Fee Rate for the 5th Benefit Quarter is 1.26%
The Quarterly Fee Rate is 0.3150% (or 1.26% divided by 4).
C-1
After the 5th Benefit Quarter, the assumed
Average Value of the (Daily VIX)2 are as displayed from the table below:
| Benefit
Quarter |
Quarterly
Average
(Daily
VIX2) |
Calculated
Annual
Fee Rate |
Annual
Fee Rate |
Quarterly
Fee Rate |
| 6th |
351.93 |
1.48% |
1.48% |
0.3700% |
| 7th |
307.03 |
1.42% |
1.42% |
0.3550% |
| 8th |
602.30 |
1.86% |
1.82% |
0.4550% |
| 9th |
698.25 |
2.01% |
2.01% |
0.5025% |
| 10th |
323.74 |
1.44% |
1.61% |
0.4025% |
| 11th |
398.72 |
1.55% |
1.55% |
0.3875% |
| 12th |
261.37 |
1.35% |
1.35% |
0.3375% |
| 13th |
281.15 |
1.38% |
1.38% |
0.3450% |
| 14th |
151.32 |
1.18% |
1.18% |
0.2950% |
| 15th |
52.63 |
1.03% |
1.03% |
0.2575% |
| 16th |
207.38 |
1.26% |
1.26% |
0.3150% |
The Annual Fee Rates and Quarterly Fee Rates are calculated as follows:
On the 8th Benefit Quarter Anniversary, the Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2) increases to
602.30. We calculate the Annual Fee Rate in the 8th Benefit Quarter as follows:
Step
1:
Calculation of the Annual Fee Rate
Initial Annual Fee Rate + {0.05% x [Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2)/33 – 10]}
1.45% + {0.05% x [602.30/33 – 10]}
1.45% + [0.05% x (8.25)]
1.45% + 0.41% = 1.86% (Annual Fee Rate)
Step
2:
Determine whether the Annual Fee Rate calculated in Step 1 is within the Maximum or Minimum Annual Fee Rate and within the
Maximum Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Increase of Decrease
1.86% - 1.42% = 0.44% which is more than 0.40% higher of the
previous Annual Fee Rate of 1.42%.
The Annual Fee Rate is adjusted to be exactly 0.40% higher than
the previous Annual Fee Rate, which is 1.82% (1.42% + 0.40%). This is within the Minimum and Maximum Annual Fee Rates.
Therefore, the Quarterly Fee Rate is 0.4550% (or 1.82% divided by 4).
On the 10th Benefit Quarter Anniversary, the Quarterly Average (Daily VIX2) decreases to 323.74. We calculate the Annual Fee Rate in the 10th Benefit Quarter as follows:
Step
1:
Calculation of the Annual Fee Rate
Initial Annual Fee Rate + {0.05% x [Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2)/33 – 10]}
1.45% + {0.05% x [323.74/33 – 10]}
1.45% + [0.05% x (-0.19)]
1.45% + (-0.01%) = 1.44% (Annual Fee Rate)
Step
2:
Determine whether the Annual Fee Rate calculated in Step 1 is within the Maximum or Minimum Annual Fee Rate and within the
Maximum Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Increase of Decrease
1.44% - 2.01% = -0.57% which is more than 0.40% Quarterly
Annualized Fee Rate Decrease from the previous Annual Fee Rate of 2.01%.
The Annual Fee Rate is adjusted to be exactly 0.40% lower than the previous Annual Fee Rate, which
is 1.61% (2.01% - 0.40%).
Therefore, the Quarterly Fee Rate is 0.4025% (or 1.61% divided by 4).
After the 10th Benefit Quarter, the Annual Fee Rate will continue to increase or decrease depending on the movement of the Quarterly Average (Daily
VIX2). If your contract value falls to zero before the feature has been terminated, the fee will no longer be
deducted.
C-2
Appendix D – Optional Living Benefit Examples
The following examples demonstrate how increases to the
Income Base and withdrawals taken from the contract affect the values and benefits of the Living Benefit feature Polaris Builder Daily Flex. The examples are based on a hypothetical contract with one Covered Person over an extended period of time, and do not assume any specific rate of return nor do they represent how your contract will actually perform.
Example 1: Initial Values
The values shown below are based on the following
assumptions:
•
Benefit Effective Date = contract issue date
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Covered Person = Owner age 65 on the Benefit Effective Date
•
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage = 5.00%
| As of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Contract
Value |
Minimum
Income
Base |
Income
Base |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount |
| Benefit Effective Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$5,000 |
•
Minimum Income Base = Income Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount = Income Base x Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage = $100,000 x 5.00% = $5,000, if Lifetime Income is activated.
Example 2: Impact of Increase in Income Base due to Daily Step-up
Values, Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments, and Minimum Income Base at Contract Anniversaries Prior to the Activation Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 1 above, in addition to the following:
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the 1st Benefit year = $60,000
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the 2nd Benefit year = $90,000
•
No withdrawals taken in the first 2 Benefit years
•
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amounts in this example are only available if
Lifetime Income is activated
| As of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Step-up
Value |
Minimum
Income
Base |
Income
Base |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount upon
Activation |
| Benefit Effective Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
— |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$5,000 |
| Year 1 – Day 25 |
— |
$102,000 |
$102,000 |
$100,000 |
$102,000 |
$5,100 |
| Year 1 – Day 105 |
— |
$105,000 |
$105,000 |
$100,000 |
$105,000 |
$5,250 |
| Year 1 – Day 200 |
$60,000 |
$162,000 |
— |
$160,000 |
$165,000 |
$8,250 |
| Year 1 – Day 300 |
— |
$166,000 |
$166,000 |
$160,000 |
$166,000 |
$8,300 |
| 1st Anniversary |
— |
$167,000 |
$167,000 |
$168,000 |
$168,000 |
$8,400 |
| Year 2 – Day 180 |
$90,000 |
$250,000 |
— |
$258,000 |
$258,000 |
$12,900 |
| Year 2 – Day 250 |
— |
$280,000 |
$280,000 |
$258,000 |
$280,000 |
$14,000 |
| 2nd Anniversary |
— |
$279,000 |
— |
$270,500 |
$280,000 |
$14,000 |
The values of the feature are impacted by attaining the daily Step-up Values, adding subsequent Purchase Payments, and comparing to the Minimum Income Base at Benefit Year Anniversaries when no Lifetime Income withdrawals have been taken as follows:
•
The Income Base is increased to the Step-up Values on a daily basis and the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) is recalculated based on the new Income Base, only available after Lifetime Income is activated.
•
The Income Base and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) are
also recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase Payment is received.
D-1
○
In year 1 – day 25, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of $102,000 (Contract Value $102,000 is greater than the current Income Base $100,000) and the MAWA was increased to $5,100 ($102,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 1 – day 105, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of
$105,000 (Contract Value $105,000 is greater than the current Income Base $102,000) and the MAWA was increased to $5,250 ($105,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 1 – day 200, the Minimum Income Base was increased to $160,000
($100,000 + $60,000 subsequent Purchase Payment), the Income Base was increased to $165,000 ($105,000 + $60,000 subsequent Purchase Payment) and the MAWA was increased to $8,250 ($165,000 x 5.00%).
•
While no Lifetime Income withdrawals have been taken, the Income Base continues to be increased to the Step-up Values on a daily basis and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) is recalculated based on the new Income Base. At Benefit Year Anniversaries during the first 10 years, and prior to the Activation Date, the Income Base can also step up to the Minimum Income Base if the Minimum Income Base is greater than the current Income Base.
○
In year 1 – day 300, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of
$166,000 (Contract Value $166,000 is greater than the current Income Base $165,000) and the MAWA was increased to $8,300 ($166,000 x 5.00%).
○
On the first Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base was increased to the
Minimum Income Base of $168,000 ($160,000 x 105%, Minimum Income Base $168,000 is greater than both Step-Up Value $167,000 and current Income Base $166,000) and the MAWA was increased to $8,400 ($168,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 2 – day 180, the Income Base was increased to $258,000 ($168,000 + $90,000 subsequent Purchase Payment), and the MAWA was increased to $12,900 ($258,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 2 – day 250, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of $280,000 (Contract Value $280,000 is greater than the current Income Base $258,000) and the MAWA was increased to $14,000 ($280,000 x
5.00%).
○
On the second Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base remained unchanged at $280,000 (current Income
Base $280,000 is greater than Minimum Income Base $270,500 ($160,000 1st year Purchase Payments x 110% + $90,000 2nd year Purchase Payment x 105%) and the MAWA also remained unchanged at $14,000.
Example 3: Impact of Taking a Withdrawal prior to the Activation
Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in the Examples 1 and 2 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal of $5,000 was taken in year 3, prior to the Activation
Date.
| As of |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Step-up
Value |
Minimum
Income
Base |
Income
Base |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount upon
Activation |
| 2nd Anniversary |
$279,000 |
— |
— |
$270,500 |
$280,000 |
$14,000 |
| Year 3 – Day 45 |
$290,000 |
— |
$290,000 |
$270,500 |
$290,000 |
$14,500 |
| Year 3 – Day 155 |
$285,000 |
$5,000 |
— |
$265,754 |
$284,912 |
$14,246 |
| Year 3 – Day 275 |
$300,000 |
— |
$300,000 |
$265,754 |
$300,000 |
$15,000 |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$310,000 |
— |
$310,000 |
$278,035 |
$310,000 |
$15,500 |
○
In year 3 – day 45, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of
$290,000 (Contract Value $290,000 is greater than the current Income Base $280,000) and the MAWA was increased to $14,500 ($290,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 3 – day 155, the reduction proportion was 1.7544% ($5,000
Withdrawal/$285,000 Contract Value). The reduced Income Base was $284,912 ($290,000 x [1 – 1.7544%]) and the reduced MAWA was $14,246 ($284,912 x 5.00%). The reduced Minimum Income Base was $265,754 (110% x 1st year reduced Purchase
Payments $157,193 [$160,000 x {1 – 1.7544%}] plus 105% x 2nd year reduced Purchase Payment $88,421 [$90,000 x {1 – 1.7544%}])
○
In year 3 – day 275, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of $300,000 (Contract Value $300,000 Contract Value was greater than current Income Base $284,912) and the MAWA was increased to $15,000
($300,000 x 5.00%).
D-2
○
On the third Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of $310,000
($310,000 Contract Value $310,000 was greater than both current Income Base $300,000 and Minimum Income Base $278,035 (115% x $157,193 + 110% x $88,421) and the MAWA was increased to $15,500 ($310,000 x
5.00%).
Example 4: Impact of Taking Withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount after the Activation Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1, 2 and 3 above, in addition to the following:
•
Withdrawals less than or equal MAWA are taken in the 4th and 5th Benefit Years, after the Activate Date.
| As of |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Step-up
Value |
Minimum Income
Base |
Income
Base |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount upon
Activation |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$310,000 |
— |
$310,000 |
$278,035 |
$310,000 |
$15,500 |
| Year 4 – Day 65 |
$315,000 |
— |
$315,000 |
$278,035 |
$315,000 |
$15,750 |
| Year 4 – Day 92 |
$312,000 |
$10,000 |
— |
— |
$315,000 |
$15,750 |
| Year 4 – Day 350 |
$320,000 |
— |
$320,000 |
— |
$315,000 |
$15,750 |
| 4th Anniversary |
$311,000 |
— |
— |
— |
$320,000 |
$16,000 |
| Year 5 – Day 75 |
$325,000 |
— |
$325,000 |
— |
$320,000 |
$16,000 |
| Year 5 – Day 80 |
$322,000 |
$16,000 |
— |
— |
$320,000 |
$16,000 |
| 5th Anniversary |
$317,000 |
— |
— |
— |
$325,000 |
$16,250 |
| Year 6 – Day 155 |
$330,000 |
— |
$330,000 |
— |
$325,000 |
$16,250 |
| 6th Anniversary |
$329,000 |
— |
— |
— |
$330,000 |
$16,500 |
•
In year 4, $10,000, a Lifetime Income amount less than MAWA was withdrawn.
•
In year 5, $16,000, a Lifetime Income amount equal to MAWA was withdrawn.
The values of the feature are impacted prior to and after the Lifetime Income withdrawals are taken as follows:
•
Prior to the Activation Date, the Income Base is increased to the Step-up Values
on a daily basis and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (MAWA) is recalculated based on the new Income Base.
○
In year 4 – day 65, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value of
$315,000 (Contract Value $315,000 is greater than the current Income Base $310,000) and the MAWA was increased to $15,750 ($315,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 4 – day 92, on the Activation Date, a Lifetime Income amount of
$10,000 was withdrawn, and was less than the MAWA of $15,750. The Income Base ($315,000) and the MAWA ($15,750) remained unchanged.
•
After the first Lifetime Income withdrawal has been taken, The Minimum Income
Base is no longer available, and the Income Base is not increased until the next anniversary date, looking back at the Step-up Values following the first Lifetime Income withdrawal.
○
In year 4 – day 350, there was a Step-up Value of $320,000, but the Income Base ($315,000) and the MAWA ($15,750) remained unchanged.
○
On the 4th Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value $320,000 that had occurred between the date of the first Lifetime Income withdrawal and the 4th Benefit Year Anniversary date, and the MAWA was increased to $16,000 ($320,000 x 5.00%).
•
Past the first anniversary date after the first Lifetime Income withdrawal has been taken, the Income Base is not increased until the next Benefit Year Anniversary, looking back at the Step-up Values in the immediately preceding Benefit Year.
○
In year 5 – day 75, there was a Step-up Value of $325,000, but the Income Base ($320,000) and the MAWA ($16,000) remained unchanged.
○
In year 5 – day 80, a Lifetime Income amount $16,000 was withdrawn and was equal to the MAWA of $16,000. The Income Base ($320,000) and the MAWA ($16,000) remained unchanged.
D-3
○
On the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base was increased to the
Step-up Value $325,000 that had occurred during the immediately preceding contract year, and the MAWA was increased to $16,250 ($325,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 6 – day 155, there was a Step-up Value of $330,000, but the Income
Base ($325,000) and the MAWA ($16,250) remained unchanged.
○
On the 6th Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value $330,000 that had occurred during the immediately preceding contract year, and the MAWA was increased to $16,500 ($330,000 x 5.00%).
Example 5: Impact of Taking Excess Withdrawals (in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount) after the Activation Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in the Examples 1,
2, 3 and 4 above, in addition to the following:
•
Withdrawal of 8% of Income Base taken in the sixth and seventh Benefit
Years.
| As of |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Step-up
Value |
Income
Base |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount |
| 6th Anniversary |
$329,000 |
— |
— |
$330,000 |
$16,500 |
| Year 7 – Day 37 |
$321,000 |
$26,400 |
— |
$319,271 |
$15,964 |
| Year 7 – Day 362 |
$325,000 |
— |
$325,000 |
$319,271 |
$15,964 |
| 7th Anniversary |
$317,000 |
— |
— |
$325,000 |
$16,250 |
| Year 8 – Day 46 |
$307,000 |
$26,000 |
— |
$314,101 |
$15,705 |
| 8th Anniversary |
$270,000 |
— |
— |
$314,101 |
$15,705 |
The values of the feature are impacted by taking Lifetime Income withdrawals in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) as follows:
•
The Income Base and Income Credit Base are reduced in the same proportion by
which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the MAWA.
○
In year 7 – day 37, the reduction proportion is 3.2512% ([$26,400 -
$16,500] / [$321,000 - $16,500]); the reduced Income Base was $319,271 ($330,000 x [1 – 3.2512%]) and the reduced MAWA was $15,964 ($319,271 x 5.00%).
○
In year 7 – day 362, there was a Step-up Value of $325,000, but the Income Base ($319,271) and the MAWA ($15,964) remained unchanged.
○
On the 7th anniversary date, the Income Base was increased to the Step-up Value $325,000 that had occurred after the Excess Withdrawal, and the MAWA was increased to $16,250 ($325,000 x 5.00%).
○
In year 8 – day 46, the reduction proportion was 3.3534% ([$26,000 –
$16,250] / [$307,000 - $16,250]); the reduced Income Base was $314,101 ($325,000 x [1 – 3.3534%]); and the reduced MAWA was $15,705 ($314,101 x 5.00%).
D-4
Example 6:
Protected Income Payment
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 above, in addition to the following:
•
Contract value as shown and reduced to $0 in Year 12 due to market
conditions.
•
MAWA withdrawals were taken every year.
•
There were no Step-up Values after the 8th Benefit Year Anniversary
date.
| As of |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Step-up
Value |
Income
Base |
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount |
Protected
Income
Payment |
| 8th Anniversary |
$270,000 |
— |
— |
$314,101 |
$15,705 |
— |
| 9th Anniversary |
$150,000 |
$15,705 |
— |
$314,101 |
$15,705 |
— |
| 10th Anniversary |
$100,000 |
$15,705 |
— |
$314,101 |
$15,705 |
— |
| 11th Anniversary |
$50,000 |
$15,705 |
— |
$314,101 |
$15,705 |
— |
| Year 12 – Day 81 |
$0 |
$15,705 |
— |
$314,101 |
$15,705 |
— |
| 12th Anniversary |
$0 |
$0 |
— |
$314,101 |
— |
$15,705 |
•
The Protected Income Payment of $15,705 ($314,101 x 5.00%) will be paid for the
lifetime of the Covered Person.
D-5
Appendix E – Death Benefits Following Spousal Continuation
If your contract was issued prior to September 9, 2019 and you did not elect the Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living
Benefit, please see APPENDIX H – DEATH BENEFITS FOLLOWING SPOUSAL CONTINUATION FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO SEPTEMBER 9, 2019.
If your contract was issued between May 13, 2019 and September 8, 2019 and you elected the Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, please see this appendix for the Death Benefits Following Spousal Continuation applicable to your contract.
If your contract was issued between May 13, 2019 and September 8, 2019 and you elected the Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, please see this appendix for the Death Benefits Following Spousal Continuation applicable to your contract.
The following details the death benefit payable upon the Continuing Spouse’s death. The death
benefit we will pay to the new Beneficiary chosen by the Continuing Spouse varies
depending on the death benefit option elected by the original Owner of the contract,
whether the Living Benefit was elected, the age of the Continuing Spouse as of the
Continuation Date and the Continuing Spouse’s date of death.
Capitalized terms used in this Appendix have the same meaning as they have in the prospectus.
We define “Continuation Purchase Payment” as Purchase Payments made on or after the
Continuation Date.
The term “withdrawals” as used in describing the death benefits is defined as
withdrawals and the fees and charges applicable to those
withdrawals.
The term “Withdrawal Adjustment” is used for the standard death benefit, if you have
elected the Living Benefit, to describe the way in which the amount of the death benefit
will be adjusted for withdrawals. Any withdrawal taken prior to the Activation Date
reduces the death benefit proportionately by the percentage by which each withdrawal
reduced the contract value. Any withdrawal taken on or after the Activation Date
reduces the death benefit as follows:
•
If cumulative Lifetime Income withdrawals for the current contract year are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the amount
of adjustment will equal the amount of each Lifetime Income withdrawal.
•
If cumulative Lifetime Income withdrawals for the current contract year are in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the contract value and death benefit are first reduced by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The resulting death benefit is further adjusted by the withdrawal amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (Excess Withdrawal) by the percentage by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the resulting contract value.
The Company will not accept Purchase Payments from anyone age 86 or older. Therefore, the death benefit
calculations described below assume that no Purchase Payments are received on or after the Continuing Spouse’s
86th birthday.
The standard death benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit are calculated
differently depending on whether the original Owner had elected the Living Benefit
described above.
A.
Standard Death Benefit Payable Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death:
The following describes the standard death benefit without election of the Living
Benefit:
If the Continuing Spouse is age 85 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be
the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday,
reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the
contract value on the date of such withdrawal.
The following describes the standard death benefit with election of the Living Benefit:
If the Continuing Spouse is age 85 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the first contract anniversary reduced by:
a.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date if the Living Benefit has not terminated; or
b.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date prior to the date the Living Benefit was terminated; and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit was terminated.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation
Date, the death benefit will be contract value.
B. Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Payable
Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death:
Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death:
If the Continuing Spouse is age 80 or younger on the Continuation Date, regardless of whether a Living Benefit was elected, then upon the death of the
Continuing Spouse, the death benefit is the greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to
E-1
the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday, reduced for withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced contract value on that date of
such withdrawal; or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary that occurred after the Continuation Date, but prior to the earlier of the Continuing
Spouse’s 83rd birthday or date of death. The anniversary value for any year is
equal to the contract value on the applicable contract anniversary, plus Continuation
Purchase Payments received since that anniversary date but prior to the Continuing
Spouse’s 86th birthday, and reduced for any withdrawals since that contract anniversary in the same proportion that the contract value was reduced on the date of such withdrawal.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 81-85 on the Continuation Date
and no Living Benefit was elected, then the death benefit will be the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday,
reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the
contract value on the date of such withdrawal.
If the Continuing
Spouse is age 81-85 on the Continuation Date and the Living Benefit was elected, then the death benefit will be the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday,
reduced by:
a.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date if the Living Benefit has not terminated; or
b.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date prior to the date the Living Benefit was terminated and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit was terminated.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation
Date, the death benefit is equal to the contract value and the fee for the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit will no longer be deducted as of the Continuation Date.
E-2
Appendix F – Living Benefits for Contracts Issued Prior to MAY 1, 2023
Effective January 15, 2016, if you have elected a Living Benefit feature and your contract was issued:
•
Prior to April 30, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the 5th contract anniversary from your contract issue
date.
•
On April 30, 2012 to November 11, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 2nd contract anniversary from your
contract issue date.
•
Between November 12, 2012 and September 8, 2019, unless you elected the Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit feature, we will not
accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 1st contract anniversary from
your contract issue date.
Table of Contents
| Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex |
F-1 |
| Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Fee |
F-7 |
| Additional Important Information Applicable to Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex |
F-8 |
| Polaris Income Builder Daily |
F-11 |
| Polaris Income Builder Daily Fee |
F-16 |
| Additional Important Information Applicable to Polaris Income Builder Daily |
F-17 |
| Polaris Income Builder |
F-19 |
| Polaris Income Builder Fee |
F-24 |
| SunAmerica Income Plus |
F-25 |
| SunAmerica Income Plus Fee |
F-30 |
| Additional Important Information Applicable to Polaris Income Builder and SunAmerica Income Plus |
F-32 |
| |
|
Polaris Income Builder Daily FLEX
If your contract was issued prior to May 1, 2023 and you elected the Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected.
Glossary of Living Benefit Terms
Activation Date
The date on which your Lifetime Income is activated. Upon activation of Lifetime Income, changes cannot be made to the Covered Person(s).
Anniversary Value
The contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary. The Continuation Contribution, if applicable, is included in the calculation of Anniversary
Values.
Benefit Effective Date
The date the Living Benefit is elected. The Benefit Effective Date is the same as the contract issue date.
Benefit Quarter
Each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Quarter Anniversary
The date following each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date. If the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary has no corresponding date,
then the Benefit Quarter Anniversary will be deemed to be the following day.
For example, if a Benefit Quarter Anniversary is November 29, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary
would be February 29 of the following year; however, in a non-Leap Year, there is no
corresponding date. Therefore, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would be March 1.
Benefit Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Year Anniversary
The date on which each Benefit Year begins.
Contract Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the contract issue date.
Covered Person(s)
The person, or persons, whose lifetime withdrawals are guaranteed under the Living Benefit.
Covered Person Change
The Covered Person(s) may be changed in the event of a Life Change Event prior to or on the
Activation Date. No further changes may be made to the Covered Person(s) after the
Activation Date.
Excess Withdrawal
Any withdrawal, or portion of a withdrawal, that is taken in a Benefit Year after the Activation Date and exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount or the Required Minimum Distribution amount as calculated by the Annuity Service
Center. An Excess Withdrawal will cause the Income Base and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount to be recalculated.
Income Base
The Income Base is a value used to determine the Living Benefit fee and the maximum amount that may
be withdrawn each Benefit Year after the Activation Date without reducing the Income
Base. The Income Base is also used to determine the amount paid each year over the
lifetime of the Covered Person(s), if and when the contract value is reduced to zero,
but the Income Base is still greater than zero, or upon the Latest Annuity Date.
F-1
Investment Requirements
In order to elect the Living Benefit, you must invest your money in accordance with certain
requirements outlined under Investment Requirements
for Optional Living Benefits in
APPENDIX A - UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Life Change Event
A change to the Covered Person(s) upon marriage, divorce or death if prior to the Activation Date.
Lifetime Income
Any withdrawal taken on or after the Activation Date that is all or part of the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount or Protected Income Payment.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
The maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year on or after activating Lifetime Income
and while the contract value is greater than zero without reducing the Income
Base.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount available for withdrawal each Benefit Year after activating Lifetime Income and
while the contract value is greater than zero.
Minimum Income Base
The Minimum Income Base is a guaranteed minimum amount of the Income Base determined on each
contract Benefit Year Anniversary prior to the Activation Date and up to the 10th
Benefit Year Anniversary of the contract. An annual 5% Minimum Income Base Percentage will be applied to each Purchase Payment received prior to that Benefit Year Anniversary during the Minimum Income
Base period of 10 years, as long as the Activation Date is not prior to that Benefit
Year Anniversary as follows:
| Benefit Year Anniversary after
Each Purchase Payment |
Minimum Income Base
Percentage
(as a Percentage of each
Purchase Payment) |
| 1st Benefit Year Anniversary |
105% |
| 2nd Benefit Year Anniversary |
110% |
| 3rd Benefit Year Anniversary |
115% |
| 4th Benefit Year Anniversary |
120% |
| 5th Benefit Year Anniversary |
125% |
| 6th Benefit Year Anniversary |
130% |
| 7th Benefit Year Anniversary |
135% |
| 8th Benefit Year Anniversary |
140% |
| 9th Benefit Year Anniversary |
145% |
| 10th Benefit Year Anniversary |
150% |
Any withdrawals taken prior to the Activation Date will reduce each Purchase Payment used in the calculation of the Minimum Income Base proportionately. The
Minimum Income Base is only available in the first 10 Benefit Years,
or upon the
Activation Date, if earlier. For example: a Purchase Payment received in the 5th Benefit Year prior to the Activation Date can only have an annual Minimum Income Base Percentage of 5%, up to a maximum of
125%.
Protected Income Payment
The amount to be paid each year over the lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the Activation Date, if and when the contract value is reduced to zero, but
the Income Base is still greater than zero or if the Latest Annuity Date has been
reached.
Protected Income Payment Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Protected Income Payment.
Step-up Value
The Step-up Value is used to determine the Income Base on a daily basis. The Step-Up Value is
equal to the current contract value on any day where the current contract value is
greater than the current Income Base due to favorable market performance.
How does Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex work?
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex offers guaranteed lifetime income plus the opportunity to increase
income by locking in Step-up Values. If you elect this feature, you must elect the date
on which your Lifetime Income is activated (the “Activation Date”).
This feature allows you flexibility to make a change to your initial election of Covered Person(s)
(the “Covered Person Change”) on the Activation Date. The Covered Person
Change is also permitted where there is a marriage, divorce, or death prior to the
Activation Date (the “Life Change Event”) of the original Covered Person(s). At least one of the original named Covered Person(s) must remain on the contract.
You may take withdrawals prior to the Activation Date that will not lock in the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage, but any such withdrawals
will proportionately reduce the Income Base and Purchase Payments used in the calculation of the Minimum Income Base. Note: If the Activation Date is prior to the specified Benefit Year
Anniversary, you will no longer be eligible for the Minimum Income Base on the Benefit
Year Anniversary.
Prior to the Activation Date, the Income Base step-ups, if any, occur on a daily basis. The Income Base is the basis for the Covered Person(s)’ Lifetime
Income. The Income Base is initially equal to the first Purchase Payment, increased by
any subsequent Purchase Payments, if any, and reduced proportionately for any
withdrawals made. In addition, if the Activation Date is not prior to the specified Benefit Year Anniversary, you will be eligible for the Minimum Income Base on the Benefit Year Anniversary. The
Minimum Income Base is a specified percentage of the Purchase Payment(s). The Purchase
Payment(s) used to calculate
F-2
the Minimum Income
Base are reduced for any withdrawals taken prior to the Activation Date.
On or after the Activation Date, while both the Income Base and the contract values are greater than
zero, the Income Base may only be increased on the Benefit Year Anniversary dates,
looking back at the prior Benefit Year’s Step-up Values and subsequent Purchase Payments, if any. Please see “How do increases to the Income Base work under Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?”
below.
What determines the amount I can receive
each year?
The amount that you receive depends on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s), the age of
the Covered Person(s) and whether your contract value is greater than or equal to zero
on the Activation Date.
While the contract value is greater than zero and on or after the Activation Date, the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to
calculate the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount that you may withdraw each Benefit Year without decreasing your Income Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage differs depending on whether
there are one or two Covered Person(s) and the age of the Covered Person(s) on the
Activation Date.
If your contract value has been reduced to zero or the Latest Annuity Date is reached, the Protected
Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to
calculate the Protected Income Payment that you will receive each year over the remaining
lifetime of the Covered Person(s). The Protected Income Payment Percentage differs
depending on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s) and the age of the Covered
Person(s) on the Activation Date. Please see “What happens if the
contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?”and “What happens to my
Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?”below.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage
Tables
The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.
If your contract was purchased between May 23, 2022 and April 30, 2023, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, the following
Maximum
Annual Withdrawal and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:
| Number of Covered Person and Age of
Covered Person(s) on the Activation Date(1) |
Polaris Income
Builder Daily Flex |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64) |
4.00% / 4.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 - 74) |
5.40% / 5.40% |
| One Covered Person (Age 75 and Older) |
5.60% / 5.60% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59) |
3.00% / 3.00% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 74) |
4.90% / 4.90% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 75 and Older) |
5.10% / 5.10% |
If your contract was purchased between May 24, 2021 and
May 22, 2022, and you elected the optional Polaris Income
Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal and
Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are
applicable:
| Number of Covered Person and Age of
Covered Person(s) on the Activation Date(1) |
Polaris Income
Builder Daily Flex |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59) |
3.25% / 3.25% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64) |
3.75% / 3.75% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 - 74) |
5.00% / 5.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 75 and Older) |
5.25% / 5.25% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59) |
2.75% / 2.75% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64) |
3.25% / 3.25% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 74) |
4.50% / 4.50% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 75 and Older) |
4.75% / 4.75% |
(1)
If there are two Covered Persons, the age on the Activation Date is based on the age of the younger of the two Covered Persons.
If your contract
was purchased between March 30, 2020
and May 23, 2021, and you elected the optional Polaris
Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal and
Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are
applicable:
| Number of Covered Person and Age of
Covered Person(s) on the Activation Date(1) |
Polaris Income
Builder Daily Flex |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59) |
3.25% / 3.25% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64) |
3.75% / 3.75% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 - 71) |
5.00% / 5.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 72 and Older) |
5.25% / 5.25% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59) |
2.75% / 2.75% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64) |
3.25% / 3.25% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 71) |
4.50% / 4.50% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 72 and Older) |
4.75% / 4.75% |
(1)
If there are two Covered Persons, the age on the Activation Date is based on the age of the younger of the two Covered Persons.
If your contract
was purchased between October 7, 2019
and March 29, 2020, and you elected the optional Polaris
Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, the following
F-3
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are
applicable:
| Number of Covered Person and Age of
Covered Person(s) on the Activation Date(1) |
Polaris Income
Builder Daily Flex |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64) |
4.00% / 4.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 - 71) |
5.40% / 5.40% |
| One Covered Person (Age 72 and Older) |
5.70% / 5.70% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59) |
3.00% / 3.00% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 71) |
4.90% / 4.90% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 72 and Older) |
5.20% / 5.20% |
(1)
If there are two Covered Persons, the age on the Activation Date is based on the age of the younger of the two Covered Persons.
If your contract
was purchased between May 13, 2019 and October 6, 2019, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal and Protected Income
Payment Percentage rates are applicable:
| Number of Covered Person and Age of
Covered Person(s) on the Activation Date(1) |
Polaris Income
Builder Daily Flex |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64) |
4.00% / 4.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 - 71) |
5.60% / 5.60% |
| One Covered Person (Age 72 and Older) |
5.85% / 5.85% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59) |
3.00% / 3.00% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 71) |
5.10% / 5.10% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 72 and Older) |
5.35% / 5.35% |
(1)
If there are two Covered Persons, the age on the Activation Date is based on the age of the younger of the two Covered Persons.
Are there investment requirements if I elect the Living Benefit?
Yes, you must allocate your assets, including Purchase Payments and the Continuation Contribution, if any, to a combination of the Secure Value Account and
Variable Portfolios in accordance with the investment requirements.
Please see Investment Requirements
for Optional Living Benefits in
APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the investment requirements associated with this optional Living
Benefit.
With respect to amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account, the crediting interest rate will
never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate specified in your contract. The
crediting interest rate, once established, will not change for each allocation to the Secure Value Account for the duration of the guarantee period. The guarantee period for the Secure Value Account is a one
year period that automatically renews every year from the date of each allocation to
the Secure Value Account, unless the Living Benefit has been cancelled. Each allocation to the Secure Value Account may have different crediting interest rates.
You may not reallocate your money in the Secure Value Account to a DCA Fixed Account or Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable Portfolios at any
time unless the Living Benefit is cancelled.
You may use available DCA Fixed Accounts to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.
How do my investment requirements impact my feature and contract?
Before you elect the Living Benefit, you should carefully consider whether the investment requirements associated with the Living Benefit meet your investment
objectives and risk tolerance.
The investment requirements may reduce the need to rely on the guarantees provided by the Living Benefit because they allocate your investment across asset
classes and potentially limit exposure to market volatility. As a result, you may have
better, or worse, investment returns by allocating your investments more aggressively. Therefore, the investment restrictions reduce the Company’s risk that the contract value will be reduced to zero before
the Covered Person(s)’ death. Withdrawals taken while the contract value is greater
than zero are withdrawals of the contract owner’s own money. Thus, these
investment restrictions would reduce the likelihood that the Company would use its own assets to make payments in connection with the Living Benefit guarantee. Please consult your financial representative regarding which
Variable Portfolios are appropriate for the Living Benefit you elected.
To be considered in Good Order, your allocation instructions for any Purchase Payment as well as
your target allocations if you invest in a DCA Fixed Account must comply with the
investment requirements, provided under Investment
Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT, for the amount not invested in the Secure Value Account. You may not transfer any amounts between the Secure Value Account and the
Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure Value Account may not be used as
a target account if you are using the DCA Program to comply with investment
requirements. You may not request any specific amount of any withdrawal to be deducted
solely from the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount
invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces
the contract value.
We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable
Portfolios are added, deleted, substituted, merged or otherwise reorganized. We will
promptly notify you in writing of any changes to the investment requirements due to additions, deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options. The required allocation
percentage to the Secure Value Account will not change for the life of your contract.
F-4
Rebalancing
and Investment Requirements
We will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly
rebalancing. If rebalancing instructions are not provided, we will align your
rebalancing allocations with your Purchase Payment allocation instructions, or if using
a DCA Fixed Account, your target DCA instructions. We require quarterly rebalancing
because market performance, transfers, and withdrawal activity may result in your contract’s allocations going outside these requirements. Quarterly rebalancing will ensure that your allocation will
continue to comply with the investment requirements for this
feature.
Automatic transfers and/or systematic withdrawals will not result in rebalancing before the next
automatic quarterly rebalancing occurs. The day following any transfer or withdrawal
you initiate, we will rebalance in accordance with your most current and compliant Automatic Asset Rebalancing instructions on file. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you
initiate a transfer, we will update your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect
the percentage allocations resulting from that transfer (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”) which will replace any previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided.
If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions would result in allocations
inconsistent with the investment requirements, we will revert to the last compliant
instructions on file. You can modify your rebalancing instructions, as long as they are
consistent with the investment requirements, at any time by calling the Annuity Service
Center.
We will not rebalance amounts in the Secure Value
Account or DCA Fixed Accounts under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing
Program.
What are the factors used to calculate
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
The Lifetime Income offered by Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex is calculated by considering the factors described below.
First, we determine the Step-up Values which are values used to determine the Income Base. The initial Step-up Value is equal to the contract value. Then, on any day that the contract value is greater than
the Income Base on that day, the Income Base is stepped up to that value. The Step-up
Value is determined daily prior to the Activation Date.
Second, we determine the Income Base, which initially is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase
Payment received and is reduced proportionately for any withdrawals taken prior to the
Activation Date and Excess Withdrawals taken on or after the Activation Date.
Third, if you do not activate Lifetime Income before each Benefit Year Anniversary up to the 10th Benefit Year Anniversary, an annual Minimum Income Base
Percentage of
5% will be applied to Purchase Payments received prior to that Benefit Year Anniversary. These percentages are provided above in the Glossary of Living Benefit Terms. Further, any withdrawals taken prior to activating Lifetime Income will proportionately reduce the Purchase Payments used in the calculation
of the Minimum Income Base.
Fourth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, which represents the maximum percentage of the Income Base that can be withdrawn each Benefit Year
on or after the Activation Date and while the contract value is greater than zero,
without reducing the Income Base. If your contract value is reduced to zero after the Activation Date but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment
Percentage represents the percentage of the Income Base you will receive each Benefit
Year thereafter until the death of the Covered Person(s).
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected
Income Payment Percentage are determined by two factors upon the Activation Date: 1)
whether there is one or two Covered Person(s) and 2) the age of the Covered Person(s).
Please see the tables under “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” above for the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Fifth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year on or after the Activation Date, while the contract value is greater
than zero, without reducing the Income Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is
calculated by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage. If your contract value is reduced to zero after activating Lifetime Income,
but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income
Payment is determined by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals, if any. Excess Withdrawals are withdrawals taken on or after the Activation Date that exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year. An Excess
Withdrawal reduces your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any
Excess Withdrawal reduces the Income Base in the same proportion by which the contract
value is reduced by the Excess Withdrawal. Please see
“What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?”
below.
How do increases to the Income Base work
under Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
Prior to the Activation Date, the Income Base is increased daily to the Step-up Value and by subsequent Purchase Payments, if any.
Additionally, prior to the Benefit Year Anniversary, but during the Minimum Income Base period, the Income Base
F-5
will be increased
to at least the Minimum Income Base on the Benefit Year Anniversary as a specified percentage of the Purchase Payments.
On or after the Activation Date, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the higher Step-up Value since the Activation Date (“first look-back”) or, if
one or more Excess Withdrawals have been taken in that Benefit Year, to the higher Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal.
After the first look-back, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the higher Step-up Value since the last Benefit Year Anniversary. If one or more Excess Withdrawals have
been taken in that Benefit Year, the Income Base is increased on the Benefit Year
Anniversary by looking back to the higher Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal.
What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and the Purchase Payment(s) used in the calculation of the Minimum Income Base may change over
time as a result of the timing and amount of any withdrawals.
Prior to the
Activation Date
Any withdrawal in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base on the date the withdrawal occurs and in
the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the withdrawal. This may
result in a lower amount of Lifetime Income when Lifetime Income withdrawals are activated.
Additionally, any withdrawal taken will reduce each Purchase Payment included in the calculation of
the Minimum Income Base. The reduction to the Purchase Payment(s) will result in a
lowered amount being applied to the Income Base during the Minimum Income Base Period.
However, the Minimum Income Base will continue to increase during the Minimum Income
Base Period prior to the Activation Date. Lastly, any withdrawals will not lock-in your
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage or Protected Income Payment Percentage, if applicable, because your Lifetime Income withdrawals have not been activated.
On or after the Activation
Date
Lifetime Income withdrawals during a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base. However, if you
choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year, you may not carry over the unused amount for withdrawal in subsequent years. Your Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of taking less than the
entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please note that if you
delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals.
Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce the value of or terminate the Living Benefit.
For example, assume that your contract value is $106,000, your Income Base is $120,000, and your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is $6,000. You request a
withdrawal of $11,000. Your Income Base will be reduced to $114,000 as follows:
$120,000 x {1 – [($11,000 - $6,000)/($106,000 - $6,000)]} = $114,000.
Excess Withdrawals reduce your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any Excess
Withdrawal in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base in the same proportion by which
the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount (“Excess Withdrawal”). As a result of a reduction of the Income
Base, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be equal to the reduced Income Base multiplied by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. The last recalculated Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount in a given Benefit Year is available for withdrawal at the beginning
of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than the previous Benefit Year’s Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.
When the contract value is less than the Income Base, Excess Withdrawals will reduce the Income Base by an amount which is greater than the amount of the
Excess Withdrawal.
The impact of withdrawals on specific factors is further explained below:
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not change
for the next year unless your Income Base is increased. If you take an Excess
Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying
the reduced Income Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. This
recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is available for withdrawal at the
beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than your previous Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount.
Protected Income Payment: If the Income Base is
greater than zero, but the contract value has been reduced to zero due to unfavorable
investment performance, deduction of fees, or withdrawals within the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount, we will pay any remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for the
current Benefit Year. Thereafter, you will receive the Protected Income Payment each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) which is calculated by multiplying the Income Base
when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment
Percentage. The Income Base is no longer increased on Benefit Year Anniversaries after
the contract value has been reduced
F-6
to
zero. As a result, the Protected Income Payment is calculated once and will not change. Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?”
below.
Minimum Income Base: If you activate Lifetime Income during the Minimum Income Base Period, the Minimum Income Base will no longer increase on the
next Benefit Year Anniversary.
Look-back Periods: If you take one or more Excess Withdrawals in a Benefit Year, the Income Base may be increased on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back only to the Higher Step-up Value since the
last Excess Withdrawal. This means that if you take an Excess Withdrawal, you lose the
opportunity to lock in a potentially higher Step-up Value that may have occurred prior
to that Excess Withdrawal during that Benefit Year.
All withdrawals from the contract, including Lifetime Income withdrawals, will reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may impact other
provisions of your contract. Unfavorable investment experience and/or fees will also
reduce your contract value. Lifetime Income withdrawals are deducted proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and Secure Value Account in which you are invested.
What is the fee for Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?
The fee for Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base and
deducted from the contract value on a quarterly basis beginning on the first Benefit
Quarter Anniversary following the Benefit Effective Date. In Connecticut, Hawaii, Missouri, New York, Oregon, Texas, Vermont, Virginia and Washington, the charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable
Portfolios only. After the first Benefit Year, on each Benefit Quarter Anniversary, we
will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the previous Benefit Quarter; and (2) determine
the fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Please see fee table below:
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Fee
For contracts purchased between May 24, 2021 and April 30, 2023:
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Initial
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decrease or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
1.45% |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.45% |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The quarterly fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40%/ 4).
For contracts purchased prior to May 24, 2021:
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Initial
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decrease or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
1.35% |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.35% |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The quarterly fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40%/ 4).
The initial Annual
Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. Any fee adjustment is
based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index
(“VIX®”), an index of market volatility
reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the
VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximums identified in the table above.
Should the VIX no longer be appropriate or available, we would substitute the VIX with another measure of market volatility for determining the fee. If we
substitute the VIX, we will notify you; however, the maximum and minimum annual fee
rates described in this prospectus are guaranteed for the life of your contract.
An increase in the Income Base due to attaining a new Step-up Value or an addition of subsequent
Purchase Payment(s) will result in an increase to the amount of the fee you pay since
the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as described above.
If your contract value falls to zero, the fee will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit
is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect
while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender
your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by
multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date when the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter
Anniversaries.
What happens if the contract
value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?
Prior to the Activation Date:
If the contract value is reduced to zero, due to a withdrawal, but the Income Base is greater than zero, the contract will be terminated including any optional benefits and features.
If the contract value is reduced to zero, due to a withdrawal, but the Income Base is greater than zero, the contract will be terminated including any optional benefits and features.
On or after the Activation Date:
If the contract value is reduced to zero, but the Income Base
If the contract value is reduced to zero, but the Income Base
F-7
is greater than
zero, we will pay the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit Year.
Thereafter we will pay the Protected Income Payment over the remaining lifetime of the
Covered Person(s).
If an Excess Withdrawal reduces your contract value to zero, no
further benefits are payable under the contract and your contract along with the Living Benefit will terminate.
If your contract value is reduced to zero, you may no longer make transfers, and no death benefit is payable. Therefore, you should be aware that, particularly
during times of unfavorable investment performance, Excess Withdrawals taken under the
Living Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero, thereby terminating any other benefits of the contract.
When the contract value equals zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, to receive any remaining Living Benefit, you must select one of the
following:
1.
The Protected Income Payment divided equally and paid on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the date of
death of the Covered Person(s); or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
Once you elect an option above, it cannot be changed. If you do
not select an option above, the remaining benefit will be paid as option 1 above. This amount will be divided equally and paid on a quarterly basis until the date of death of the Covered Person(s). No amount is payable
thereafter.
Additional important information
applicable to POLARIS INCOME BUILDER DAILY FLEX
When and how may I elect the Living Benefit?
You may elect the Living Benefit at the time of contract issue (the “Benefit Effective Date”). You may elect to have the Living Benefit cover
only your life or the lives of both you and your spouse, the “Covered Person(s).” If the contract is not owned by a natural person, references to Owner(s) apply to the Annuitant(s). To
elect the Living Benefit, Covered Person(s) must meet the minimum and maximum age
requirements. The age requirements vary depending on the type of contract and the number of Covered Persons. The age requirements for optional death benefits and other optional features may be
different than those listed here. You must meet the age requirements for those features
in order to elect them.
Polaris Income Builder Daily
Flex:
| Number of Owners |
Covered Person | |
| Minimum Age(1) |
Maximum Age(2) | |
| One Owner |
45 |
80 |
| Joint Owners(3) |
45 |
80 |
(1)
Minimum Age must be met by any Covered Person(s) as of the Contract Issue Date.
(2)
Maximum Age cannot be exceeded by any Covered Person(s) as of the date added.
(3) Joint Owners may
choose which of the two Owners will be the Covered Person. The Beneficiary’s age is not considered in determining the maximum issue age of the second Covered Person.
What are the allowable changes to Covered Person(s) prior to the Activation Date?
You may make changes to your Covered Person(s) prior to the Activation Date for specific Life Change Events as defined below by submitting the appropriate
Covered Person(s) Change form. Note: Any Covered Person being added must meet the above
minimum and maximum age requirements.
•
Marriage – If there is one Covered Person, you may add your spouse as the second Covered
Person;
•
Divorce – If there are two Covered Persons, you may remove one of the Covered Persons as a result
of divorce;
•
Death – Upon the death of one of the Covered Persons, you may remove the deceased Covered Person.
What are the allowable changes to Covered Person(s) on the Activation Date?
| Number of Owners and
Covered Persons |
Allowed Changes to Covered Person(s)
on the Activation Date |
| Single Owned Contract &
One Covered Person |
Add Spouse as the second Covered Person |
| Single Owned Contract &
Two Covered Persons(1) |
Remove or Change the second Covered
Person who is not the Single Owner |
| Jointly Owned Contract &
One Covered Person |
Add Joint Owner as the second Covered
Person |
| Jointly Owned Contract &
Two Covered Persons(1) |
Remove or Change either Covered Person |
(1)
You must keep at least one of the original Covered Person(s) if requesting to remove or change either Covered Person. Note: If a second Covered Person or if one of
the original Covered Person(s) is changed, Covered Person(s) must meet the above minimum and maximum age requirements.
Your Lifetime
Income will change as a result of removing or adding a Covered Person(s).
If I own a Qualified contract, how do Required Minimum Distributions impact my Living Benefit?
Prior to the Activation Date, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMD”) will proportionately reduce the Income Base and the Purchase Payments used to calculate the Minimum Income Base.
On or after the Activation Date, as the original Owner, or Continuing Spouse (two Covered Persons elected) electing to treat the annuity contract as their own, if you are taking Required Minimum Distributions
(“RMD”) from this contract, and the amount of the RMD (based only on the
contract to which the feature is elected and using the Uniform Lifetime Table or Joint
Life Expectancy Table from the regulations under the Internal Revenue Code) is greater
than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any given
F-8
Benefit Year, no
portion of the RMD will be treated as an Excess Withdrawal. Please see
“What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex?”above.
Any withdrawal taken before you activate Lifetime Income
(including RMDs) will result in a reduction of the amount of future withdrawals of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (MAWA).
We will provide RMD favorable treatment, in each Benefit Year, to the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount. Any portion of a
withdrawal in a Benefit Year which exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount or RMD amount will be considered an Excess Withdrawal. If
you must take RMD from this contract and want to ensure that these withdrawals are not considered Excess Withdrawals, your total
distribution(s) during the current contract year must not exceed the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount as calculated by our
Annuity Service Center. Therefore, if you plan to take an Excess Withdrawal, then this
feature may not be appropriate for you.
The age at which you must begin taking RMDs is 73 (if you were born January 1, 1951 or later), 72 (if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before
January 1, 1951), or 70 ½ (if you were born before July 1,
1949).
If you are transferring from another company and have already reached the age you must begin taking
RMDs, you should take the current tax year’s RMD prior to the transfer, as we
cannot systematically calculate the RMD as we do not possess the valuation for the previous year end. Further, if you are turning the age you must begin taking RMDs, you should know that although tax
code allows for deferral of the first withdrawal to April of the tax year following
your attainment of the age you must begin taking RMDs, doing so may result in subsequent withdrawals being treated as Excess Withdrawals for that Benefit Year.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected one
Covered Person and if the contract value is greater than zero?
Prior to the Activation Date, if the single Covered Person dies, the surviving Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal Beneficiary may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract and the Living Benefit as a new single Covered Person. The Continuing Spouse will receive the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount upon Lifetime Income Activation and the Protected Income Payment after the contract value
goes to zero. The Continuing Spouse cannot add a
new Covered Person. Upon the death of the Continuing Spouse, the Beneficiary must make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and
the contract.
If an Owner that is not the single Covered Person dies, the surviving Spousal Joint Owner who is the Covered Person may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract and the Living Benefit as the current single Covered Person. The Continuing Spouse will receive the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount upon Lifetime Income Activation and the Protected Income Payment after the contract value goes to zero. The Continuing Spouse cannot add a new Covered Person. Upon the
death of the Continuing Spouse, the Beneficiary must make a death claim, which
terminates the Living Benefit and the contract.
On or after the Activation Date, if the single Covered Person dies, the surviving Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal Beneficiary may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, without the Living Benefit.
If an Owner that is not the single Covered Person dies, the
surviving Spousal Joint Owner who is the Covered Person may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, with the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount and Protected Income Payment.
Note: At any time, if, the contract value goes to zero due to a
withdrawal, the Spousal Beneficiary cannot continue the
contract.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected two
Covered Persons and if the contract value is greater than zero?
Prior to the Activation Date, upon death of the first of the two Covered Persons, the surviving Covered Person (Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal Beneficiary)
may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract as a single Covered Person. The Continuing Spouse will receive the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount upon Lifetime Income Activation and the Protected Income Payment after the contract value goes to zero. The Continuing
Spouse cannot add a new Covered Person. Upon the
F-9
death of the Continuing Spouse, the Beneficiary must make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract.
Note: Prior to the Activation Date, if the contract value goes to zero due to a withdrawal, the
Living Benefit and the contract terminate, and the Spousal Beneficiary cannot continue
the contract.
On or after the Activation Date, upon the first of the two Covered Person’s death, the surviving Covered Person (Spousal Joint Owner or Spousal
Beneficiary) may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, with the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount and Protected Income Payment.
Note: On or after the Activation Date, if the contract value goes
to zero due to: a) a withdrawal taken within the parameters of the Living Benefit, the Spousal Beneficiary can continue the Living Benefit as the surviving Covered Person with the current Protected Income
Payment for their lifetime or b) an Excess Withdrawal, the Living Benefit and contract
will terminate, and the Spousal Beneficiary cannot continue the contract.
The components of the Living Benefit in effect at the time of Spousal Continuation will not change.
The surviving Covered Person can elect to receive withdrawals in accordance with the
provisions of the Living Benefit elected based on the age of the younger Covered Person on the Activation Date. If Lifetime Income was not activated prior to the Spousal Continuation, the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the Protected Income Payment Percentage will be based
on the age of the surviving Covered Person on the Activation Date.
Please see “How does Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex work?” above.
If Spousal Continuation occurs, the Continuing Spouse will continue to receive any increase to the
Income Base for Step-up Values and the Continuing Spouse will also be eligible to
receive the Minimum Income Base on Benefit Year Anniversaries during the Minimum Income Base period if Lifetime Income was not activated during the Minimum Income Base period. On or after the
Activation Date, the Continuing Spouse is no longer eligible for any further
adjustments to the Minimum Income Base.
Can a non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any remaining benefits under my
Living Benefit upon the death of the second
spouse?
No. Upon the death of the Covered Person(s), if the contract value is greater than zero, a
non-spousal Beneficiary must make an election under the death benefit provisions of the
contract, which terminates the Living Benefit.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?
On the Latest Annuity Date if the contract value is greater than zero, You must select one of the following options:
1.
Annuitize by selecting from choices a. or b. below:
a.
elect to begin one of the Annuity Income Payment Options set forth in Your Contract. If you choose this option, We will apply the contract value to provide annuity income payments as described under ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS; or
b.
elect to receive Lifetime Income under Your Living Benefit by means of an Annuitization while any of the last named Covered Person(s) is living. If You have already activated Lifetime Income under the Living Benefit, You will continue to receive Lifetime Income by means of an Annuitization as described below. If you have
not yet activated Lifetime Income, you may activate Lifetime Income by means of an
Annuitization as described under ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS; or
2.
Fully surrender your Contract
Note: Under 1b) upon annuitization you will receive the
applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for a fixed period while you are alive. The
fixed period is determined by dividing the contract value as of the Latest Annuity Date by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. After that fixed period ends, you will receive the Protected
Income Payment, which is calculated by multiplying the Income Base as of the Latest
Annuity Date by then applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage, paid until the death(s) of all Covered Person(s). The amount of each such payment will equal the Protected Income Payment amount divided
according to the payment frequency you selected.
An election under option 1 above converts Your contract value or Lifetime Income amount to an Annuitization payable through a series of payments as
described above. Once the selected Annuitization begins, all other benefits under
Your Contract, will be terminated, transfers may no longer be made, a death benefit is no longer payable, and the Living Benefit Fee will no longer be deducted. If You do not select an option listed above by
the Latest Annuity Date, We will automatically begin making Lifetime Income payments,
which would equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as long as the contract value is greater than zero, or the Protected Income Payment if the contract values goes to zero, in accordance with
option 1b) above, divided equally and paid on a monthly frequency until the death(s) of
all of the last named Covered Person(s).
Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?
The Living Benefit may not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary unless you
surrender your contract. The Living Benefit may be cancelled by you on or
F-10
after the 5th
Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table below.
| Cancellation
Request Received |
Cancellation
Effective Date |
| Years 1-5 |
5th Benefit Year Anniversary |
| Years 5+ |
Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the receipt of the cancellation request |
Once cancellation is effective, the guarantees under the Living Benefits are terminated. In
addition, the investment requirements for the Living Benefit will no longer apply to
your contract. You may not re-elect or reinstate the Living Benefit after
cancellation.
If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of the first Covered Person, the surviving Covered
Person (generally, the Continuing Spouse) may cancel the Living Benefit on or after the
5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table above. Upon the cancellation effective date of the Living Benefit, there will be one final fee
applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the cancellation occurs, on the same Benefit
Quarter Anniversary. Thereafter, the fee will no longer be charged.
What happens to the Secure Value Account and Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions if I elect to cancel Polaris Income Builder
Daily Flex?
Amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will be automatically transferred to the 1-Year Fixed
Account, if available. If the 1-Year Fixed Account is not available, amounts will be
transferred to a money market portfolio. From the day following the automated transfer from the Secure Value Account, you may transfer this amount to another available investment option under the
contract for a period of 90 days during which the transfer will not count against the
annual number of free transfers or U.S. Mail transfers, or incur a transfer fee. You may move your funds out of the money market portfolio at any time.
The Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program and your instructions on file will not be terminated or changed upon cancellation of your Living Benefit.
Amounts transferred from the Secure Value Account into the 1-Year Fixed Account or a
money market portfolio will not impact the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions on file and that transfer will not result in new Default Rebalancing Instructions. On or after cancellation
of these features, you may provide new rebalancing instructions or you may choose to
terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program by contacting the Annuity Service Center.
Are there circumstances under which my Living Benefit will be automatically cancelled?
The Living Benefit and Lifetime Income will automatically be cancelled upon the occurrence of one of the following:
(i)
Annuitization of the contract; or
(ii)
Termination or surrender of the contract; or
(iii)
A death benefit is paid resulting in the contract being terminated; or
(iv)
Any withdrawal prior to the Activation Date that reduces the Contract Value to zero; or
(v)
On or after the Activation Date, any Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value and Income Base to zero; or
(vi)
Death of the Covered Person, if only one is elected after Lifetime Income has been activated; or, if two Covered Persons are elected, death of the
surviving Covered Person; or
(vii)
A change that removes all of the original Covered Persons from the contract; or
(viii)A Change of the Owner or Assignment; or
(ix)
You elect to cancel Your Living Benefit.
If a change of ownership occurs from a natural person to a
non-natural entity, the original natural Owner(s) must also be the Annuitant(s) after
the ownership change to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. A change of ownership
from a non-natural entity to a natural person can only occur if the new natural
Owner(s) was the original natural Annuitant(s) in order to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. Any ownership change is contingent upon prior review and approval by the
Company.
Any amounts that we may pay under the feature in
excess of your contract value are subject to the Company’s financial strength and
claims-paying ability.
Polaris Income Builder Daily
If your contract was issued prior to September 9, 2019 and you elected the Polaris Income Builder Daily Living Benefit, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after
the 1st contract anniversary from your contract issue date.
The Polaris Income Builder Daily Living Benefit was available from September 10, 2018 through September 8, 2019. Effective September 9, 2019, Polaris
Income Builder Daily is no longer available for election.
Living Benefit Defined Terms
Anniversary Value
The contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary. The Continuation Contribution, if applicable, is included in the calculation of Anniversary
Values.
Benefit Effective Date
The date the Living Benefit is elected. The Benefit Effective Date is the same as the contract issue date.
Benefit Quarter
Each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
F-11
Benefit Quarter Anniversary
The date following each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date. If the
next Benefit Quarter Anniversary has no corresponding date, then the Benefit Quarter
Anniversary will be deemed to be the following day.
For example, if a Benefit Quarter Anniversary is November 29, the
next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would be February 29 of the following year; however, in a non-Leap Year, there is no corresponding date. Therefore, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would
be March 1.
Benefit Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Year Anniversary
The date on which each Benefit Year begins.
Contract Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the contract issue date.
Covered Person(s)
The person, or persons, whose lifetime withdrawals are guaranteed under the Living Benefit.
Excess Withdrawal
Any withdrawal, or portion of a withdrawal, that is taken in a Benefit Year that exceeds the greater
of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the Required Minimum Distribution
amount as calculated by the Annuity Service Center. An Excess Withdrawal will cause the Income Base and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount to be recalculated.
Income Base
The Income Base is used to determine the fee and the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year without reducing the Income Base. The Income
Base is also used to determine the amount paid each year over the remaining lifetime of
the Covered Person(s) after the contract value is reduced to zero.
Investment Requirements
We will allocate a certain percentage of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if
any, to a fixed interest rate account (the “Secure Value Account”). The
remaining amount of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, must
be allocated by you in accordance with the investment options outlined under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE
UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
The maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero without reducing the Income Base.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount available for withdrawal each
Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero.
Minimum Income Base
The guaranteed minimum amount is specified as a percentage of the first Benefit Year’s
Purchase Payments and is available during the Minimum Income Base period provided no
withdrawals are taken prior to each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Minimum Income Base period as follows:
| Minimum Income Base Period
(if no withdrawals are taken
prior to the Benefit Year
Anniversary) |
Minimum Income Base
Percentage
(as a Percentage of the 1st
Benefit Year’s Purchase
Payment) |
| 1st Benefit Year Anniversary |
105% |
| 2nd Benefit Year Anniversary |
110% |
| 3rd Benefit Year Anniversary |
115% |
| 4th Benefit Year Anniversary |
120% |
| 5th Benefit Year Anniversary |
125% |
| 6th Benefit Year Anniversary |
130% |
| 7th Benefit Year Anniversary |
135% |
| 8th Benefit Year Anniversary |
140% |
| 9th Benefit Year Anniversary |
145% |
| 10th Benefit Year Anniversary |
150% |
The Minimum Income Base is determined on each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Minimum Income Base Period. The Minimum Income Base equals the Minimum
Income Base percentage multiplied by Purchase Payments as long as no withdrawals are
taken prior to that Benefit Year Anniversary. Upon your first withdrawal during the
Minimum Income Base period, you are no longer eligible for adjustments to your Income
Base based on the above Minimum Income Base Table.
Protected Income Payment
The amount to be paid each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the
contract value is reduced to zero but the Income Base is still greater than zero or if
the Latest Annuity Date has been reached.
Protected Income Payment Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Protected Income Payment.
Step-up Value
A value used to determine the Income Base that is equal to the contract value on any day if it is greater than the Income Base on that day. This value is
determined daily.
How does Polaris Income
Builder Daily work?
Polaris Income Builder Daily’s Income Base is increased by locking in Step-up Values. The
Income Base is the basis for the Covered Person(s)’ guaranteed lifetime benefit which must be taken in a series of withdrawals. The Income Base
F-12
is initially equal
to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments after the first contract anniversary. Until a
withdrawal has been taken, the Income Base is increased to the Step-up Value immediately.
After the first withdrawal, while both the Income Base and the contract values are
greater than zero, the Income Base may only be increased on the Benefit Year Anniversary
dates, looking back at the prior Benefit Year’s Step-up Values. In addition, if
you do not take any withdrawals prior to a Benefit Year Anniversary during the Minimum Income Base period, the Income Base will be eligible to increase to at least the Minimum Income Base
according to the table shown above. The Minimum Income Base is determined on each
Benefit Year Anniversary during the Minimum Income Base period. The Minimum Income Base equals the Minimum Income Base percentage multiplied by the Purchase Payments as long as no withdrawals are
taken prior to that Benefit Year Anniversary. However, if you take a withdrawal during
the Minimum Income Base Period, you are no longer eligible for any further adjustments to your Minimum Income Base. Please see “How can the Income Base
be increased for Polaris Income Builder Daily?” below.
What determines the amount I can receive each year?
The amount that you receive depends on whether there are
one or two Covered Person(s), the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of the first
withdrawal and whether your contract value is greater than or equal to zero.
While the contract value is greater than zero, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage represents
the percentage of your Income Base used to calculate the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount that you may withdraw each Benefit Year without decreasing your Income Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage differs depending on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s) and
the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of first withdrawal.
If your contract value has been reduced to zero or the Latest Annuity Date is reached, the Protected
Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to
calculate the Protected Income Payment that you will receive each year over the remaining
lifetime of the Covered Person(s). The Protected Income Payment Percentage differs
depending on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s) and the age of the Covered
Person(s) at the time of the first withdrawal. Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than
zero?”and “What happens to my
Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?”below.
Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage Table
The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.
If your contract was purchased between September 10, 2018 and September 8, 2019, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder Daily Living Benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal and Protected Income
Payment Percentage rates are applicable:
| Number of Covered Person and Age of
Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1) |
Polaris Income
Builder Daily |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64) |
4.00% / 4.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 - 71) |
5.50% / 5.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 72 and Older) |
5.75% / 5.75% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59) |
3.00% / 3.00% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64) |
3.50% / 3.50% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 71) |
5.00% / 5.00% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 72 and Older) |
5.25% / 5.25% |
(1)
If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered Person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age at first withdrawal is
based on the age of the younger of the Two Covered Persons.
Are there investment requirements if I elect the Living Benefit?
Yes, you must allocate your assets, including Purchase Payments and the Continuation Contribution, if any, to a combination of the Secure Value Account and
Variable Portfolios in accordance with the investment requirements.
Please see Investment Requirements
for Optional Living Benefits in
APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the investment requirements associated with this optional Living
Benefit.
With respect to amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account, the crediting interest rate will never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate
specified in your contract. The crediting interest rate, once established, will not
change for each allocation to the Secure Value Account for the duration of the guarantee period. The guarantee period for the Secure Value Account is a one year period that automatically renews every year from
the date of each allocation to the Secure Value Account, unless the Living Benefit has
been cancelled. Each allocation to the Secure Value Account may have different crediting interest rates. You may not reallocate your money in the Secure Value Account to a DCA or Fixed Account, if
available, or to the Variable Portfolios at any time unless the Living Benefit is
cancelled.
You may use available DCA Fixed Accounts to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.
F-13
How do my
investment requirements impact my feature and contract?
Before you elect the Living Benefit, you should carefully consider whether the investment
requirements associated with the Living Benefit meets your investment objectives and
risk tolerance.
The investment requirements may reduce the need to rely on the guarantees provided by the Living
Benefit because they allocate your investment across asset classes and potentially
limit exposure to market volatility. As a result, you may have better, or worse,
investment returns by allocating your investments more aggressively. Therefore, the investment restrictions reduce the Company's risk that the Contract Value will be reduced to zero before the
Covered Person(s)’ death. Withdrawals taken while Contract Value is greater than
zero are withdrawals of the contract owner’s own money. Thus, these investment restrictions would reduce the likelihood that the Company would use its own assets to make payments in connection with the Living
Benefit guarantee.
To be considered in Good Order, your allocation instructions for any Purchase Payment as well as your target allocations if you invest in a DCA Fixed Account
must comply with the investment requirements, provided under Investment Requirements for
Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX
A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT, for
the amount not invested in the Secure Value Account. You may not transfer any amounts
between the Secure Value Account and the Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure Value Account may not be used as a target account if you are using the DCA Program to comply with
investment requirements. You may not request any specific amount of any withdrawal to
be deducted solely from the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the contract
value.
We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable
Portfolios are added, deleted, substituted, merged or otherwise reorganized. We will
promptly notify you of any changes to the investment requirements due to deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options.
Rebalancing and Investment Requirements
We will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly
rebalancing. If rebalancing instructions are not provided, we will align your
rebalancing allocations with your Purchase Payment allocation instructions, or if using
a DCA Fixed Account, your target DCA instructions. We require quarterly rebalancing
because market performance and transfer and withdrawal activity may result in your contract’s allocations going outside these requirements. Quarterly rebalancing will ensure that your allocation will
continue to comply with the investment requirements for this
feature.
Automatic transfers and/or systematic withdrawals will not result in rebalancing before the next automatic quarterly rebalancing occurs. The day following any
transfer or withdrawal you initiate, we will rebalance in accordance with your most
current and compliant Automatic Asset Rebalancing instructions on file. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you initiate a transfer, we will update your ongoing
rebalancing instructions to reflect the percentage allocations resulting from that
transfer (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”) which will replace any
previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided.
If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions
would result in allocations inconsistent with the investment requirements, we will
revert to the last compliant instructions on file. You can modify your rebalancing
instructions, as long as they are consistent with the investment requirements, at any
time by calling the Annuity Service Center.
We will not rebalance amounts in the Secure Value Account or DCA Fixed Accounts under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.
What are the factors used to calculate Polaris Income Builder Daily?
The benefit offered by Polaris Income Builder Daily is calculated by considering the factors described below.
First, we determine the Step-up Values.
Second, we determine the Income Base, which initially is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase Payment received prior to the first contract anniversary, and
is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals.
Third, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, which represents the maximum percentage of the Income Base that can be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than
zero, without reducing the Income Base. If your contract value is reduced to zero but
your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of the Income Base you will receive each Benefit Year thereafter until the death of the Covered Person(s).
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage are determined by two factors: 1) whether there is one or two Covered
Person(s); and 2) the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of first
withdrawal.
Please see the table under “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” above for the applicable Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Fourth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract
value is greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base. The
F-14
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount is calculated by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage. If your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income
Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment is determined by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals. Please see “What are
the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily?” below.
How can the Income Base be increased for Polaris Income Builder Daily?
If no withdrawals have been taken, the Income Base is increased daily to the Step-up Value.
Additionally, if no withdrawals are taken prior to the Benefit Year Anniversary during the Minimum Income Base period, the Income Base will be increased to
at least the Minimum Income Base on the Benefit Year Anniversary as a specified
percentage of the first Benefit Year’s Purchase Payments.
After the first withdrawal has been
taken, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the highest Step-up Value since the first withdrawal (“first look-back”)
or, if one or more Excess Withdrawals have been taken in that Benefit Year, to the
highest Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal.
After the first look-back, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the highest Step-up Value since the last Benefit Year Anniversary or, if one or more Excess Withdrawals
have been taken in that Benefit Year, to the highest Step-up Value since the last
Excess Withdrawal.
Please see “What are the effects of
withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily?” below.
How do increases and decreases in the Income Base impact the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount?
Increases in the Income Base
Every time the Income Base is increased, the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying the increased Income Base
by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. Please see
“How can
the Income Base be increased for Polaris Income Builder Daily?” above.
Decreases in the Income Base
Excess Withdrawals reduce your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any Excess
Withdrawal in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base in the same proportion by which
the contract value is reduced by the Excess Withdrawal. As a result of a reduction of the Income Base, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be equal to the reduced Income Base multiplied
by the
applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. The last recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount in a given Benefit Year is available for withdrawal at the beginning of the next
Benefit Year and may be lower than the previous Benefit Year’s Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. When the contract value is less than the Income Base, Excess Withdrawals will reduce the
Income Base by an amount which is greater than the amount of the Excess Withdrawal.
Please see “What are the
effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily?” below.
What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder Daily?
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount and the Income Base can change over time as a result of the timing and amount of withdrawals. However, if you take
a withdrawal during the Minimum Income Base Period, you are no longer eligible for any
further adjustments to your Minimum Income Base.
Withdrawals during a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base. However, if
you choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year,
you may not carry over the unused amount for withdrawal in subsequent years. Your Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of
taking less than the entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please
note that if you delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals.
Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce the value of or
terminate the Living Benefit.
The impact of withdrawals on specific factors is further
explained below:
Income Base: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year exceeds the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base will be reduced for those withdrawals. For each Excess Withdrawal taken, the
Income Base is reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by
the amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. This means that the
reduction in the Income Base could be more or less than a dollar-for-dollar reduction.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is recalculated each time there is a change in the Income Base.
Accordingly, if the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount for that year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not
change for the next year unless your Income Base is increased. If you take an Excess
Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying
the reduced Income Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal
F-15
Percentage. This recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is available for withdrawal at the beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be
lower than your previous Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.
Protected Income Payment: If the Income Base is greater than zero, but the contract value has been reduced to zero due to unfavorable investment
performance, deduction of fees, or withdrawals within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount, we will pay any remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for the current
Benefit Year. Thereafter, you will receive the Protected Income Payment each year over
the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) which is calculated by multiplying the
Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income
Payment Percentage. The Income Base is no longer increased on Benefit Year
Anniversaries after the contract value has been reduced to zero. As a result, the
Protected Income Payment is calculated once and will not change.
Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?”
below.
Look-back Periods: If you take one or more Excess Withdrawals in a Benefit Year, the Income Base may be increased on the Benefit Year Anniversary by
looking back only to the highest Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal. This
means that if you take an Excess Withdrawal, you lose the opportunity to lock in a
potentially higher Step-up Value that may have occurred prior to that Excess Withdrawal
during that Benefit Year.
All withdrawals from the contract, including withdrawals taken under this Living Benefit, will reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may
impact other provisions of your contract. Unfavorable investment experience and/or fees
will also reduce your contract value.
What is
the fee for Polaris Income Builder Daily?
The fee for Polaris Income Builder Daily is calculated as a
percentage of the Income Base and deducted from the contract value on a quarterly basis
beginning on the first Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the Benefit Effective
Date. In Hawaii, Missouri, New York, Oregon, Texas and Washington, the charge will be deducted pro-rata
from Variable Portfolios only. After the first Benefit Year, on each Benefit Quarter
Anniversary, we will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the previous Benefit Quarter; and
(2) determine the
fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Please see fee table below:
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Initial
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decrease or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
1.30% |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.45% |
2.50% |
0.60% |
±0.40% |
*
The quarterly fee rate will not decrease or increase by more than 0.10% each quarter (0.40% / 4).
The initial Annual
Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. Any fee adjustment is
based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index
(“VIX®”), an index of market volatility
reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the
VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximums identified in the table above.
Should the VIX no longer be appropriate or available, we would substitute the VIX with another measure of market volatility for determining the fee. If we
substitute the VIX, we will notify you; however, the maximum and minimum annual fee
rates described in this prospectus are guaranteed for the life of your contract.
An increase in the Income Base due to attaining a new Step-up Value or an addition of subsequent
Purchase Payment prior to the first contract anniversary will result in an increase to
the amount of the fee you pay since the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as described above.
If your contract value falls to zero, the fee will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit
is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect
while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender
your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by
multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date when the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter
Anniversaries.
What happens if the contract
value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?
If the contract value is reduced to zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, we will pay the
remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit Year. Thereafter we will
pay the Protected Income Payment over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s).
F-16
If
an Excess Withdrawal reduces your contract value to zero, no further benefits are payable under the contract and your contract along with the Living Benefit will
terminate.
If your contract value is reduced to zero, you may no longer make transfers, and no death benefit is payable. Therefore, you should be aware that, particularly
during times of unfavorable investment performance, withdrawals taken under the Living
Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero, thereby terminating any other benefits of the contract.
When the contract value equals zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, to receive any
remaining Living Benefit, you must select one of the following:
1.
The Protected Income Payment divided equally and paid on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the date of
death of the Covered Person(s); or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
Once you elect an option above, it cannot be changed. If you do
not select an option above, the remaining benefit will be paid as option 1 above. This amount will be divided equally and paid on a quarterly basis until the date of death of the Covered Person(s). No amount is payable
thereafter.
Additional important information
applicable to Polaris Income Builder Daily
If I own a Qualified contract, how do Required Minimum Distributions impact my
Living Benefit?
As the original Owner, or Continuing Spouse (two Covered Persons elected) electing to treat the
annuity contract as their own, if you are taking required minimum distributions
(“RMD”) from this contract, and the amount of the RMD (based only on the
contract to which the feature is elected and using the Uniform Lifetime Table or Joint Life Expectancy Table from the regulations under the Internal Revenue Code) is greater than the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount in any given Benefit Year, no portion of the RMD will be
treated as an Excess Withdrawal.
We will provide RMD favorable treatment, in each Benefit Year, to
the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount. Any portion of a withdrawal in a Benefit Year which exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or RMD amount
will be considered an Excess Withdrawal. If you must take RMD from this contract and want to ensure that these withdrawals
are not considered Excess Withdrawals, your total distribution(s) during the current contract year must not exceed the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount or the RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center.
Therefore, if you plan to take an Excess Withdrawal, then this feature may not be appropriate for you.
The age at which you must begin taking RMDs is 73 (if you were born January 1, 1951 or later), 72 (if you were
born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951), or 70 ½ (if you were born before July 1, 1949).
If you are transferring from another company and have already reached the age you must begin taking RMDs, you should take the current tax year’s RMD
prior to the transfer, as we cannot systematically calculate the RMD as we do not
possess the valuation for the previous year end. Further, if you are turning the age you must begin taking RMDs, you should know that although tax code allows for deferral of the first withdrawal to April of
the tax year following your attainment of the age you must begin taking RMDs, doing so
may result in subsequent withdrawals being treated as Excess Withdrawals for that Benefit Year.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected one Covered Person and if the contract value is greater
than zero?
If there is one Covered Person and that person dies, the surviving spousal joint Owner or spousal
beneficiary may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, without the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee.
What
happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected two Covered Persons and if the contract value is greater than zero?
If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of one Covered Person, the surviving Covered Person may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract, with the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee for two Covered Persons.
Note: If the
contract value goes to zero due to: a) a withdrawal taken within the parameters of the Living Benefit, the Spousal Beneficiary can continue the Living Benefit as the surviving Covered Person
with the current Protected Income Payment for their lifetime or b) an Excess
Withdrawal, the Living Benefit and contract will terminate, and the Spousal Beneficiary
cannot continue the contract.
The components of the Living Benefit in effect at the time of
spousal continuation will not change. The surviving Covered Person can elect to receive withdrawals in accordance with the provisions of the Living Benefit elected based on the age of the younger Covered
Person at the time the first withdrawal was taken. If no withdrawals were taken prior
to the spousal continuation, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the Protected Income Payment Percentage will be based on the age of the surviving Covered Person at the time the first
withdrawal is taken. Please see “How does Polaris Income Builder Daily work?” above.
If spousal continuation occurs, the Continuing Spouse will continue to receive any increase to the
Income Base for
F-17
Step-up Values and
the Continuing Spouse will also be eligible to receive the Minimum Income Base on Benefit
Year Anniversaries during the Minimum Base period if no withdrawal is taken during the
Minimum Income Base period. If a withdrawal is taken, the Continuing Spouse is no
longer eligible for any further adjustments to the Minimum Income Base. The Minimum Income Base is equal to the Minimum Income Base percentage multiplied by the first Benefit Year’s Purchase Payments
as described under “How do increases to the Income Base work under Polaris Income Builder Daily?”
Can a non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any
remaining benefits under my Living Benefit upon the death of the second
spouse?
No. Upon the death of the Covered Person(s), if the contract value is greater than zero, a
non-spousal Beneficiary must make an election under the death benefit provisions of the
contract, which terminates the Living Benefit.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?
On the Latest Annuity Date if the contract value is greater than zero, You must select one of the
following options:
1.
Annuitize by selecting from choices a. or b. below:
a.
elect to begin one of the Annuity Income Payment Options set forth in Your Contract. If you choose this option, We will apply the contract value to provide annuity income payments as described under ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS; or
b.
elect to receive the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as of the Latest Annuity Date; or
2.
Fully surrender your Contract
Note: Under 1b) upon annuitization you will receive the
applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for a fixed period while you are alive. The
fixed period is determined by dividing the contract value as of the Latest Annuity Date by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. After that fixed period ends, you will receive the Protected
Income Payment, which is calculated by multiplying the Income Base as of the Latest
Annuity Date by then applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage, paid until the death(s) of all Covered Person(s). The amount of each such payment will equal the Protected Income Payment amount divided
according to the payment frequency you selected.
An election under option 1 above converts Your contract value to an Annuitization payable through a series of payments as described above. Once the selected
Annuitization begins, all other benefits under Your Contract, will be terminated,
transfers may no longer be made, a death benefit is no longer payable, and the Living Benefit Fee will no longer be deducted. If You do not select an option listed above by the Latest Annuity
Date, We will
automatically begin making payments, which would equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as
long as the contract value is greater than zero, or the Protected Income Payment if the
contract values goes to zero, in accordance with option 1b) above, divided equally and paid on a monthly frequency until the death(s) of all of the last named Covered Person(s).
Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?
The Living Benefit may not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary unless you
surrender your contract. The Living Benefit may be cancelled by you on or after the 5th
Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table below.
| Cancellation
Request Received |
Cancellation
Effective Date |
| Years 1-5 |
5th Benefit Year Anniversary |
| Years 5+ |
Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the receipt of the cancellation request |
Once cancellation is effective, the guarantees under the Living Benefit are terminated. In addition,
the investment requirements for the Living Benefit will no longer apply to your
contract. You may not re-elect or reinstate the Living Benefit after cancellation.
If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of the first Covered Person, the surviving Covered
Person (generally, the Continuing Spouse) may cancel the Living Benefit on or after the
5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table above. Upon the cancellation effective date of the Living Benefit, there will be one final fee
applicable to the same Benefit Quarter in which the cancellation occurs, on the Benefit
Quarter Anniversary. Thereafter, the fee will no longer be charged.
What happens to the Secure Value Account and Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions if I elect to cancel my Living
Benefit?
Amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will be automatically transferred to the 1-Year Fixed
Account, if available. If the 1-Year Fixed Account is not available, amounts will be
transferred to a money market portfolio. From the day following the automated transfer from the Secure Value Account, you may transfer this amount to another available investment option under the
contract for a period of 90 days during which the transfer will not count against the
annual number of free transfers or U.S. Mail transfers, or incur a transfer fee. You may move your funds out of the money market portfolio at any time.
The Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program and your instructions on file will not be terminated or changed upon cancellation of your Living Benefit.
Amounts transferred from the Secure Value Account into the 1-Year Fixed Account or a
money market portfolio will not impact the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions on file and that transfer will not result in new Default Rebalancing
F-18
Instructions. On or
after cancellation of these features, you may provide new rebalancing instructions or you may choose to terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program by contacting the Annuity Service
Center.
Are there circumstances under which my Living
Benefit will be automatically cancelled?
The Living Benefit will automatically be cancelled upon
the occurrence of one of the following:
(i)
Annuitization of the contract; or
(ii)
Termination or surrender of the contract; or
(iii)
A death benefit is paid resulting in the contract being terminated; or
(iv)
An Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value and Income Base to zero; or
(v)
Death of the Covered Person, if only one is elected; or, if two Covered Persons are elected, death of the surviving Covered Person; or
(vi)
A change that removes all Covered Persons from the contract except as noted below under “Are there circumstances under which guaranteed withdrawals for two Covered Persons, if elected, terminate for one of the Covered Persons?”; or
(vii)
A Change of the Owner or Assignment; or
(viii)You elect to cancel Your Living Benefit.
If a change of ownership occurs from a natural person to a non-natural entity, the original natural Owner(s) must also be the Annuitant(s) after the ownership
change to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. A change of ownership from a
non-natural entity to a natural person can only occur if the new natural Owner(s) was the original natural Annuitant(s) in order to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. Any ownership change is
contingent upon prior review and approval by the Company.
Are there circumstances under which guaranteed
withdrawals for two Covered Persons, if elected, terminate for one of
the Covered Persons?
Under any of the following circumstances, the Living Benefit will
provide a guarantee for one Covered Person and not the lifetime of the other Covered Person:
1.
One of the two Covered Persons is removed from the contract, due to reasons other than death; or
2.
The original spousal joint Owners or Spousal Beneficiary, who are the Covered Persons, are no longer married at the time of death of the first
spouse.
Under these
circumstances, the fee for the Living Benefit based on two Covered Persons will continue to be charged and the guaranteed withdrawals based on two Covered Persons are payable for one Covered Person only.
However, the remaining Covered Person may choose to terminate the Living Benefit as
described under “Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?”
above.
Any amounts that we
may pay under the feature in excess of your contract value are subject to the Company’s financial strength and claims-paying ability.
POLARIS INCOME BUILDER
If your contract was issued prior to September 10, 2018 and you elected the Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit (formerly called “SunAmerica Income Builder”), the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected.
The Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit was available from May 1, 2013 through September 9, 2018.
Effective September 10, 2018, Polaris Income Builder is no longer available for
election.
Living Benefit Defined Terms
Anniversary Value
The contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary. The Continuation Contribution, if applicable, is
included in the calculation of Anniversary Values.
Benefit Effective Date
The date the Living Benefit is elected. The Benefit Effective Date is the same as the contract issue
date.
Benefit Quarter
Each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Quarter Anniversary
The date following each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date. If the
next Benefit Quarter Anniversary has no corresponding date, then the Benefit Quarter
Anniversary will be deemed to be the following day.
For example, if a Benefit Quarter Anniversary is November 29, the
next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would be February 29 of the following year; however, in a non-Leap Year, there is no corresponding date. Therefore, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would
be March 1.
Benefit Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Year Anniversary
The date on which each Benefit Year begins.
Contract Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the contract issue date.
Covered Person(s)
The person, or persons, whose lifetime withdrawals are guaranteed under the Living Benefit.
Excess Withdrawal
Any withdrawal, or portion of a withdrawal, that is taken in a Benefit Year that exceeds the greater
of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the Required Minimum Distribution
amount as calculated by the Annuity Service
F-19
Center. An
Excess Withdrawal will cause the Income Base, Income Credit Base, if applicable, and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount to be recalculated.
Highest Anniversary Value
The current Anniversary Value that is greater than (1) all previous Anniversary Values; and (2)
Purchase Payments received prior to the first contract anniversary.
Income Base
The Income Base is used to determine the fee and the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each
Benefit Year without reducing the Income Base and Income Credit Base, if applicable.
The Income Base is also used to determine the amount paid each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the contract value is reduced to zero.
Income Credit
An amount that may be added to the Income Base during the Income Credit Period as shown in the following table:
| Income Credit
(as a percentage
of the Income
Credit Base) |
Income
Credit Availability |
| 6% |
Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is eliminated in years
any withdrawal is taken |
Income Credit Base
The Income Credit Base is used solely as a basis for calculating the Income Credit during the Income
Credit Period.
Income Credit Period
The period of time over which we calculate the Income Credit, which is the first 12 Benefit
Years.
Investment Requirements
We will allocate 10% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, to a fixed interest rate account (the “Secure Value
Account”). The remaining 90% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, must be allocated by you in accordance with the investment options outlined under Investment Requirements for
Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
The maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than
zero without reducing the Income Base and the Income Credit Base, if applicable.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount available for withdrawal each Benefit Year while the contract value
is greater than zero.
Protected Income Payment
The amount to be paid each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the
contract value is reduced to zero but the Income Base is still greater than zero or if
the Latest Annuity Date has been reached.
Protected Income Payment Percentage
The percentage used to determine the Protected Income Payment.
How does Polaris Income Builder work?
Polaris Income Builder locks in the greater of two values to determine the Income Base. The Income Base is the basis for the Covered Person(s)’ guaranteed
lifetime benefit which must be taken in a series of withdrawals. The Income Base is
initially equal to the first Purchase Payment. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the first contract anniversary. While the Income Base is greater than zero, the Income Base is
automatically locked in on each Benefit Year Anniversary, to the greater of (1) the
Highest Anniversary Value, or (2) the current Income Base increased by any available
Income Credit. Please see
“How can
the Income Base and Income Credit Base be increased?” below.
What determines the amount I can receive each year?
The amount that you receive depends on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s), the age of
the Covered Person(s) at the time of the first withdrawal and whether your contract
value is greater than or equal to zero.
While the contract value is greater than zero, the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to calculate the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount that you may withdraw each Benefit Year without decreasing your Income Base and
Income Credit Base, if applicable. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage differs
depending on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s) and the age of the Covered
Person(s) at the time of first withdrawal.
If your contract value has been reduced to zero or the Latest Annuity Date is reached, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of
your Income Base used to calculate the Protected Income Payment that you will receive
each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s). The Protected Income
Payment Percentage differs depending on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s)
and the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of the first withdrawal. Please see “What happens if the contract
value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?”and “What happens to my
Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?”below.
F-20
Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage Table
If your contract was purchased between March 10, 2014 and September 9, 2018, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal and Protected Income Payment
Percentage rates are applicable:
| Number of Covered
Persons and Age of
Covered Person at First
Withdrawal* |
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal
Percentage |
Protected Income
Payment Percentage |
| One Covered Person
(Age 64 and Younger) |
4.0% |
4.0% |
| One Covered Person
(Ages 65 and older) |
5.2% |
5.2% |
| Two Covered Persons
(Age 64 and Younger) |
3.5% |
3.5% |
| Two Covered Persons
(Ages 65 and older) |
4.7% |
4.7% |
*
If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered Person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age at first withdrawal is based on
the age of the younger of Two Covered Persons.
If your contract
was issued prior to March 10, 2014 and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and
Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are
applicable:
| Number of Covered
Persons and Age of
Covered Person at First
Withdrawal* |
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal
Percentage |
Protected Income
Payment Percentage |
| One Covered Person
(Age 64 and Younger) |
4.0% |
4.0% |
| One Covered Person
(Ages 65 and older) |
5.0% |
5.0% |
| Two Covered Persons
(Age 64 and Younger) |
3.5% |
3.5% |
| Two Covered Persons
(Ages 65 and older) |
4.5% |
4.5% |
*
If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered Person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age at first withdrawal is based on
the age of the younger of Two Covered Persons.
Are there
investment requirements if I elect a Living
Benefit?
Yes, you must allocate your assets, including Purchase Payments and the Continuation Contribution, if any, to a combination of the Secure Value Account and
Variable Portfolios in accordance with the investment requirements.
Please see Investment Requirements
for Optional Living Benefits in
APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the investment requirements associated with this optional Living
Benefit.
With respect to amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account, the crediting interest rate will
never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate specified in your contract. The
crediting interest rate, once established, will
not change for each allocation to the Secure Value Account for the duration of the guarantee period.
The guarantee period for the Secure Value Account is a one year period that
automatically renews every year from the date of each allocation to the Secure Value Account, unless the Living Benefit has been cancelled. Each allocation to the Secure Value Account may have different crediting
interest rates. You may not reallocate your money in the Secure Value Account to a DCA
or Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable Portfolios at any time unless the Living Benefit is cancelled.
You may use available DCA Fixed Accounts to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.
How do my investment requirements impact my feature and contract?
The investment requirements may reduce the need to rely on the guarantees provided by the Living
Benefit because they allocate your investment across asset classes and potentially
limit exposure to market volatility. As a result, you may have better, or worse,
investment returns by allocating your investments more aggressively. Therefore, the investment restrictions reduce the Company's risk that the Contract Value will be reduced to zero before the
Covered Person(s)’ death. Thus, these investment restrictions would reduce the
likelihood that the Company would use its own assets to make payments in connection
with the Living Benefit guarantee.
To be considered in Good Order, your allocation instructions for any Purchase Payment as well as your target allocations if you invest in a DCA Fixed Account
must comply with the investment requirements, provided under Investment Requirements for
Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A
– UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT, for the
amount not invested in the Secure Value Account. You may not transfer any amounts
between the Secure Value Account and the Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure Value Account may not be used as a target account if you are using the DCA Program to comply with
investment requirements. You may not request any specific amount of any withdrawal to
be deducted solely from the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the contract
value.
We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable
Portfolios are added, deleted, substituted, merged or otherwise reorganized. We will
promptly notify you of any changes to the investment requirements due to deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options.
F-21
Rebalancing
and Investment Requirements
We will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly
rebalancing. If rebalancing instructions are not provided, we will align your
rebalancing allocations with your Purchase Payment allocation instructions, or if using
a DCA Fixed Account, your target DCA instructions. We require quarterly rebalancing
because market performance and transfer and withdrawal activity may result in your contract’s allocations going outside these requirements. Quarterly rebalancing will ensure that your allocation will
continue to comply with the investment requirements for this
feature.
Automatic transfers and/or systematic withdrawals will not result in rebalancing before the next
automatic quarterly rebalancing occurs. The day following any transfer or withdrawal
you initiate, we will rebalance in accordance with your most current and compliant Automatic Asset Rebalancing instructions on file. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you
initiate a transfer, we will update your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect
the percentage allocations resulting from that transfer (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”) which will replace any previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided.
If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions would result in allocations
inconsistent with the investment requirements, we will revert to the last compliant
instructions on file. You can modify your rebalancing instructions, as long as they are
consistent with the investment requirements, at any time by calling the Annuity Service
Center. Please see AUTOMATIC ASSET REBALANCING
PROGRAM above.
You may not rebalance amounts in the
Secure Value Account or DCA Fixed Accounts under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing
Program.
What are the factors used to calculate
Polaris Income Builder?
The benefit offered by Polaris Income Builder is calculated by considering the factors described below.
First, we consider the Income Credit Period. The Income Credit Period is the period of time over which we calculate the Income Credit. The Income Credit Period begins on the Benefit Effective Date and ends 12 years
later.
Second, we determine if the Anniversary Value is the Highest Anniversary Value. The Anniversary Value equals your contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary
Third, we determine the Income Base which initially is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase
Payment received prior to the first contract anniversary, and is reduced
proportionately for Excess Withdrawals.
Fourth, we determine the Income Credit Base which is used solely as a basis for calculating the Income Credit during the Income Credit Period. The initial Income Credit
Base is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Credit Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase Payment received prior to the first contract
anniversary, and is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals.
Fifth, we determine the Income Credit.
The Income Credit is equal to 6% (“Income Credit Percentage”) of the Income Credit Base
on each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Income Credit Period. The Income Credit may
only be added to the Income Base if no withdrawals
are taken in a Benefit Year. For example, if you take a withdrawal in Benefit Year 2,
you will not be eligible for an Income Credit to be added to your Income Base on your
second Benefit Year Anniversary; however, if you do not take a withdrawal in Benefit Year 3, you will be eligible for an Income Credit to be added to your Income Base on your third Benefit Year
Anniversary.
Sixth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, which represents the maximum percentage of the Income Base that can be withdrawn each Benefit Year
while the contract value is greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base and the
Income Credit Base, if applicable. If your contract value is reduced to zero but your
Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of the Income Base you will receive each Benefit Year thereafter until the death of the Covered
Person(s).
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage are determined by
two factors: 1) whether there is one or two Covered Person(s); and 2) the age of the
Covered Person(s) at the time of first withdrawal.
Please see the table under “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” above for the
applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Seventh, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero, without reducing the
Income Base, and if applicable, the Income Credit Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount is calculated by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. If your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income Base is greater than zero, the
Protected Income Payment is determined by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals. Please see “What are the effects of withdrawals
on Polaris Income
Builder?” below.
F-22
How can
the Income Base and Income Credit Base be
increased?
On each Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base is automatically increased to the greater of (1) the Highest Anniversary Value; or (2) the current
Income Base plus the Income Credit, if any.
On each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Income Credit Period, the Income Credit Base is automatically increased to the Highest Anniversary Value, if the
Income Base is increased to the Highest Anniversary Value. The Income Credit Base is
not increased if an Income Credit is added to the Income Base.
Increases to your Income Base and Income Credit Base
occur on Benefit Year Anniversaries while the contract value is greater than zero.
However, Purchase Payments received prior to the first contract anniversary increase your Income Base and Income Credit Base at the time they are received. Since Highest
Anniversary Values are determined only on the Benefit Year Anniversaries, your Income Base and Income Credit Base will not increase if your contract value
was higher on days other than the Benefit Year Anniversaries.
Please see “What are the effects of
withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder?” below.
How do increases and decreases in the Income Base impact the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount?
Increases in the Income Base
If the Income Base is increased on a Benefit Year
Anniversary, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated on that Benefit
Year Anniversary by multiplying the increased Income Base by the applicable Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Percentage. Please see “How can the Income Base
and Income Credit Base be increased?” above.
Decreases in the Income Base
Excess Withdrawals reduce your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any Excess
Withdrawal in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base in the same proportion by which
the contract value is reduced by the Excess Withdrawal. As a result of a reduction of the Income Base, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be equal to the reduced Income Base multiplied
by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. The last recalculated Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount in a given Benefit Year is available for withdrawal at the
beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than the previous Benefit
Year’s Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. When the contract value is less than the Income Base, Excess Withdrawals will reduce the Income Base by an amount which is greater than the amount
of the Excess Withdrawal. In addition, you will not be eligible for an
Income Credit in
that Benefit Year. Please see
“What are
the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder?” below.
What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Builder?
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and the Income Credit Base may change over time as a result of the timing and amount of
withdrawals.
Withdrawals during a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base or Income Credit Base. However, if
you choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year, you may not carry over the unused amount for withdrawal in subsequent years. Your Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of taking less than the
entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please note that if you
delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals.
You should not elect a Living Benefit if you plan to take
Excess Withdrawals since those withdrawals may
significantly reduce the value of or terminate the Living Benefit.
The impact of withdrawals on specific factors is further explained below:
Income Base and Income Credit Base: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year exceeds the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and Income Credit Base will be reduced for those withdrawals. For each Excess Withdrawal taken, the Income Base and Income Credit Base are reduced in
the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of
the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. This means that the reduction in the Income Base
and Income Credit Base could be more or less than a dollar-for-dollar reduction.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is recalculated each time there is a change in the Income Base.
Accordingly, if the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount for that year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not
change for the next year unless your Income Base is increased. If you take an Excess
Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying
the reduced Income Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. This
recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is available for withdrawal at the
beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than your previous Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount.
F-23
Protected Income Payment: If the Income Base is greater than zero, but the contract value has been reduced to zero due to unfavorable investment
performance, deduction of fees, or withdrawals within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount, we will pay any remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for the current
Benefit Year. Thereafter, you will receive the Protected Income Payment each year over
the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) which is calculated by multiplying the
Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income
Payment Percentage. The Income Base is no longer increased on Benefit Year
Anniversaries after the contract value has been reduced to zero. As a result, the
Protected Income Payment is calculated once and will not change.
Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?”
below.
All withdrawals from the contract, including withdrawals taken under this Living Benefit, will
reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may impact other provisions of
your contract. Unfavorable investment experience and/or fees will also reduce your contract value. In addition, withdrawals under this Living Benefit will reduce the penalty-free withdrawal amount
and may be subject to applicable withdrawal charges if in excess of the penalty-free
withdrawal amount. The sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not be assessed a withdrawal charge. Partial withdrawals under this Living Benefit must
be deducted proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and Secure Value Account in
which you are invested. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR
MONEY above and EXPENSES below.
What is the fee for Polaris Income Builder?
The fee for Polaris Income Builder is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base and deducted from the contract value on a quarterly basis beginning on
the first Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the Benefit Effective Date. In New
York, Oregon, Texas and Washington, and in Missouri if your contract was issued on or after January 23, 2017, the charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios only. After the first Benefit
Year, on each Benefit Quarter Anniversary, we will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the
previous Benefit Quarter; and (2) determine the fee
rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Please see fee table below:
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Initial
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decrease or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
1.10% |
2.20% |
0.60% |
±0.25% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.35% |
2.70% |
0.60% |
±0.25% |
*
The quarterly fee rate will not decrease or increase by more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25% / 4).
The initial Annual
Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. Any fee adjustment is
based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index
(“VIX®”), an index of market volatility
reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the
VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximums identified in the table above.
The non-discretionary formula used in the calculation of the Annual Fee Rate applicable after the first Benefit Year is:
Initial Annual Fee Rate + [[0.05% x (Average Value of
the VIX – 20)]]
Should the VIX no longer be appropriate or available, we would substitute the VIX with another measure of market volatility for determining the fee. If we
substitute the VIX, we will notify you; however, the maximum and minimum annual fee
rates described in this prospectus are guaranteed for the life of your contract.
An increase in the Income Base due to an addition of an Income Credit, attaining a new Highest
Anniversary Value or an addition of subsequent Purchase Payments prior to the first
contract anniversary will result in an increase to the amount of the fee you pay since the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as described above.
Please note that this means the addition of an Income Credit will lead to paying a
higher fee in any given period than without the addition of the Income Credit, and in
certain instances, the value of the Income Credit may be more than offset by the amount of the fee. You will be assessed a non-refundable fee each quarter regardless of whether or not you
take any withdrawals.
If your contract value falls to zero, the fee will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit
is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect
while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender
your contract before
F-24
the end of a
Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date when the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days
between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter Anniversaries.
What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero
while the Income Base is greater than zero?
If the contract value is reduced to zero but the Income
Base is greater than zero, we will pay the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
for that Benefit Year. Thereafter we will pay the Protected Income Payment over the
remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s).
If an Excess Withdrawal reduces your contract value to zero, no further benefits are payable under the contract and your
contract along with the Living Benefit will terminate.
If your contract value is reduced to zero, you may no longer make transfers, and no death benefit is
payable. Therefore, you should be aware that, particularly during times of unfavorable
investment performance, withdrawals taken under the Living Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero, thereby terminating any other benefits of the contract. In addition, an Income Credit is not
available if the contract value is reduced to zero, even if a benefit remains payable.
When the contract value equals zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, to receive any
remaining Living Benefit, you must select one of the following:
1.
The Protected Income Payment divided equally and paid on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the date of
death of the Covered Person(s); or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
Once you elect an option above, it cannot be changed. If you do
not select an option above, the remaining benefit will be paid as option 1 above. This amount will be divided equally and paid on a quarterly basis until the date of death of the Covered Person(s). No amount is payable
thereafter.
SunAmerica Income Plus
If your contract was issued prior to May 1, 2013 and you elected the SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected.
The SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit was available from May 2, 2011 through April 30, 2013.
Effective May 1, 2013, SunAmerica Income Plus is no longer available for
election.
Living
Benefit Defined Terms
Anniversary Value
The contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary minus any Ineligible Purchase Payments (defined below). Continuation Contributions, if applicable, are
included in the calculation of Anniversary Values.
Benefit Effective Date
The date the Living Benefit is elected. The Benefit Effective Date is the same as the contract issue
date.
Benefit Quarter
Each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Quarter Anniversary
The date following each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date. If the
next Benefit Quarter Anniversary has no corresponding date, then the Benefit Quarter
Anniversary will be deemed to be the following business day.
Benefit Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.
Benefit Year Anniversary
The date on which each Benefit Year begins.
Contract Year
Each consecutive one year period starting on the contract issue date.
Covered Person(s)
The person, or persons, whose lifetime withdrawals are guaranteed under the Living Benefit.
Eligible Purchase Payments
Eligible Purchase Payments are Purchase Payments, or portions thereof, made on or after the Benefit Effective Date as shown in the table below and are
included in the calculation of the Income Base (defined below). The calculation of
Eligible Purchase Payments does not include Income Credits (defined below) or the Continuation Contribution, if applicable. However, Continuation Contributions, if applicable, are included in the
calculation of Anniversary Values. Total Purchase Payments are limited to $1,500,000
without prior Company approval.
| First Contract Year |
|
| 100% of Purchase Payments received |
|
Example: If you made a $100,000 Purchase Payment
in contract year 1, the total maximum Eligible Purchase Payment is $100,000. Eligible
Purchase Payments will not include additional Purchase Payments made in contract year 2
and after.
If your contract was issued between April 30, 2012 and November 11, 2012 and you elected the
optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit, the table below
F-25
indicates the
“Eligible Purchase Payments” applicable to the Living Benefit:
| First Contract Year |
Subsequent Contract Years |
| 100% of Purchase
Payments received |
Purchase Payments received in Contract Year 2, capped at 100% of Purchase Payments received in the first Contract Year |
If your contract was issued prior to April 30, 2012 and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income
Plus Living Benefit, the table below indicates the “Eligible
Purchase Payments” applicable to the Living Benefit:
| First Contract Year |
Subsequent Contract Years |
| 100% of Purchase
Payments received |
Purchase Payments received in Contract Year 2-5, capped at 200% of Purchase Payments received in the first Contract Year |
Excess Withdrawal
Any withdrawal, or portion of a withdrawal, that is taken in a Benefit Year that exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or
the Required Minimum Distribution amount as calculated by the Annuity Service Center.
An Excess Withdrawal will cause the Income Base, Income Credit Base, if applicable, and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount to be recalculated.
Income Base
The Income Base is used to determine the fee and the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each
Benefit Year without reducing the Income Base and Income Credit Base, if applicable.
The Income Base is also used to determine the amount paid each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the contract value is reduced to zero.
Income Credit
An amount that may be added to the Income Base during the Income Credit Period as shown in the following table:
| Income Credit |
Income Credit Availability |
| 5.50% |
Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is reduced in the years
withdrawals are taken |
If your contract was issued between June 25, 2012 and February 10, 2013 and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit, the table
below indicates the “Income Credit” applicable to the
Living Benefit:
| Income Credit |
Income Credit Availability |
| 5.25% |
Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is reduced in the years withdrawals are taken |
If your contract was issued prior to June 25, 2012 and you
elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit,
the table below
indicates the “Income Credit” applicable to the Living Benefit:
| Income Credit |
Income Credit Availability |
| 6% |
Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is reduced in the years withdrawals are taken |
Income Credit Base
The Income Credit Base is used solely as a basis for calculating the Income Credit during the Income
Credit Period.
Income Credit Period
The period of time over which we calculate the Income Credit.
Ineligible Purchase Payments
Purchase Payments received after the first Contract Year, as discussed in the table under “Eligible Purchase Payments” above.
If your contract was issued between April 30, 2012 and November 11, 2012 and you elected the
optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit, “Ineligible
Purchase Payments” are defined as Purchase Payments, or portions thereof, received after the 2nd Contract Year, or that are in excess of the caps discussed
in the table under “Eligible Purchase Payments” above for
contracts issued between April 30, 2012 and November 11, 2012.
If your contract was issued prior to April 30, 2012 and
you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus Living Benefit,
“Ineligible Purchase Payments” are defined as Purchase
Payments, or portions thereof, received after the 5th Contract Year, or that are in
excess of the caps discussed in the table under “Eligible
Purchase Payments” above for contracts issued prior to April 30, 2012.
Investment Requirements
We will allocate 10% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, to a fixed interest rate account (the “Secure Value
Account”). The remaining 90% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, must be allocated by you in accordance with the investment options outlined under Investment Requirements for
Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
The maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than
zero without reducing the Income Base and the Income Credit Base, if
applicable.
If your contract was issued prior to April 30, 2012 and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income
Plus Living Benefit,
F-26
the term “Minimum Income Base” is applicable to the Living Benefit and is defined as follows:
Minimum Income Base
The guaranteed minimum amount equal to 200% of the first Benefit Year’s Eligible Purchase
Payments to which the Income Base will be increased on the 12th Benefit Year
Anniversary provided no withdrawals are taken before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary. If you take a withdrawal before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary, your Income Base is not eligible to be
increased to the Minimum Income Base.
The Continuing Spouse, if applicable, is also eligible to
receive the Minimum Income Base on the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary if no withdrawals
have been taken during the first 12 Benefit Years following the Benefit Effective
Date.
How does SunAmerica Income Plus work?
The Living Benefit locks in the greater of two values to determine the Income Base. The Income Base is the basis for the Covered Person(s)’ guaranteed
lifetime benefit which must be taken in a series of withdrawals. The Income Base is
initially equal to the first Eligible Purchase Payment. While the Income Base is greater than zero, the Income Base is automatically locked in on each Benefit Year Anniversary, to the greater of (1) the highest
Anniversary Value, or (2) the current Income Base increased by any available Income
Credit. Please see “How can
the Income Base and Income Credit Base be increased?” below.
What determines the amount I can receive each year?
The amount that you receive depends on the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of first
withdrawal and whether your contract value is greater than or equal to zero.
While the contract value is greater than zero, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage represents
the percentage of your Income Base used to calculate the Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount that you may withdraw each Benefit Year without decreasing your Income Base or Income Credit Base, if applicable. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage differs depending on whether there are
one or two Covered Person(s) and the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of the
first withdrawal.
If your contract value has been reduced to zero or the Latest Annuity Date is reached, the Protected
Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to
calculate the Protected Income Payment that you will receive each year over the remaining
lifetime of the Covered Person(s). The Protected Income Payment Percentage differs
depending on whether there are one or two Covered Person(s) and the age of the Covered
Person(s) at the time of first withdrawal. Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than
zero?” and “What
happens to my Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?” below.
| Number of Covered
Persons and Age of
Covered Person at First
Withdrawal* |
Maximum Annual
Withdrawal
Percentage |
Protected Income
Payment Percentage |
| One Covered Person
(Age 64 and Younger) |
4.0% |
4.0% |
| One Covered Person
(Ages 65 and older) |
5.0% |
5.0% |
| Two Covered Persons
(Age 64 and Younger) |
3.5% |
3.5% |
| Two Covered Persons
(Ages 65 and older) |
4.5% |
4.5% |
*
If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered Person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age at first withdrawal is based on
the age of the younger of Two Covered Persons.
Are there
investment requirements if I elect SunAmerica Income Plus?
Yes. We will allocate 10% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if applicable, to
a Fixed Account (“Secure Value Account”). The Secure Value Account is only
available for investment for contracts with election of SunAmerica Income Plus. The crediting interest rate on amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will never be less than the guaranteed minimum
interest rate specified in your contract. The crediting interest rate, once established,
will not change for each allocation to the Secure Value Account for the duration of the
guarantee period. The guarantee period for the Secure Value Account is a one year
period that automatically renews every year from the date of each allocation to the
Secure Value Account, unless the Living Benefit has been cancelled. Each allocation to the Secure Value Account may have different crediting interest rates.
The remaining 90% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if applicable, must be
allocated by you in accordance with the investment requirements in
APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER
THE CONTRACT for the investment requirements associated with this optional Living
Benefit.
After investing 10% in the Secure Value Account, you must comply with the investment requirements by
investing the remaining 90% of your Purchase Payments in accordance with one of the two
options below either directly or by using an available DCA Fixed Account. If you choose a DCA Fixed Account, you must comply with the investment requirements by investing your target allocations
in accordance one of the two options in APPENDIX A – UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the investment requirements associated with this optional Living Benefit.
F-27
How do my
investment requirements impact my feature and contract?
The investment requirements may reduce the need to rely on the guarantees provided by this Living
Benefit because they allocate your investment across asset classes and potentially
limit exposure to market volatility. As a result, you may have better, or worse,
investment returns by allocating your investments more
aggressively.
We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable
Portfolios are added, deleted, substituted, merged or otherwise reorganized. We will
promptly notify you of any changes to the investment requirements due to deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options.
Your allocation instructions for the amount not invested in the Secure Value Account accompanying any Purchase Payment as well as your target allocations if you
invest in a DCA Fixed Account must comply with the investment requirements, provided
under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX – A
UNDERLYING FUNDS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT, in order for your application or subsequent Purchase Payment(s) allocation instructions to be
considered in Good Order. You may not transfer any amounts between the Secure Value
Account and the Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure Value Account may
not be used as a target account if you are using the DCA program to comply with investment requirements. You may not request any specific amount of any withdrawal to be deducted solely from
the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the
Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the contract value.
Rebalancing and Investment Requirements
We will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing. If rebalancing instructions are not provided, we
will align your rebalancing allocations with your Purchase Payment allocation
instructions, or if using a DCA Fixed Account, your target DCA instructions. We require quarterly rebalancing because market performance and transfer and withdrawal activity may result in your
contract’s allocations going outside these requirements. Quarterly rebalancing will
ensure that your allocation will continue to comply with the investment requirements
for this feature.
Automatic transfers and/or systematic withdrawals will not result in rebalancing before the next
automatic quarterly rebalancing occurs. The day following any transfer or withdrawal
you initiate, we will rebalance in accordance with your most current and compliant Automatic Asset Rebalancing instructions on file. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you
initiate a transfer, we will update your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect
the percentage allocations resulting from that
transfer (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”) which will replace any previous
rebalancing instructions you may have provided.
If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions would result in allocations inconsistent with the investment requirements listed above, we will
revert to the last compliant instructions on file. You can modify your rebalancing
instructions, as long as they are consistent with the investment requirements, at any time by calling the Annuity Service Center.
You may not transfer any amounts between the Secure Value Account and the Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure Value Account may not be
used as a target account if you are using the Dollar Cost Averaging program to comply
with investment requirements. In addition, we will not rebalance amounts in the Secure Value Account or DCA Fixed Accounts under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program. You may not request any
specific amount of any withdrawal to be deducted solely from the Secure Value Account.
Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the contract value. Please see “What happens to the Secure Value Account and Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions if I elect to cancel SunAmerica Income
Plus?” below.
What are the factors used to calculate SunAmerica Income Plus?
The benefit offered by SunAmerica Income Plus is calculated by considering the factors described below.
First, we determine the Eligible Purchase Payments. It is important to note that only Purchase Payments made during the first contract year (in the first two years if your contract was issued between April 30, 2012
and November 11, 2012, and in the first five years if your contract was issued prior to
April 30, 2012) are taken into consideration in determining the Eligible Purchase
Payments. If you anticipate that you will be making Purchase Payments after the first
contract year (after the first two years if your contract was issued between April 30,
2012 and November 11, 2012, and after the first five years if your contract was issued
prior to April 30, 2012), you should know that those Purchase Payments will not be
included in the calculation of the Eligible Purchase Payments or Anniversary
Values.
Second, we consider the Income Credit Period. The Income Credit Period is the period of time over which we calculate the Income Credit. The Income
Credit Period begins on the Benefit Effective Date and ends 12 years later.
Third, we determine the Anniversary Value which equals your contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary minus any Ineligible Purchase Payments. The
highest Anniversary Value is the current Anniversary Value that is greater than (1) all
previous Anniversary Values; and (2) Eligible Purchase Payments.
F-28
Fourth, we determine the Income Base which initially is equal to the first Eligible Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent
Eligible Purchase Payment, and is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals. For
contracts issued prior to April 30, 2012, if you do not take any withdrawals before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base will be increased to at least the Minimum Income Base on the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary. The Minimum Income Base is equal to at least 200% of your first Benefit Year’s
Eligible Purchase Payments.
Fifth, we determine the Income Credit Base which is used solely as a basis for calculating the Income Credit during the Income Credit Period. The initial Income Credit Base is equal to the first Eligible Purchase
Payment. The Income Credit Base is increased by each subsequent Eligible Purchase
Payment, and is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals.
Sixth, we determine the Income Credit.
The Income Credit is equal to the Income Credit rate offered at the time your contract was issued
(“Income Credit Percentage”) of the Income Credit Base on each Benefit Year
Anniversary during the Income Credit Period. The Income Credit Percentage on the Benefit Year Anniversary is reduced but not eliminated in any Benefit Year in which cumulative withdrawals during the
preceding Benefit Year are less than the Income Credit Percentage of the Income Base
and not greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.
Seventh, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, which represents the maximum percentage of the Income Base that can be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than
zero, without reducing the Income Base and the Income Credit Base, if applicable. If
your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of the Income Base you will receive each Benefit Year thereafter until the death of the Covered Person(s).
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage are determined by two factors: 1) whether there is one or two Covered
Person(s); and 2) the age of the Covered Person at the time of first withdrawal.
Additionally, the Protected Income Payment Percentage may differ depending on whether the first withdrawal is taken before age 65 and if a new highest Anniversary Value is achieved on or after the
Covered Person(s) 65th birthday.
Please see the table under “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” above for the
applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Eighth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is
greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base, and if applicable, the Income Credit Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is calculated by
multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. If
your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment is determined by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage.
Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals, please see “What are the effects of withdrawals on SunAmerica Income Plus?” below.
How can the Income Base and Income Credit Base be increased?
On each Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base is automatically increased to the greater of (1) the highest Anniversary Value; or (2) the current
Income Base plus the Income Credit, if any. For contracts issued prior to April 30,
2012, the Income Base will be increased to at least the Minimum Income Base on the 12th
Benefit Year Anniversary provided no withdrawals have been taken before that
anniversary.
On each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Income Credit Period, the Income Credit Base is
automatically increased to the highest Anniversary Value, if the Income Base is
increased to the highest Anniversary Value. The Income Credit Base is not increased if
an Income Credit is added to the Income Base.
Increases to your Income Base and Income Credit Base occur on Benefit Year Anniversaries while the contract value is greater than zero. However, Eligible
Purchase Payments increase your Income Base and Income Credit Base at the time they are
received. Since highest Anniversary Values are
determined only on the Benefit Year Anniversaries, your Income Base and Income Credit Base will not increase if your contract value was higher on days other than the
Benefit Year Anniversaries.
Please see “What are the effects of
withdrawals on SunAmerica Income Plus?” below.
How do increases and decreases in the Income Base impact the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount?
Increases in the Income Base
During the first Contract Year which Eligible Purchase Payments are allocated to your contract, any
remaining withdrawals of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be based on the
increased Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount reduced by withdrawals previously taken in that Benefit Year. If the Income Base is increased on a Benefit Year Anniversary, the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated on that Benefit Year Anniversary by multiplying
the increased Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage.
F-29
Decreases
in the Income Base
Excess Withdrawals reduce your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any Excess
Withdrawal in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base in the same proportion by which
the contract value is reduced by the Excess Withdrawal. As a result of a reduction of the Income Base, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be equal to the reduced Income Base multiplied
by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. The last recalculated Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount in a given Benefit Year is available for withdrawal at the
beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than the previous Benefit
Year’s Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. When the contract value is less than the Income Base, Excess Withdrawals will reduce the Income Base by an amount which is greater than the amount
of the Excess Withdrawal. In addition, you will not be eligible for an Income Credit in
that Benefit Year. Please see
“What are
the effects of withdrawals on SunAmerica Income Plus?” below.
What are the effects of withdrawals on SunAmerica Income Plus?
The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and the Income Credit Base may change over
time as a result of the timing and amount of withdrawals. For contracts issued prior to
April 30, 2012, if you take a withdrawal before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary, your
Income Base is not eligible to be increased to the Minimum Income Base.
Withdrawals during a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base or Income Credit Base. However, if
you choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year, you may not carry over the unused amount for withdrawal in subsequent years. Your Maximum Annual Withdrawal
Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of taking less than the
entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please note that if you
delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals.
You should not elect the Living Benefit if you plan to
take Excess Withdrawals since those withdrawals may
significantly reduce the value of or terminate the Living Benefit.
The impact of withdrawals on specific factors is further explained below:
Income Base and Income Credit Base: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year exceeds the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and Income Credit Base will be reduced for those withdrawals. For each Excess Withdrawal taken, the Income Base and Income Credit Base are reduced in
the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced
by
the amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. This means that the reduction in the Income Base and Income Credit Base could be more or less than a dollar-for-dollar
reduction.
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is recalculated each time there is a change in the Income Base.
Accordingly, if the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount for that year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not
change for the next year unless your Income Base is increased. If you take an Excess
Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying
the reduced Income Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. This
recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is available for withdrawal at the
beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than your previous Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount.
Protected Income Payment: If the Income Base is greater than zero, but the contract value has been reduced to zero due to unfavorable investment performance or withdrawals within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, we will pay any remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for the current
Benefit Year. Thereafter, you will receive the Protected Income Payment each year over
the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) which is calculated by multiplying the
Income Base by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage. The Income Base is no
longer increased on Benefit Year Anniversaries after the contract value has been
reduced to zero. As a result, the Protected Income Payment is calculated once and will
not change. Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?” below.
All withdrawals from the contract, including withdrawals taken under this Living Benefit, will
reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may impact other provisions of
your contract. Unfavorable investment experience and/or fees will also reduce your contract value. In addition, withdrawals under this Living Benefit will reduce the penalty-free withdrawal amount
and may be subject to applicable withdrawal charges if in excess of the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount. The sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year up to the Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Amount will not be assessed a withdrawal charge. Partial withdrawals under
this Living Benefit must be deducted proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and
Fixed Account in which you are invested.
What is the fee for SunAmerica Income Plus?
The fee for SunAmerica Income Plus is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base and deducted
from the contract value on a quarterly basis beginning on the first
F-30
Benefit Quarter
Anniversary following the Benefit Effective Date. In New York, Oregon, Texas and Washington the charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios only. After the first Benefit Year, on
each Benefit Quarter Anniversary, we will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the previous
Benefit Quarter; and (2) determine the fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Please see fee table below:
| Number of
Covered Persons |
Initial
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Minimum
Annual
Fee Rate |
Maximum
Annualized
Fee Rate
Decrease or
Increase
Each
Benefit
Quarter* |
| One Covered Person |
1.10% |
2.20% |
0.60% |
±0.25% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.35% |
2.70% |
0.60% |
±0.25% |
*
The quarterly fee rate will not decrease or increase by more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25% / 4).
The initial Annual
Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. Any fee adjustment is
based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index
(“VIX®”), an index of market volatility
reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. If your contract was issued after April
30, 2012, in general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximums identified in the table above
using the following non-discretionary formula:
Initial Annual Fee Rate + [[0.05% x (Average Value of
the VIX – 20)]]
If your contract was issued prior to April 30, 2012, in general, as the value of the VIX decreases or increases from the previous Benefit Quarter
Anniversary, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums
and maximum identified in the table above using the following non-discretionary
formula:
Initial Annual Fee Rate + [[0.05% x (Value of the VIX –
20)]]
Should the VIX no longer be appropriate or available, we would substitute the VIX with another
measure of market volatility for determining the fee. If we substitute the VIX, we will
notify you; however, the maximum and minimum annual fee rates described in this prospectus are guaranteed for the life of your contract.
Since the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, an increase in the Income Base due to an addition of an Income Credit, higher Anniversary Value or
addition of subsequent Eligible Purchase Payments, will result in an increase to the
amount of the fee you pay, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as
described above. Please note that this means the addition of an Income Credit will lead to paying a higher fee in any given period than without the
addition of the Income Credit, and in certain instances, the value of the Income Credit may be more than offset by the amount of the fee. You will be assessed a
non-refundable fee each quarter regardless of whether or not you take any
withdrawals.
If your contract value falls to zero, the fee will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit
is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect
while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender
your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by
multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date when the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter
Anniversaries.
What happens if the contract
value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?
If the contract value is reduced to zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, we will pay the
remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit Year. Thereafter we will
pay the Protected Income Payment over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s).
If an Excess Withdrawal reduces your contract value to zero, no
further benefits are payable under the contract and your contract along with the Living Benefit will terminate.
If your contract value is reduced to zero, you may no longer make subsequent Purchase Payments or transfers, and no death benefit is payable. Therefore, you
should be aware that, particularly during times of unfavorable investment performance,
withdrawals taken under the Living Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero, thereby terminating any other benefits of the contract. In addition, an Income Credit is not available if the contract
value is reduced to zero, even if a benefit remains payable.
When the contract value equals zero but the Income Base
is greater than zero, to receive any remaining Living Benefit, you must select one of
the following:
1.
The Protected Income Payment divided equally and paid on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the date of
death of the Covered Person(s); or
2.
Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.
Once you elect an option above, it cannot be changed. If you do
not select an option above, the remaining benefit will be paid as option 1 above. This amount will be divided equally and paid on a quarterly basis until the date of death of the Covered Person(s). No amount is payable
thereafter.
F-31
ADDITIONAL IMPORTANT INFORMATION APPLICABLE TO POLARIS INCOME BUILDER AND SUNAMERICA INCOME PLUS
If I own a Qualified contract, how do Required Minimum Distributions impact my
Living Benefit?
As the original Owner, or Continuing Spouse (two Covered Persons elected) electing to treat the
annuity contract as their own, if you are taking required minimum distributions
(“RMD”) from this contract, and the amount of the RMD (based only on the
contract to which the feature is elected and using the Uniform Lifetime Table or Joint Life Expectancy Table from the regulations under the Internal Revenue Code) is greater than the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount in any given Benefit Year, no portion of the RMD will be
treated as an Excess Withdrawal.
We will provide RMD favorable treatment, in each Benefit Year,
to the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount. Any portion of a withdrawal in a Benefit Year which exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or RMD amount
will be considered an Excess Withdrawal. If you must take RMD from this contract and want to ensure that these withdrawals
will not permanently reduce future withdrawal amounts, your total distribution(s) during the current contract year must not exceed the greater of the
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount under the Living Benefit or the RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center. Therefore, if you plan to take an Excess Withdrawal, then this feature may not be appropriate for you.
The age at which you must begin taking RMDs is 73 (if you were born January 1, 1951 or later), 72
(if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951), or 70 ½
(if you were born before July 1, 1949).
If you are transferring from another company and have already
reached the age you must begin taking RMDs, you should take the current tax year’s RMD prior to the transfer, as we cannot systematically calculate the RMD as we do not possess the valuation for the
previous year end. Further, if you are turning the age you must begin taking RMDs, you
should know that although tax code allows for deferral of the first withdrawal to April of the tax year following your attainment of the age you must begin taking RMDs, doing so may result in subsequent
withdrawals being treated as Excess Withdrawals for that Benefit Year.
If you have elected Polaris Income
Builder, no Income Credit will be included in the calculation of the Income Base
when an RMD is taken.
If you have elected SunAmerica Income Plus, an Income Credit will be included in determining any Income Base increase in that Benefit Year if the RMD
amount taken is greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, but less than the
Income Credit which equals 5.5% of the Income Base if your contract was issued between
February 11, 2013 and April 30, 2013, 5.25% of the Income
Base if your
contract was issued between June 25, 2012 and February 10, 2013, and 6% of the Income Base if your contract was issued prior to June 25, 2012.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected one Covered Person and if the contract value is greater
than zero?
If there is one Covered Person and that person dies, the surviving spousal joint Owner or spousal
beneficiary may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim if the contract value is greater than zero, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract if the contract value is greater than zero, without the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee.
What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal
continuation if I elected two Covered Persons and the contract value is
greater than zero?
If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of one Covered
Person, the surviving Covered Person may elect to:
1.
Make a death claim if the contract value is greater than zero, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or
2.
Continue the contract with the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee for two Covered Persons.
The components of
the Living Benefit in effect at the time of spousal continuation will not change. The surviving Covered Person can elect to receive withdrawals in accordance with the provisions of the Living
Benefit elected based on the age of the younger Covered Person at the time the first
withdrawal was taken. If no withdrawals were taken prior to the spousal continuation, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the Protected Income Payment Percentage will be based on the age of
the surviving Covered Person at the time the first withdrawal is taken. Please see “How does Polaris Income
Builder work?” and “How does SunAmerica Income Plus work?” above.
If spousal continuation occurs, the Continuing Spouse will continue to receive any increases to the
Income Base for highest Anniversary Values, or if applicable, any Income Credit during
the Income Credit Period, while the contract value is greater than zero.
Can a non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any remaining benefits under my
Living Benefit upon the death of the second
spouse?
No. Upon the death of the Covered Person(s), if the contract value is greater than zero, a
non-spousal Beneficiary must make an election under the death benefit provisions of the
contract, which terminates the Living Benefit.
F-32
What
happens to my Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?
If the contract value and the Income Base are greater than zero on the Latest Annuity Date, you
begin the Income Phase and therefore, you must select one of the following annuity
income options:
1.
Annuitize the contract value under the contract’s annuity provisions as described under ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS; or
2.
Annuitize the contract and elect to receive the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as of the Latest Annuity Date for a fixed period while you
are alive. The fixed period is determined by dividing the contract value on the Latest
Annuity Date by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. Any applicable Premium Taxes will
be deducted from the contract value prior to determining the fixed period. After that
fixed period ends, you will receive the Protected Income Payment, which is calculated by
multiplying the Income Base as of the Latest Annuity Date by the applicable Protected
Income Payment Percentage, paid until the death(s) of the Covered Person(s). The
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount fixed period payments and the subsequent Protected
Income Payments will be divided equally on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual
frequency, as selected by you.
3.
Any annuity income option mutually agreeable between you and us.
Once you begin
the Income Phase by electing one of the annuity income payment options above, the Income Base will no longer be adjusted either for highest Anniversary Values or additional Income Credits.
If you do not elect an option listed above, on the Latest Annuity Date, we will annuitize the
contract value in accordance with Option 2 above.
Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?
The Living Benefit may not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary unless you
surrender your contract. The Living Benefit may be cancelled by you on or after the 5th
Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table below.
| Cancellation
Request Received |
Cancellation
Effective Date |
| Years 1-5 |
5th Benefit Year Anniversary |
| Years 5+ |
Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the receipt of the cancellation request |
Once cancellation is effective, the guarantees under the Living
Benefit are terminated. In addition, the investment requirements for the Living Benefit will no longer apply to your contract. You may not re-elect or reinstate the Living Benefit after cancellation.
If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of the first Covered Person, the surviving Covered
Person (generally, the Continuing Spouse) may cancel the Living
Benefit on or after
the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table above. Upon the cancellation effective date of the Living Benefit, there will be one final fee
applicable to the same Benefit Quarter in which the cancellation occurs, on the Benefit
Quarter Anniversary. Thereafter, the fee will no longer be charged.
What happens to the Secure Value Account and Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions if I elect to cancel my Living
Benefit?
Amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will be automatically transferred to the 1-Year Fixed
Account, if available. If the 1-Year Fixed Account is not available, amounts will be
transferred to a money market portfolio. From the day following the automated transfer from the Secure Value Account, you may transfer this amount to another available investment option under the
contract for a period of 90 days during which the transfer will not count against the
annual number of free transfers or U.S. Mail transfers, or incur a transfer fee. You may move your funds out of the money market portfolio at any time.
The Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program and your instructions on file will not be terminated or changed upon cancellation of your Living Benefit.
Amounts transferred from the Secure Value Account into the 1-Year Fixed Account or a
money market portfolio will not impact the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions on file and that transfer will not result in new Default Rebalancing Instructions. On or after cancellation
of these features, you may provide new rebalancing instructions or you may choose to
terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program by contacting the Annuity Service Center.
Are there circumstances under which my Living Benefit will be automatically cancelled?
The Living Benefit will automatically be cancelled upon the occurrence of one of the following:
(i)
Annuitization of the contract; or
(ii)
Termination or surrender of the contract; or
(iii)
A death benefit is paid resulting in the contract being terminated; or
(iv)
An Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value and Income Base to zero; or
(v)
Death of the Covered Person, if only one is elected; or, if two Covered Persons are elected, death of the surviving Covered Person; or
(vi)
A change that removes all Covered Persons from the contract except as noted below under “Are there circumstances under which guaranteed withdrawals for two Covered Persons, if elected, terminate for one of the Covered Persons?”; or
(vii)
A Change of the Owner or Assignment; or
(viii)You elect to cancel Your Living Benefit.
If a change of ownership occurs from a natural person to a non-natural entity, the original natural Owner(s) must also be the Annuitant(s) after the ownership
change to prevent
F-33
termination of the
Living Benefit. A change of ownership from a non-natural entity to a natural person can only occur if the new natural Owner(s) was the original natural Annuitant(s) in order to prevent termination of
the Living Benefit. Any ownership change is contingent upon prior review and approval
by the Company.
Are there circumstances under which
guaranteed withdrawals for two Covered Persons, if elected, terminate
for one of the Covered Persons?
Under any of the following circumstances, the Living Benefit will provide a guarantee for one Covered Person and not the lifetime of the other Covered
Person:
1.
One of the two Covered Persons is removed from the contract, due to reasons other than death; or
2.
The original spousal joint Owners or spousal beneficiary, who are the Covered Persons, are no longer married at the time of death of the first
spouse.
Under these
circumstances, the fee for the Living Benefit based on two Covered Persons will continue to be charged and the guaranteed withdrawals based on two Covered Persons are payable for one Covered Person only.
However, the remaining Covered Person may choose to terminate the Living Benefit as
described under “Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?” above.
Any amounts that we may pay under the feature in excess of your contract value are subject to the
Company’s financial strength and claims-paying ability.
F-34
Appendix G – Death Benefit Examples
The following examples demonstrate how market performance,
subsequent Purchase Payments, and withdrawals impact the death benefit.
The examples are based on a hypothetical contract over an extended period of time and do not assume any specific rate of return nor do they represent how your contract will actually perform.
Examples 1 through
5 below assume election of the Standard Death Benefit and Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex
Living Benefit. Please see APPENDIX D – OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT EXAMPLES for corresponding values relative to the Living Benefit used in examples 1-5.
Example 1: Initial Values
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Owner age 65 on the Issue Date
| Values as of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Contract
Value |
Net Purchase Payments |
Standard Death Benefit |
| Issue Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
Example 2: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments
The values shown below are based on the assumptions
stated in Example 1 above, in addition to the following:
•
Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first Contract Year = $60,000.
•
No withdrawals taken.
| Values as of |
Purchase
Payment
Invested |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Net Purchase Payments |
Standard Death Benefit |
| Contract Date |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
$100,000 |
| Year 1 – Day 200 |
$60,000 |
$162,000 |
$160,000 |
$162,000 |
| 1st Anniversary |
— |
$167,000 |
$160,000 |
$167,000 |
| Year 2 – Day 180 |
$90,000 |
$250,000 |
$250,000 |
$250,000 |
| 2nd Anniversary |
— |
$279,000 |
$250,000 |
$279,000 |
The values of the death benefit are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments as
follows and the Contract Value at the time the death benefit is calculated.
•
The Net Purchase Payments are recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase
Payment is received.
Example 3: Impact of Taking Withdrawals prior to Activation Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions
stated in Examples 1 and 2 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal of $5,000 is taken in the third Contract Year, prior to the
Activation Date.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Anniversary
Value |
Net Purchase
Payments |
Standard Death
Benefit |
| 2nd Anniversary |
$279,000 |
— |
$279,000 |
$250,000 |
$279,000 |
| Year 3 – Day 155 |
$285,000 |
$5,000 |
— |
$245,614 |
$280,000 |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$310,000 |
— |
$310,000 |
$245,614 |
$310,000 |
•
The Net Purchase Payments are reduced in the same proportion by which the
Contract Value is reduced by the withdrawal amount.
○
In year 3 – day 155, prior to the Activation Date, a Withdrawal of $5,000 reduced the Net Purchase Payments proportionately by the factor of 1.7544% ($5,000/$285,000); the reduced Net Purchase Payments was $245,614 ($250,000 x [1 – 1.7544%]). The Contract Value after the Withdrawal was $280,000 ($285,000 - $5,000). Therefore, the Standard Death Benefit was $280,000.
G-1
Example 4:
Impact of Taking Withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount after the Activation Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1, 2
and 3 above, in addition to the following:
•
A Withdrawal up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is taken in the fourth and
fifth Contract Year, after the Activation Date.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract
Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Anniversary
Value |
Assumed
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount |
Net Purchase
Payments |
Standard Death
Benefit |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$310,000 |
— |
$310,000 |
$17,360 |
$245,614 |
$310,000 |
| Year 4 – Day 65 |
$315,000 |
— |
— |
$17,640 |
$245,614 |
$315,000 |
| Year 4 – Day 92 |
$312,000 |
$10,000 |
— |
$17,640 |
$235,614 |
$302,000 |
| Year 4 – Day 350 |
$320,000 |
— |
— |
$17,640 |
$235,614 |
$320,000 |
| 4th Anniversary |
$311,000 |
— |
$311,000 |
$17,920 |
$235,614 |
$311,000 |
| Year 5 – Day 75 |
$325,000 |
— |
— |
$17,920 |
$235,614 |
$325,000 |
| Year 5 – Day 80 |
$322,000 |
$17,920 |
— |
$17,920 |
$217,694 |
$304,080 |
| 5th Anniversary |
$317,000 |
— |
$317,000 |
$18,200 |
$217,694 |
$317,000 |
Withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount reduce the Net Purchase Payments dollar-for-dollar.
•
In year 4, a Lifetime Income amount of $10,000 was withdrawn.
○
In year 4 – day 92, the Net Purchase Payments were $235,614 ($245,614 -
$10,000); the Contract Value after the Withdrawal was $302,000 ($312,000 - $10,000); therefore, the Standard Death Benefit was $302,000.
•
In year 5, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount of $17,920 was withdrawn.
○
In year 5 – day 80, the Net Purchase Payments were $217,694 ($235,614 -
$17,920); the Contract Value after the Withdrawal was $304,080 ($322,000 - $17,920); therefore, the Standard Death Benefit was $304,080.
Example
5: Impact of Taking Excess Withdrawals (in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount) after the Activation Date
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1, 2, 3 and 4 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is taken in the
seventh Contract Year, after the Activation Date.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Anniversary
Value |
Assumed
Maximum
Annual
Withdrawal
Amount |
Net Purchase
Payments |
Standard Death
Benefit |
| 5th Anniversary |
$317,000 |
— |
$317,000 |
$18,200 |
$217,694 |
$317,000 |
| Year 6 – Day 155 |
$330,000 |
— |
— |
$18,200 |
$217,694 |
$330,000 |
| 6th Anniversary |
$329,000 |
— |
$329,000 |
$18,480 |
$217,694 |
$329,000 |
| Year 7 – Day 37 |
$321,000 |
$26,400 |
— |
$17,996 |
$193,999 |
$294,600 |
| Year 7 – Day 362 |
$325,000 |
— |
— |
$17,996 |
$193,999 |
$325,000 |
| 7th Anniversary |
$317,000 |
— |
$317,000 |
$18,200 |
$193,999 |
$317,000 |
The values of the Death Benefit are impacted by taking withdrawals in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount after the Activation Date as follows:
•
Withdrawal Adjustment up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount reduces Net
Purchase Payments dollar-for-dollar first, then the Withdrawal Adjustment for Excess Withdrawals above Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount reduces Net Purchase Payment proportionately.
○
In year 7 – day 37, the proportionate reduction was 2.6180% ([$26,400 - $18,480] / [$321,000 - $18,480]); the Net Purchase Payments were reduced to $193,999 ([$217,694 - $18,480] x [1 – 2.6180%]); the Standard Death Benefit was $294,600.
G-2
Example 6 below
assumes election of the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit and the Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit. Please see APPENDIX D – OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT EXAMPLES for
the corresponding values relative to the Living Benefit used in example 6.
Note: When electing the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit with the Polaris Income Builder
Daily Flex Living Benefit, any withdrawal taken reduces Net Purchase Payments and the
Maximum Anniversary Value proportionately, regardless of Lifetime Income Activation.
Example 6: Impact of Withdrawals
The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1 and
2 above, in addition to the following:
•
A withdrawal of $5,000 is taken in the third Contract Year, after the Activation
Date.
| Values as of |
Assumed
Contract Value |
Withdrawal
Taken |
Anniversary
Value |
Assumed Net
Purchase
Payments |
Maximum
Anniversary
Value |
Maximum
Anniversary
Value Death
Benefit |
| Contract Date |
$100,000 |
— |
— |
$100,000 |
— |
$100,000 |
| 1st Anniversary |
$167,000 |
— |
$167,000 |
$160,000 |
$167,000 |
$167,000 |
| 2nd Anniversary |
$279,000 |
— |
$279,000 |
$250,000 |
$279,000 |
$279,000 |
| Year 3 – Day 155 |
$285,000 |
$5,000 |
— |
$245,614 |
$274,105 |
$280,000 |
| 3rd Anniversary |
$310,000 |
— |
$310,000 |
$245,614 |
$310,000 |
$310,000 |
•
After the first contract anniversary the Contract Value is $167,000, the Maximum
Anniversary Value steps up to $167,000; the Net Purchase Payments were $160,000; therefore, the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $167,000.
•
After the second contract anniversary the Contract Value is $279,000, the Maximum Anniversary Value steps up to $270,000; the Net Purchase Payments were $250,000; therefore, the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $279,000.
•
All withdrawals reduce the Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the withdrawal amount.
○
In year 3 – day 155, the proportionate reduction was 1.7543% ($5,000/$285,000); the reduced Net Purchase Payments were $245,614 ($250,000 x [1 – 1/7543%]); the reduced Maximum Anniversary Value was $274,105 ($279,000 x [1 – 1.7543%]); the Contract Value after the withdrawal was $280,000; therefore the Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit was $280,000.
G-3
Appendix H – Death Benefits Following Spousal Continuation for contracts issued prior to SEPTEMBER 9, 2019
If your contract was issued between May 13, 2019 and September 8, 2019 and you elected the Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex Living Benefit, please see APPENDIX E – DEATH BENEFITS FOLLOWING SPOUSAL CONTINUATION.
The following details the death benefit payable upon the
Continuing Spouse’s death. The death benefit we will pay to the new Beneficiary chosen by the Continuing Spouse varies
depending on the death benefit option elected by the original Owner of the contract, whether the Living Benefit was elected, the age of the Continuing Spouse
as of the Continuation Date and the Continuing Spouse’s date of death.
Capitalized terms used in this Appendix have the same meaning as they have in the prospectus.
We define “Continuation Purchase Payment” as Purchase Payments made on or after the
Continuation Date.
The term “withdrawals” as used in describing the death benefits is defined as
withdrawals and the fees and charges applicable to those
withdrawals.
The term “Withdrawal Adjustment” is used, if the Living Benefit had been elected, to
describe the way in which the amount of the death benefit will be adjusted for withdrawals depending on the amount of the withdrawal. If cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year
are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the amount of
adjustment will equal the amount of each withdrawal. If cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year are in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the contract value and the
death benefit are first reduced by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The resulting
death benefit is further adjusted by the withdrawal amount in excess of the Maximum
Annual Withdrawal Amount by the percentage by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the resulting contract value.
The Company will not accept Purchase Payments from anyone age 86 or older. Therefore, the death benefit calculations
described below assume that no Purchase Payments are received on or after the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday. We will not accept Continuation
Purchase Payments on or after the first contract
anniversary if the Living Benefit feature was elected.
The standard death benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit are calculated
differently depending on whether the original Owner had elected the Living Benefit
described above.
A.
Standard Death Benefit Payable Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death:
The following describes the standard death benefit without election of the Living
Benefit:
If the Continuing Spouse is age 85 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be
the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday,
reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the
contract value on the date of such withdrawal.
The following describes the standard death benefit with election of the Living Benefit:
If the Continuing Spouse is age 85 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the first contract anniversary reduced by:
a.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date if the Living Benefit has not terminated; or
b.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date prior to the date the Living Benefit was terminated; and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit was terminated.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation
Date, the death benefit will be contract value.
B. Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Payable
Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death:
Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death:
If the Continuing Spouse is age 80 or younger on the Continuation Date, regardless of whether a Living Benefit was elected, then upon the death of the
Continuing Spouse, the death benefit is the greatest of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday,
reduced for withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced contract
value on that date of such withdrawal; or
3.
Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary that occurred after the Continuation Date, but prior to the earlier of the Continuing
H-1
Spouse’s 83rd birthday or date of death. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the applicable contract anniversary, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received since that anniversary date but prior to
the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday, and reduced for any withdrawals since that
contract anniversary in the same proportion that the contract value was reduced on the
date of such withdrawal. We will not accept Continuation Purchase Payments on or after
the first contract anniversary if the Living Benefit was elected.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 81-85 on the Continuation Date and no Living Benefit was elected,
then the death benefit will be the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday,
reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the
contract value on the date of such withdrawal.
If the Continuing
Spouse is age 81-85 on the Continuation Date and the Living Benefit was elected, then the death benefit will be the greater of:
1.
Contract value; or
2.
Contract value on the Continuation Date, plus Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the earlier of the first contract anniversary or
the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday, reduced by:
a.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date if the Living Benefit has not terminated; or
b.
any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date prior to the date the Living Benefit was terminated and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit was terminated.
If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation
Date, the death benefit is equal to the contract value and the fee for the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit will no longer be deducted as of the Continuation Date.
H-2
Appendix I – Living Benefit Rates for Contracts Issued on or after May 1, 2023
This Appendix provides historical rates and percentages for Polaris Income Builder
Daily Flex Living Benefit for contracts purchased prior to the date of this
prospectus.
For contracts with applications signed on or after November 6, 2023 and before April
28, 2025:
Initial Annual Fee Rate
| Number of Covered Person(s) |
Initial Annual Fee Rate |
| One Covered Person |
1.45% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.45% |
Minimum Income Base Percentage
The annual Minimum Income Base Percentage is 5.00%
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income
Payment Percentage Table
| Number of Covered Persons
and Age of Covered Person(s)
on the Activation Date(1) |
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex | |
| Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Percentage |
Protected Income
Payment Percentage | |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 – 49) |
3.30% |
3.30% |
| One Covered Person (Age 50 – 54) |
3.50% |
3.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 55 – 59) |
4.00% |
4.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 – 64) |
4.20% |
4.20% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 – 69) |
5.60% |
5.60% |
| One Covered Person (Age 70 – 74) |
6.00% |
6.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 75 – 79) |
6.50% |
6.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 80 – 84) |
7.10% |
7.10% |
| One Covered Person (Age 85 – 89) |
7.85% |
7.85% |
| One Covered Person (Age 90 – 94) |
8.80% |
8.80% |
| One Covered Person (Age 95 and older) |
10.05% |
10.05% |
| Two Covered Persons (Age 45 – 49) |
2.80% |
2.80% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 50 – 54) |
3.00% |
3.00% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 55 – 59) |
3.50% |
3.50% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 60 – 64) |
3.70% |
3.70% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 65 – 69) |
5.10% |
5.10% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 70 – 74) |
5.50% |
5.50% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 75 – 79) |
6.00% |
6.00% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 80 – 84) |
6.60% |
6.60% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 85 – 89) |
7.35% |
7.35% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 90 – 94) |
8.30% |
8.30% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 95 and older) |
9.55% |
9.55% |
(1)
If there are two Covered Persons, the age on the Activation Date is based on the
age of the younger of the Two Covered Persons.
I-1
For
contracts with applications signed on or after May 1, 2023 and before November 6, 2023:
Initial Annual Fee Rate
| Number of Covered Person(s) |
Initial Annual Fee Rate |
| One Covered Person |
1.45% |
| Two Covered Persons |
1.45% |
Minimum Income Base Percentage
The annual Minimum Income Base Percentage is 5.00%
Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income
Payment Percentage Table
| Number of Covered Persons
and Age of Covered Person(s)
on the Activation Date(1) |
Polaris Income Builder Daily Flex | |
| Maximum Annual
Withdrawal Percentage |
Protected Payment
Income Percentage | |
| One Covered Person (Age 45 – 59) |
3.50% |
3.50% |
| One Covered Person (Age 60 – 64) |
4.00% |
4.00% |
| One Covered Person (Age 65 – 74) |
5.40% |
5.40% |
| One Covered Person (Age 75 and older) |
5.60% |
5.60% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 45 – 59) |
3.00% |
3.00% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 60 – 64) |
3.50% |
3.50% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 65 – 74) |
4.90% |
4.90% |
| Two Covered Person (Age 75 and older) |
5.10% |
5.10% |
(1)
If there are two Covered Persons, the age on the Activation Date is based on the
age of the younger of the Two Covered Persons.
I-2
The Statement of
Additional Information (SAI) contains additional information about the contract, the Company, and the Separate Account, including financial statements. The SAI is dated
the same date as this prospectus, and the SAI is incorporated by reference into this prospectus. You may request a free copy of the SAI or submit inquiries by:
•
Mailing: Annuity Service Center, P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas
79105-5570
•
Calling: (855) 421-2692
•
Visiting: www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses
You may also
obtain other information about the Separate Account on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic
request at the following email address: [email protected].
EDGAR Contract Identifier: C000111549
STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INDIVIDUAL FIXED AND VARIABLE ANNUITY
CONTRACT
ISSUED BY
THE UNITED STATES LIFE INSURANCE
COMPANY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK
COMPANY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK
IN CONNECTION WITH
FS VARIABLE SEPARATE ACCOUNT
POLARIS PLATINUM O-SERIES VARIABLE ANNUITY
This Statement of Additional Information is not a prospectus; it should be
read with the prospectus, dated April 28, 2025, relating to the annuity contracts described above. A copy of the prospectus may be obtained
without charge by calling (855) 421-2692, visiting
www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses, or writing us at:
THE UNITED STATES LIFE INSURANCE
COMPANY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK
ANNUITY SERVICE CENTER
P.O. BOX 15570
AMARILLO, TEXAS 79105-5570
COMPANY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK
ANNUITY SERVICE CENTER
P.O. BOX 15570
AMARILLO, TEXAS 79105-5570
April 28, 2025
Separate Account and the Company
The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York (“US Life” or the “Company”) is a stock life insurance company organized under the laws of the State of New York on February 25, 1850. US Life is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of Corebridge Financial, Inc. (“Corebridge”). US Life offers individual term and universal life insurance, as well
as fixed and variable annuities.
On December 31, 2011, First SunAmerica Life Insurance Company (“First
SunAmerica”) merged with the Company. Prior to this date, the contracts were issued by First SunAmerica.
FS Variable Separate Account (“Separate Account”) was originally
established by First SunAmerica on September 9, 1994, pursuant to the provisions of New York law, as a segregated asset account. Prior to December 31, 2011, the Separate Account was a separate account of First SunAmerica. On December 30, 2011, and in conjunction with the merger of US Life and First SunAmerica, the Separate Account was transferred to and became a Separate Account of US Life under New York law.
The Separate Account meets the definition of a “Separate Account” under the federal securities laws and is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940. This registration does not involve supervision of the management of the Separate Account or the Company by the SEC.
The assets of the Separate Account are the property of the Company. However, the assets of the Separate Account, equal to its reserves and other contract liabilities, are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business the Company may conduct. Income, gains, and losses, whether or not realized, from assets allocated to the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to other income, gains, or losses of the Company.
The Separate Account is divided into Variable Portfolios, with the assets of
each Variable Portfolio invested in the shares of one of the Underlying Funds. The Company does not guarantee the investment performance of the Separate Account, its Variable Portfolios or the Underlying Funds. Values allocated to the Separate Account and the amount of variable annuity income payments will vary with the values of shares of the Underlying Funds, and are also reduced by contract charges and fees.
The basic objective of a variable annuity contract is to provide variable
annuity income payments which will be to some degree responsive to changes in the economic environment, including inflationary forces and changes in rates of return available from various types of investments. The contract is designed to seek to accomplish this objective by providing that variable annuity income payments will reflect the investment performance of the Separate Account with respect to amounts allocated to it both before and after the Annuity Date. Since the Separate Account is always fully invested in shares of the Underlying Funds, its investment performance reflects the investment performance of those entities. The values of such shares held by the Separate Account fluctuate and are subject to the risks of changing economic conditions as well as the risk inherent in the ability of the Underlying Funds’ management to make necessary changes in their funds to anticipate changes in economic conditions. Therefore, the owner bears the entire investment risk that the basic objectives of the contract may not be realized, and that the adverse effects of inflation may not be lessened. There can be no assurance that the aggregate amount of variable annuity income payments will equal or exceed the Purchase Payments made with respect to a particular account for the reasons described above, or because of the premature death of an Annuitant.
Another important feature of the contract related to its basic objective is
the Company’s promise that the dollar amount of variable annuity income payments made during the lifetime of the Annuitant will not be adversely affected by the actual mortality experience of the Company or by the actual expenses incurred by the Company in excess of expense deductions provided for in the contract (although the Company does not guarantee the amounts of the variable annuity income payments).
Custodian
The Company acts as custodian of the Separate Account.
We have custody of all assets and cash of the Separate Account and handle the collection of proceeds of shares of the Underlying Funds bought and sold by the Separate
Account.
-3-
General Account
The general account is made up of all of the general assets of
the Company other than those allocated to the Separate Account or any other segregated asset account of the Company. A Purchase Payment may be allocated to the available fixed account options and/or available DCA fixed accounts in connection with the general account, as elected by the owner at the time of purchasing a contract or when making a subsequent Purchase Payment. Assets
supporting amounts allocated to fixed account options become part of the Company’s general account assets and are available to fund the claims of all classes of customers of the Company, as well as of its creditors. Accordingly, all of the Company’s assets held in the general account will be available to fund the Company’s obligations under the contracts as well as such other claims.
The Company will invest the assets of the general account in the manner chosen by the Company and allowed by applicable state laws regarding the nature and quality of investments that may be made by life insurance companies and the percentage of their assets that may be committed to any particular type of investment. In general, these laws permit investments, within specified limits and subject to certain qualifications, in federal, state and municipal obligations, corporate bonds, preferred and common stocks, real estate mortgages, real estate and certain other investments.
Information Regarding the Use of the Volatility Index (“VIX”)
This variable annuity is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor’s Financial Services LLC (“S&P”) or the Chicago Board Options Exchange, Incorporated (“CBOE”). S&P and CBOE make no representation, condition or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of this variable annuity or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in this variable annuity or in the ability of the CBOE Volatility Index (the “VIX”) track market performance. S&P’s and CBOE’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P, CBOE and the VIX which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P without regard to the Company or this variable annuity. S&P has no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the owners of this variable annuity into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the VIX. S&P and CBOE are not responsible for and have not participated in the determination of the timing of, prices at, or quantities of this variable annuity to be issued or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which this variable annuity is to be converted into cash. S&P and CBOE have no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of this variable annuity.
Neither S&P, its affiliates nor their third party licensors,
including CBOE, guarantee the adequacy, accuracy, timeliness or completeness of the VIX or any data included therein or any communications, including but not limited
to, oral or written communications (including electronic communications) with respect thereto. S&P, its affiliates and their third party licensors, including CBOE, shall not be subject to any damages or liability for any errors, omissions or delays therein. S&P and CBOE make no express or implied warranties, and expressly disclaim all warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or use with respect to the marks, the VIX or any data included therein. Without limiting any of the foregoing, in no event whatsoever shall S&P, its affiliates or their third party licensors, including CBOE, be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, punitive or consequential damages, including but not limited to, loss of profits, trading losses, lost time or goodwill, even if they have been advised of the possibility of such damages, whether in contract, tort, strict liability or otherwise.
“Standard & Poor’s®”, “S&P®”, “S&P 500®” and “Standard & Poor’s 500™”
are trademarks of Standard & Poor’s Financial Services LLC (“S&P”) and have been licensed for use by the Company. “CBOE”,
“CBOE Volatility Index” and “VIX” is a trademark of the Chicago Board Options Exchange, Incorporated and has been licensed for use by S&P.
Annuity Income
Payments
Initial Monthly Annuity Income Payments
The initial monthly annuity income payment is determined
by applying separately that portion of the contract value allocated to the fixed account options and the Variable Portfolio(s), less any premium tax if applicable, and
then applying it to the annuity table specified in the contract for fixed and variable annuity income payments. Those tables are based on a set amount per $1,000 of proceeds applied. The appropriate rate must be determined by the sex (except where, as in the case of certain Qualified contracts and other employer-sponsored retirement plans, such
-4-
classification is
not permitted) and age of the Annuitant and designated second person, if any, and the annuity income option selected.
The dollars applied are then divided by 1,000 and the result multiplied by the appropriate annuity factor appearing in the table to compute the amount of the first monthly annuity income payment. In the case of a variable annuity, that amount is divided by the value of an Annuity Unit as of the Annuity Date to establish the number of Annuity Units representing each variable annuity income payment. The number of Annuity Units determined for the first monthly variable annuity income payment remains constant for the second and subsequent monthly variable annuity income payments, assuming that no reallocation of contract values is made.
Subsequent Monthly Annuity Income
Payments
For fixed annuity income payments, the amount of the second and each subsequent monthly fixed annuity income payment is the same as that determined above for the first fixed monthly annuity income payment.
For variable annuity income payments, the amount of the second and each subsequent monthly variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units, as determined in connection with the determination of the initial monthly variable annuity income payment, above, by the Annuity Unit value as of the day preceding the date on which each monthly variable annuity income payment is due.
Annuity Unit Values
The value of an Annuity Unit is determined independently for each Variable Portfolio.
The annuity tables contained in the contract are based on a 3.5% per annum assumed investment rate. If the actual net investment rate experienced by a Variable Portfolio exceeds 3.5%, variable annuity income payments derived from allocations to that Variable Portfolio will
increase over time. Conversely, if the actual rate is less than 3.5%, variable annuity income payments will decrease over time. If the net investment rate equals 3.5%, the variable annuity income payments will remain constant. If a higher assumed investment rate
had been used, the initial monthly variable annuity income payment would be higher, but the actual net investment rate would also have to be higher in order for variable annuity income payments to increase (or not to decrease).
The payee receives the value of a fixed number of Annuity Units each
month. The value of a fixed number of Annuity Units will reflect the investment performance of the Variable Portfolios elected, and the amount of each monthly variable annuity income payment will vary accordingly.
For each Variable Portfolio, the value of an Annuity Unit is determined by
multiplying the Annuity Unit value for the preceding month by the Net Investment Factor for the month for which the Annuity Unit value is being calculated. The result is then multiplied by a second factor which offsets the effect of the assumed net investment rate of 3.5% per annum
which is assumed in the annuity tables contained in the contract.
Net Investment Factor
The Net Investment Factor (“NIF”) is an index applied to measure
the net investment performance of a Variable Portfolio from one day to the next. The NIF may be greater or less than or equal to one; therefore, the value of an Annuity Unit may increase, decrease or remain the same.
The NIF for any Variable Portfolio for a certain month is determined by
dividing (a) by (b) where:
(a)
is the Accumulation Unit value of the Variable Portfolio determined as of the end
of that month, and
(b)
is the Accumulation Unit value of the Variable Portfolio determined as of the end
of the preceding month.
The NIF for a Variable Portfolio for a given month is a measure of the net
investment performance of the Variable Portfolio from the end of the prior month to the end of the given month. A NIF of 1.000 results in no change; a NIF greater than 1.000 results in an increase; and a NIF less than 1.000 results in a decrease. The NIF is increased (or decreased) in accordance with the increases (or decreases, respectively) in the value of a share of the underlying fund in which the Variable Portfolio invests; it is also reduced by Separate Account asset charges.
Illustrative Example
Assume that one share of a given Variable Portfolio had an Accumulation Unit value of $11.46 as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) on the last business day in September; that its Accumulation Unit value had
-5-
been $11.44 at the
close of the NYSE on the last business day at the end of the previous month. The NIF for the month of September is:
| NIF
|
= |
($11.46/$11.44) |
| |
= |
1.00174825 |
The change in Annuity Unit value for a Variable Portfolio from one month to the next is determined in part by multiplying the Annuity Unit value at the prior month end by the NIF for that Variable Portfolio for the new month. In addition, however, the result of that computation must also be multiplied by an additional factor that takes into account, and neutralizes, the assumed investment rate of 3.5 percent per annum upon which the variable annuity income payment tables are based. For example, if the net investment rate for a Variable Portfolio (reflected in the NIF) were equal to the assumed investment rate, the variable annuity income payments should remain constant (i.e., the Annuity Unit value should not change). The monthly factor that neutralizes the assumed investment rate of 3.5 percent per annum is:
| |
|
(1/12) |
|
|
|
| 1/ |
[(1.035) |
|
] |
= |
0.99713732 |
In the example given above, if the Annuity Unit value for the Variable Portfolio was $10.103523 on the last business day in August, the Annuity Unit value on the last business day in September would have been:
$10.103523 x 1.00174825 x 0.99713732 = $10.092213
To determine the initial variable annuity income payment, the annuity income
payment for variable annuitization is calculated based on our mortality expectations and an assumed investment rate (AIR) of 3.5%. Thus the initial variable annuity income payment is the same as the initial payment for a fixed interest payout annuity calculated at an effective rate of 3.5%.
The NIF measures the performance of the funds that are basis for the amount
of future variable annuity income payments. This performance is compared to the monthly AIR, and if the rate of growth in the NIF is the same as the monthly AIR the payment remains the same as the prior month. If the rate of growth of the NIF is different than the AIR, then the payment is changed proportionately to the ratio NIF / (1+AIR), calculated on a monthly basis. If the NIF is less than the AIR, then this proportion is less than one and payments are decreased.
Variable Annuity Income Payments
Illustrative Example
Assume that a contract has all of its account value allocated to a single
Variable Portfolio. As of the last valuation preceding the Annuity Date, the account was credited with 7543.2456 Accumulation Units, each having a value of $15.432655 (i.e., the account value is equal to 7543.2456 x $15.432655 = $116,412.31). Assume also that the Annuity Unit value for the Variable Portfolio on that same date is $13.256932, and that the Annuity Unit value on the day immediately prior to the second variable annuity income payment date is $13.327695.
The first variable annuity income payment is determined using the annuity factor tables specified in the contract. These tables supply monthly annuity income payment factors, determined by the sex, age of the Annuitant and annuity income option selected, for each $1,000 of applied contract value. If the applicable factor is 5.21 for the annuitant in this hypothetical example, the first variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the factor of $5.21 by the result of dividing the account value by $1,000:
First variable annuity income payment =
$5.21 x ($116,412.31/$1000) = $606.51
The number of Annuity Units (which will be constant unless the account values is transferred to another account) is also determined at this time and is equal to the amount of the first variable annuity income payment divided by the value of an Annuity Unit on the day immediately prior to annuitization:
Annuity Units = $606.51/$13.256932 =
45.750404
The second variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit value as of the day immediately prior to the second variable annuity payment due date:
Second variable annuity income payment = 45.750404 x $13.327695 = $609.75
-6-
The third and
subsequent variable annuity income payments are computed in a manner similar to the second variable annuity income payment.
Note that the amount of the first variable annuity income payment depends on the contract value in the relevant Variable Portfolio on the Annuity Date and thus reflects the investment performance of the Variable Portfolio net of fees and charges during the Accumulation Phase. The amount of that payment determines the number of Annuity Units, which will remain constant during the Annuity Phase (assuming no transfers from the Variable Portfolio). The net investment performance of the Variable Portfolio during the Annuity Phase is reflected in continuing changes during this phase in the Annuity Unit value, which determines the amounts of the second and subsequent variable annuity income payments.
Broker-Dealer Firms Receiving Revenue Sharing Payments
The following list includes the names of member firms of FINRA (or their affiliated broker-dealers) that received a revenue sharing payment of more than $15,000 as of the calendar year ending December 31, 2024, from American
General Life Insurance Company and The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York, both affiliated companies. Your registered representative can provide you with more information about the
compensation arrangements that apply upon the sale of the
Contract.
| Ameriprise Financial Services, Inc. |
Osaic Institutions, Inc. |
| Centaurus Financial, Inc. |
Primerica Financial Services |
| Cetera Advisor Networks LLC |
PRUCO Securities LLC |
| Edward D. Jones & Co., L.P |
Raymond James Financial Services |
| Independent Financial Group |
RBC Capital |
| Lincoln Financial Advisors |
Wells Fargo Advisors WBS |
| MML Investors Services, LLC |
|
We will update this list annually; interim arrangements may not be reflected.
You are encouraged to review the prospectus for each Underlying Fund for any other
compensation arrangements pertaining to the distribution of Underlying Fund shares.
Certain broker dealers with which we have selling agreements are our affiliates. In an effort to promote the sale of our products, affiliated firms may pay their registered representatives additional cash incentives which may include but are not limited to bonus payments, expense payments, health and retirement benefits or the waiver of overhead costs or expenses in connection with the sale of the Contracts, that they would not receive in connection with the sale of contracts issued by unaffiliated companies.
Distribution of Contracts
The contracts are offered on a continuous basis through Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., located at 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302. Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. (“CCS”) is registered as a broker-dealer under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority. CCS is an affiliate of the Company due to common ownership. No underwriting fees are paid in connection with the distribution of the contracts.
-7-
Financial Statements
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, located at 1000 Louisiana Street,
Suite 5800, Houston, TX 77002, serves as the independent registered public accounting firm for FS Variable Separate Account and The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York (“US Life”).
You may obtain a free copy of these financial statements if you write us at
our Annuity Service Center or by calling (855) 421-2692. The financial statements have also been filed with the SEC and can be obtained through its website at
www.sec.gov.
The following financial statements incorporated by reference within the SAI included on the most recent
Form N-VPFS filed with the SEC have been so incorporated in reliance on the reports of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent
registered public accounting firm, given on the authority of said firm as experts in auditing and accounting.
•
The Audited statement of assets and liabilities of FS Variable Separate Account
of The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York as of December 31,
2024 and the related statements of operations and changes in net assets for each of the two years in the period then ended December 31,
2024.
•
The Audited Statutory Financial Statements and Supplemental Information of The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York which comprise the statutory statements of admitted assets,
liabilities and capital and surplus as of December 31, 2024 and December 31,
2023, and the related statutory statements of operations, of changes in capital and surplus, and of cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2024.
The financial statements of US Life should be considered only
as bearing on the ability of US Life to meet its obligation under the contracts.
-8-
Part C — Other Information
Item 27. Exhibits
| Exhibit
Number |
Description |
Location |
| (a) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 5 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 033-85014 and
811-08810, filed on January 30, 1998, Accession
No. 0000950148-98-000132. | |
| (b) |
Custodian Agreements |
Not Applicable |
| (c)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 24 and Amendment No. 24, File Nos. 333-178841 and
811-08810, filed on April 25, 2019, Accession
No. 0001193125-19-119350. | |
| (c)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178841 and 811-08810, filed on January 3,
2012, Accession No. 0000950123-11-104741.
| |
| (d)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 3 and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession
No. 0000950123-13-002976. | |
| (d)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178841 and 811-08810, filed on January 3,
2012, Accession No. 0000950123-11-104741.
| |
| (d)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 2 and Amendment No. 2, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 30, 2012, Accession
No. 0000950123-12-007278. | |
| (d)(4) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 5 and Amendment No. 5, File Nos. 333-178841 and
811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession
No. 000950123-13-002972. | |
| (d)(5) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 5 and Amendment No. 5, File Nos. 333-178841 and
811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession
No. 000950123-13-002972. | |
| (d)(6) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 3 and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession
No. 0000950123-13-002976. | |
| (d)(7) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 3 and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession
No. 0000950123-13-002976. | |
| (d)(8) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 5 and Amendment No. 5, File Nos. 333-178841 and
811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession
No. 000950123-13-002972. | |
| (d)(9) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 9 and Amendment No. 9, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2016, Accession
No. 0001193125-16-569374. | |
| (d)(10) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 10 and Amendment No. 10, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 27, 2017, Accession
No. 0001193125-17-139897. | |
| (d)(11) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 16 and Amendment No. 16, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on September 5, 2018, Accession
No. 0001193125-18-267279. | |
| (d)(12) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 and Amendment No. 17, File Nos. 333-178843 and 811-08810, filed on April 27, 2017, Accession No. 0001193125-19-122180. |
| Exhibit
Number |
Description |
Location |
| (d)(13) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 17 and Amendment No. 17, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 27, 2017, Accession
No. 0001193125-19-122180. | |
| (d)(14) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 17 and Amendment No. 17, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 27, 2017, Accession
No. 0001193125-19-122180. | |
| (d)(15) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178843 and 811-08810, filed on April 27,
2022, Accession No. 0001193125-22-123141.
| |
| (d)(16) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178843 and 811-08810, filed on April 27,
2022, Accession No. 0001193125-22-123141.
| |
| (d)(17) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 3
and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-213339 and
811-08810, filed on December 14, 2016, Accession
No. 0001193125-16-793057. | |
| (d)(18) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 3
and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-213339 and
811-08810, filed on December 14, 2016, Accession
No. 0001193125-16-793057. | |
| (d)(19) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 3
and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-213339 and
811-08810, filed on December 14, 2016, Accession
No. 0001193125-16-793057. | |
| (e)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 3 and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession
No. 0000950123-13-002976. | |
| (e)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 8 and Amendment No. 8, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on December 28, 2015, Accession
No. 0001193125-15-414603. | |
| (e)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 20 and Amendment No. 20, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2021, Accession
No. 0001193125-21-137623. | |
| (f) |
Corporate Documents of Depositor |
|
| (f)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment 1
and Amendment No. 2, File Nos. 333-171493 and
811-04865-01, filed on May 2, 2011, Accession
No. 0001193125-11-120900. | |
| (g) |
Reinsurance Contract |
Not Applicable |
| (h) |
Participation Agreements |
|
| (h)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 5 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 033-85014 and
811-08810, filed on January 30, 1998, Accession
No. 0000950148-98-000132. | |
| (h)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment 1 and
Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-118218 and 811-08369,
filed on December 10, 2004, Accession
No. 0001193125-04-210437. | |
| (h)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 5 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 033-85014 and
811-08810, filed on January 30, 1998, Accession
No. 0000950148-98-000132. | |
| (h)(4) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 333-146491 and 811-08810, filed on August 26, 2010, Accession No. 0000950123-10-081251. |
| Exhibit
Number |
Description |
Location |
| (h)(5) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 18 and Amendment No. 20, File Nos. 033-85014 and
811-08810, filed on November 27, 2002, Accession
No. 0000950148-02-002786. | |
| (h)(5)(a) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1
and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-198224 and
811-08810, filed on November 3, 2014, Accession
No. 0000959123-14-010829. | |
| (h)(6) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 1 and Amendment No. 4, File Nos. 333-146429 and
811-08810, filed on April 28, 2008, Accession
No. 0000950148-08-000097. | |
| (h)(6)(a) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178841 and 811-08810, filed on January 3,
2012, Accession No. 0000950123-11-104741.
| |
| (h)(6)(b) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 7 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on October 5, 2015, Accession
No. 0001193125-15-337551. | |
| (h)(7) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 18 and Amendment No. 20, File Nos. 033-85014 and
811-08810, filed on November 27, 2002, Accession
No. 0000950148-02-002786. | |
| (h)(8) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 10 to Form N-6 Registration Statement, File
No. 333-48457, filed on May 2, 2005, Accession
No. 0001193125-05-091912. | |
| (h)(9) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 11 and Amendment No. 11, File Nos. 333-178841 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2016, Accession
No. 0001193125-16-568259. | |
| (h)(10) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178841 and 811-08810, filed on January 3,
2012, Accession No. 0000950123-11-104741.
| |
| (h)(11) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 2 to Form S-6 Registration Statement, File
No. 333-80191, filed on September 20, 2000, Accession
No. 0000899243-00-002107. | |
| (h)(12) |
Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1
and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-198223 and
811-03859, filed on November 3, 2014, Accession
No. 0000950123-14-010828. | |
| (i) |
Administrative Contracts |
Not Applicable |
| (j) |
Other Material Contracts |
|
| (j)(1) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 7 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 333-178845 and
811-08820, filed on April 29, 2014, Accession
No. 0000950123-14-004354. | |
| (j)(2) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178841 and 811-08810, filed on January 3,
2012, Accession No. 0000950123-11-104741.
| |
| (j)(3) |
Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment
No. 6 and Amendment No. 6, File Nos. 333-178843 and
811-08810, filed on April 29, 2015, Accession
No. 0001193125-15-156381. | |
| (k) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File Nos. 333-178843 and 811-08810, filed on January 3,
2012, Accession No. 0000950123-11-104745.
| |
| (l) |
Filed Herewith | |
| (m) |
Financial Statements Omitted |
None |
| Exhibit
Number |
Description |
Location |
| (n) |
Initial Capital Agreement |
Not Applicable |
| (o) |
Form of Initial Summary Prospectus |
Not Applicable |
| (p) |
Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement,
File No. 333-284520, filed on January 27, 2025, Accession
No. 0001193125-25-013258. | |
| 101. |
Inline Interactive Data File – the instance document does not appear in the Interactive Data File because its iXBRL tags are embedded within the Inline XBRL document. |
Filed Herewith |
Item 28. Directors and Officers of the
Depositor
The directors and principal officers of The United States Life Insurance Company in The City Of New York are set forth below. The business address of each officer and director is 28 Liberty Street, Floor 45th, New York, NY 10005-1400, unless otherwise noted.
| Names Positions and Offices Held with Depositor |
|
| Christopher B. Smith (8) |
Director, Chairman of the Board and President |
| Christopher P. Filiaggi (8) |
Director, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer |
| Timothy M. Heslin |
Director, President, Life US |
| Lisa M. Longino (8) |
Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Investment Officer |
| Jonathan J. Novak (1) |
Director, President, Institutional Markets |
| Bryan A. Pinsky (2) |
Director, President, Individual Retirement |
| William J. Carr |
Director |
| Glen D. Keller |
Director |
| Sandra M. McDermott |
Director |
| John P. Byrne III (3) |
President, Financial Distributor |
| Terri N. Fiedler (3) |
President, Group Retirement |
| Steven D. (“Doug”) Caldwell, Jr. |
Executive Vice President and Chief Risk Officer |
| David Ditillo (6) |
Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer |
| Elizabeth B. Cropper (8) |
Executive Vice President and Chief Human Resources Officer |
| Emily W. Gingrich |
Senior Vice President, Chief Actuary and Corporate Illustration Actuary |
| Patricia M. Schwartz (2) |
Senior Vice President, Head of Valuation and Financial Reporting, and Appointed Actuary |
| Christopher V. Muchmore (2) |
Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Individual Retirement |
| Sai P. Raman (7) |
Senior Vice President, Institutional Markets |
| Eric G. Tarnow |
Senior Vice President, Life Products |
| Mallary L. Reznik (2) |
Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Assistant Secretary |
| Jonathan A. Gold (8) |
Senior Vice President and Deputy Investment Officer |
| Christina M. Haley (2) |
Senior Vice President, Individual Retirement Products |
| Brigitte K. Lenz |
Vice President and Controller |
| Jennifer A. Roth (2) |
Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer, and 38a-1 Compliance Officer |
| Brian O. Moon (8) |
Vice President and Treasurer |
| Julie Cotton Hearne (3) |
Vice President and Corporate Secretary |
| Margaret Chih |
Vice President and Tax Officer |
| Mersini G. Keller |
Vice President and Tax Officer |
| Angel R. Ramos (3) |
Vice President and Tax Officer |
| Preston L. Schnoor (2) |
Vice President, Product Filing |
| Aimy T. Tran (2) |
Vice President, Product Filing |
| Tyra G. Wheatley (3) |
Vice President, Product Filing |
| Thomas Goodwin (3) |
Vice President, Business Case Development |
| Barbara L. Rayll (3) |
Vice President, Business Case Development |
| Michelle D. Campion (4) |
Vice President |
| Names Positions and Offices Held with Depositor |
|
| Korey L. Dalton |
Vice President |
| Jeffrey S. Flinn (5) |
Vice President |
| Christopher J. Hobson (5) |
Vice President |
| Jennifer N. Miller |
Vice President |
| Mark R. Szycher (3) |
Vice President |
| Marjorie D. Brothers (3) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Rosemary Foster (3) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Virginia N. Puzon (2) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Angela G. Bates |
Anti-Money Laundering and Economic Sanctions Compliance Officer |
| Grace D. Harvey |
Illustration Actuary |
| Kenneth R. Kiefer (9) |
Head of Structured Settlements |
| Michael F. Mulligan (1) |
Head of International Pension Risk Transfer |
| Ethan D. Bronsnick (8) |
Head of U.S. Pension Risk Transfer |
| Aileen V. Apuy |
Manager, State Filings |
| Connie C. Merer (2) |
Assistant Manager, State Filings |
| Melissa H. Cozart (3) |
Privacy Officer |
| Thomas Bartolomeo (6) |
Chief Information Security Officer |
(1)
10880 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 1101, Los Angeles, CA 90024
(2)
21650 Oxnard Street, Woodland Hills, CA 91367
(3)
2919 Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas 77019
(4)
2727-A Allen Parkway, 3-D1, Houston, TX 77019
(5)
2929 Allen Parkway, America Tower, Houston, TX 77019
(6)
3211 Shannon Road, Durham, NC 27707
(7)
50 Danbury Road, Wilton, CT 06897
(8)
30 Hudson Street, Jersey City, NJ 07302
(9)
1050 N. Western Street, Amarillo, TX 79106
Item
29. Persons Controlled By or Under Common Control with Depositor or Registrant
The Registrant is a separate account of The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York (“Depositor”). The Depositor is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of Corebridge Financial, Inc. (“Corebridge”). An organizational chart for Corebridge can be found as Exhibit
21 in Corebridge’s Form 10-K, SEC File No. 001-41504, Accession No. 0001889539-25-000014, filed on February 13, 2025. Exhibit 21 is incorporated herein by reference.
Item 30. Indemnification
Insofar as indemnification for liability arising under the Securities Act of
1933 (“Act”) may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the
Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel, the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New
York
To the full extent authorized by law, the corporation shall indemnify any person made, or threatened to be made, a party to an action or proceeding, whether criminal or civil, by reason of the fact that he, his testator or intestate is or was a director or officer of the corporation or serves or served in any capacity in any other corporation at the request of the corporation. Nothing contained herein shall affect any rights to indemnification to which corporate personnel other than directors and officers may be entitled by contract or otherwise under law.
Item
31. Principal Underwriter
(a) Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. acts as distributor for the following
investment companies:
American General Life Insurance Company
Variable Separate Account
Variable Annuity Account Five
Variable Annuity Account Seven
Variable Annuity Account Nine
AG Separate Account D
AGL Separate Account I of AGL
AGL Separate Account VL-R
The United States Life Insurance Company in
the City of New York
FS Variable Separate Account
FS Variable Annuity Account Five
USL Separate Account VL-R
USL Separate Account USL A
USL Separate Account RS
The Variable Annuity Life Insurance
Company
Variable Annuity Life Insurance Co Separate Account A
Seasons Series Trust
SunAmerica Series Trust
VALIC Company I
(b) Directors, Officers and principal place of business:
| Officer/Directors* |
Position |
| Christina Nasta |
Director, Chairman, President and Executive Chief Officer |
| John P. Byrne III (1) |
Director |
| Nicholas G. Intrieri |
Director |
| Ryan Tapak |
Director |
| Eric Taylor |
Director |
| Frank Curran |
Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Chief Operating Officer, Treasurer and Controller |
| Michael Fortey (1) |
Chief Compliance Officer |
| Julie A. Cotton Hearne (1) |
Vice President and Secretary |
| Margaret Chih (2) |
Vice President, Tax Officer |
| Mersini G. Keller |
Vice President, Tax Officer |
| John T. Genoy |
Vice President |
| Mallary L. Reznik (2) |
Vice President |
| Marjorie Brothers (1) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Rosemary Foster (1) |
Assistant Secretary |
| Virginia N. Puzon (2) |
Assistant Secretary |
*
Unless otherwise indicated, the principal business address of Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. and of each of the above individuals is 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302.
(1)
Principal business address 2919 Allen Parkway, Houston, TX 77019
(2)
Principal business address 21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland Hills, CA 91367-4997
(c) Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. retains no compensation or commissions from the Registrant.
Item
32. Location of Accounts and Records
All records referenced under Section 31(a) of the 1940 Act, and Rules 31a-1
through 31a-3 thereunder, are maintained and in the custody of The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York at its principal executive office
located at 28 Liberty Street, Floor 45th, New York, NY 10005-1400 or at The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York’s Annuity Service Center located at P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570.
Item 33. Management Services
Not Applicable.
Item 34. Fee Representation and Other Representations
Fee Representation
Depositor represents that the fees and charges to be deducted under the Contracts described in the prospectus contained in this Registration Statement, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Depositor in accordance with Section 26(f)(2)(A) of the Investment Company Act of 1940.
Other Representations
The Registrant hereby represents that it is relying on the No-Action Letter issued by the Division of Investment Management to the American Council of Life Insurance dated November 28, 1988 (Commission Ref. No. IP-6-88). Registrant has complied with conditions one through four on the No-Action Letter.
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment
Company Act of 1940, the Registrant, FS Variable Separate Account, certifies that it meets all of the requirements for effectiveness of this Registration Statement
under rule 485(b) under the Securities Act and has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, duly authorized, in the City of New York, and State of New York on this
22nd day of April, 2025.
FS Variable Separate Account
(Registrant)
BY: THE UNITED STATES LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY IN THE CITY OF NEW
YORK
(On behalf of the Registrant and itself)
(On behalf of the Registrant and itself)
BY: * CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI
CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI
DIRECTOR, SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI
DIRECTOR, SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates
indicated.
| Signature |
Title |
Date |
| *CHRISTOPHER B. SMITH CHRISTOPHER B. SMITH |
Director, Chairman of the Board, and President (Principal Executive Officer) |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI |
Director, Senior Vice President, and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer) (Principal Accounting Officer) |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *WILLIAM J. CARR WILLIAM J. CARR |
Director |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *TIMOTHY M. HESLIN TIMOTHY M. HESLIN |
Director |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *GLEN D. KELLER GLEN D. KELLER |
Director |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *LISA M. LONGINO LISA M. LONGINO |
Director |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *SANDRA M. MCDERMOTT SANDRA M. MCDERMOTT |
Director |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *JONATHAN J. NOVAK JONATHAN J. NOVAK |
Director |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *BRYAN A. PINSKY BRYAN A. PINSKY |
Director |
April 22, 2025 |
| | ||
| *BY: /s/ TRINA SANDOVAL
TRINA SANDOVAL
Attorney-in-Fact pursuant to Powers
of Attorney filed previously and/or
herewith. |
|
April 22,
2025 |
ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS
Serious News for Serious Traders! Try StreetInsider.com Premium Free!
You May Also Be Interested In
- Skanska builds a new convention center hotel in Cincinnati, Ohio, USA, for USD 325M, about SEK 3.0 billion
- LONGi Awarded "2026 Climate Lighthouse" Outstanding Case of 2026 Shanghai Climate Week: Zero-Carbon Technology Leads Green Transition
- Coca-Cola's World Cup AI Avatar Showcases Brand's Cutting-edge AI Innovation
Create E-mail Alert Related Categories
SEC FilingsSign up for StreetInsider Free!
Receive full access to all new and archived articles, unlimited portfolio tracking, e-mail alerts, custom newswires and RSS feeds - and more!



Tweet
Share